Service Manual C4000 - C4100 PDF

SERVICE MANUAL Rosco
Color Laser Page Printer
EPSON
AcuLaser C4000 AcuLaser C4100
SEPG01012
Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being informed of them. The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof. EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright 2003 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. Imaging & Information Product Division TPCS Quality Assurance Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment. DANGER WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings. Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. 2. 3. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, BE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURIES FROM METAL PARTS WITH SHARP EDGES.
4.
WARNING
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS. DO NOT REPLACE IMPERFECTLY FUNCTIONING COMPONENTS WITH COMPONENTS WHICH ARE NOT MANUFACTURED BY EPSON. IF SECOND SOURCE ICS OR OTHER COMPONENTS WHICH HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED ARE USED, THEY COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EPSON PRODUCT, OR COULD VOID THE WARRANTY OFFERED BY EPSON.
About This Manual

This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
Symbols Used in this Manual
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. CHAPTER 1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. CHAPTER 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLES Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the product. CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING Provides the step-by-step procedures for troubleshooting. CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling/assembling and adjusting the product. CHAPTER 5 ADJUSTMENT Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. APPENDIX. Provides the following additional information for reference: Connector pin assignments Electric circuit boards components layout Exploded diagram Electrical circuit boards schematics
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the products quality. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment. May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life. Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in question may be adversely affected.
C A U T IO N
C H E C K P O IN T
W A R N IN G
Abbreviation
This manual uses unique abbreviations and acronyms which may differ from those in common use. Please note that they are used in the manual descriptions without explanation. The main abbreviations and acronyms are listed below. Because the following list was formed as a general reference, some items on the list may not appear in this manual. In principle most acronyms were formed from the capitalized first letters of the English term for the items (there are exceptions) and most single word abbreviations were formed either will all capitals or with only the first letter as a capital. [A] ADC ALM Assy Aux. [B] B/W BCR Bk BCR BRKT BTR BUR [C] C CCW Cl. Clk CHK CK Conpane Cont CR CRU CRUM CST CVR CW [D] DB Deve Diag dpi DTS Dup [E] Elec EP ESS [F] F FDR Charge Roll Customer Replaceable Unit CRU Memory Cassette Cover Clockwise FG FIP FRU FX [G] GG GND [H] H H/R HCF HCS Hex HVPS [I] I/F I/L ID [J] Jxx Frame Ground Fault Isolation Procedure Field Replaceable Unit Fuji Xerox
Auto Density Control Alarm Assembly Auxiliary
Black and White Bias Charge Roll Black Bias Charge Roll Bracket Bias Transfer Roll Back Up Roll
Guide Gauge Ground
Developing Bias Developer Diagnostic dots per inch Detack Saw Duplex
High Heat Roll High Capacity Feeder High Capacity Stacker Hexadecimal High Voltage Power Supply
Cyan Counter Clockwise Clutch Clock Check Check Control Panel Controller
Electric Electro Photography Electric Sub System
Interface Interlock Image Density
Front Feeder
Jack xx
[L] L L L/H L/P LD LEF LVPS
Left Low Left Hand Low Paper Laser Diode Long Edge Feed Low Voltage Power Supply
[O] OHP OPC OPT [P] Pyy P/J P/H P/R PL PLT PPM PV PWB PWBA [R] R R R/H RDY Regi ROS RRP RTN
Overhead Projector Organic Photo Conductor Option
[M] M M/N Mag MCU Mech MOT MSI [N] N/F N/P NPS NV NVM
Magenta Multi National Magnetic Machine Control Unit Mechanical Motor Multi Sheet Inserter
Plug yy Plug and Jack Paper Handling Pressure Roll Plate Plate Print Per Minute Print Volume Printed Wiring Board PWB Assembly
[S] SEF SG SNR SNS Sol SOS SPI STD STK STND SW Sync [T] T Temp TR TTL [X] Xero [Y] Y YMCBk YMCK
Short Edge Feed Signal Ground Sensor Sensor Solenoid Start Of Scan Scan Per Inch Stamdard Stacker Standard Switch Synchronous
Normal Force No Paper No Paper Sensor Non Volatile Non Volatile Memory
Right Rear Right Hand Ready Registration Raster Output Scanner Removal and Replacement Procedure Return
Tooth (number of Gear) Temperature Transfer Trangistor-Transistor Logic
Xerographic
Yellow Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/ Black Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/ Black
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe the Warnings and Cautions. Do not do anything that is dangerous or not within the scope of this document. Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described in this manual. In addition to the descriptions below and those given in this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that are dangerous. Be aware of these when you are working with the printer.
Power Supply
Before starting any service procedure, switch off the printer power and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If you must service the printer when the power is applied, be aware of the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this manual.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch any live part unless you are instructed to do so by a service procedure. The LVPS power supply switch/inlet part is live even when the power switch has been turned off. Do not touch any live part. Do not touch electrified components except when instructions indicate it is permissible to do so.
Figure 0-1. Power Supply
Mechanical Components
If you service a driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn off the power and unplug the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly.
.
High Temperature Assembly

To prevent you from becoming injured or burned, do the following: Before working with a high temperature Assembly (e.g., Fuser Assembly), turn off the power, unplug the power cord and wait until it cools down.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly (printer) is being driven.
W A R N IN G
The high temperature Assembly is very hot immediately after any printer operations. Wait at least 40 minutes before you start working on the printer.
Laser Beam
W A R N IN G
Do not expose yourself to the laser beam to prevent injury (blindness). Do not open the cover that has the laser beam warning label. If you disassemble or assemble the printer, turn off the power. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual. Understand how the laser beam functions and take maximum precautions not to injure yourself or anyone around you. Figure 0-2. Laser Beam
NOTE: The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light). It has excellent monochromaticity and convergence. A thin laser beam reaches long distances. Because of its convergence characteristic, the laser beam converges into one point, causing high density and high temperature. A laser beam is harmful to the human body. NOTE: The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
Warning and Caution Labels

Warning labels and Caution labels are placed on the printer to help prevent accidents. When maintaining the printer, confirm that these labels are not dirty or peeling off. Caution label for high temperature components
Figure 0-3. Warning and Caution Labels
Safety System Schematic

The schematic below outlines the features of the printer's safety system. For details about signal wires, see "Appendix - Wiring Diagram".
Manual Contents
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Appendix PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS OPERATING PRINCIPLES TROUBLESHOOTING DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ADJUSTMENT MAINTENANCE AcuLaser C4100
Revision Status
Revision A B Issued Date March 18, 2002 April 19, 2002 First Release Chapter 1 1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List PRINTER ADJUST MENU Cleaning Cycle and comment is added. Chapter 3 Reference page number in FIP is added. 3.3 Level 2 FIP 3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message is added. 3.3.2.1 List of Printer Messages is added. 3.3.2.2 Details of Status Message and Treatment is added. 3.3.2.3 Details of Error Message and Treatment is added. 3.3.2.4 Details of Warning Message and Treatment is added. 3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages is added. FIP-16 NV-RAM Error is added. FIP-28 Fuser Life Over is added. FIP-48 Engine Communication Error is added. FIP-49 Verify (DIMM Slot Related) Error is added. FIP-50 Error in Standard RAM (Slot 0, 1) is added. FIP-51 ROM Checksum Error (MASK ROM for Font) is added. FIP-52 ROM Checksum Error (CODE, IPL) is added. FIP-53 ROM Module (DIMM Slot A Related) Error is added. FIP-54 EEPROM Writing Error is added. FIP-55 CCNV Hardware Error is added. FIP-56 Engine Initialization Error is added. FIP-57 SRAM (for Compression) Initialization Hardware Error is added. FIP-58 Video System Hardware Error (including PWM Calibration Error IC) is added. FIP-59 Built-in Network Hardware Error is added. FIP-60 DIMM SPD Error is added. Chapter 6 6.2 Maintenance Menu Table 6-2. List of control information and control method The range of count is changed. A comment is added. Description
Revision C
Issued Date November 15, 2002
Description Preface A misdescription deleted. Chapter3 3-1-4 Test print by engine itself added. Chapter 1 1.5.1 Reliability The value of MPBF is fixed 1.10 Consumable Components The value of Transfer Unit Lifetime is revised 1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List PRINTER ADJUST MENU is revised 1.14.6.7 Printer Adjust Menu Part of text is revised Chapter 6 6.1.2 Consumable components and components that require regular replacement The value of Transfer Unit Lifetime is revised The parts code of Roll Assy is fixed Chapter 7 Additional information added for AcuLaser C4100
August 4, 2003
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Product Descriptions
1.1 Features ................................................................................................ 20 1.2 Specifications ...................................................................................... 22 1.2.1 Basic Specifications ...................................................................... 22 1.3 Various Sensors .................................................................................. 29 1.4 Paper Specifications ........................................................................... 31 1.4.1 Paper Types .................................................................................. 31 1.4.2 The paper that should not be used with this printer ...................... 31 1.4.3 Paper Source Classification .......................................................... 32 1.4.4 Printing Area .................................................................................. 32 1.5 Reliability and Durability ..................................................................... 33 1.5.1 Reliability ....................................................................................... 33 1.5.2 Durability ....................................................................................... 34 1.5.3 Maintenance .................................................................................. 34 1.6 Operating Conditions (Including Comsumables) ......................................................................... 35 1.7 Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit (Consumables Packaged), and Optional Products .......................................................... 36 1.8 Electrical Feature ................................................................................. 37 1.9 Compliance with Standards and Regulations .................................. 38 1.10 Consumable Components ................................................................ 38 1.11 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 39 1.12 Exterior View and Unit Names .......................................................... 40 1.13 Controller Unit Specifications .......................................................... 42 1.13.1 Controller Basic Specifications .................................................... 42 1.13.2 Controller Configuration .............................................................. 43 1.13.3 External Interface Specifications ................................................. 43 1.14 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 48 1.14.1 Exterior View and Names ............................................................ 48 1.14.2 Display Elements Description ..................................................... 49 1.14.3 Button Functions Description ...................................................... 50 1.14.4 Special Operations ...................................................................... 51 1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List ................................................................ 52 1.14.6 Explanation of Each Setting Menu and Setting Items ................. 62 1.15 About RAM Expansion ...................................................................... 69 1.16 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 69
Chapter 2 Operating Principles

2.1 Print Process ....................................................................................... 71 2.1.1 Print Process Overview ................................................................. 71 2.1.2 Print Process Diagram .................................................................. 72 2.1.3 Print Process Technical Explanation ............................................. 73 2.2 Flow of Print Data ................................................................................ 77 2.2.1 Data Flow ...................................................................................... 77 2.3 Drive Transmission Path .................................................................... 78 2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) ..................................................... 78 2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) .................................................... 79 2.3.3 HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5 ~ 8) (Y, M, C, K) ................................. 79 2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) .................................................. 80 2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) ...................................................... 81 2.4 Paper Feed ........................................................................................... 82 2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (without options in use) ..................................... 82 2.4.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram ............................................................ 82 2.5 Functions of Main Components ......................................................... 84 2.5.1 Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2) ........................................................... 84 2.5.2 Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3) ............................................................. 85 2.5.3 Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1) ........................................................ 86 2.5.4 Chute Assy In (PL6.1) ................................................................... 86 2.5.5 Chute Assy Out (PL7.1) ................................................................ 87 2.5.6 Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1) ................................................................ 88
2.5.7 Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1) ................................................... 89 2.5.8 Xerographics (PL11.1) .................................................................. 92 2.5.9 TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3) ............................................................... 93 2.5.10 Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1) ................................................ 94 2.5.11 Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1) .. 94 2.6 Switches and Sensors ........................................................................ 96 2.7 Mode ..................................................................................................... 97 2.7.1 Print Mode ..................................................................................... 97 2.7.2 Operation Mode ............................................................................. 97 2.8 Control .................................................................................................. 98 2.8.1 Paper Size Control ........................................................................ 98 2.8.2 Paper Supply Selection Control .................................................... 98 2.8.3 ROS Light Control ......................................................................... 98 2.8.4 PROCESS CONTROL .................................................................. 99 2.8.5 Color Registration Control ........................................................... 102 2.8.6 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Control ...................................................... 103 2.8.7 Toner Control .............................................................................. 104 2.8.8 Fuser Control ............................................................................... 105 2.9 Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder) 106 2.10 Drive Transmission Path ................................................................ 106 2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER ............................................................. 106 2.10.2 Gear Layout ............................................................................... 107 2.11 Paper Feed ....................................................................................... 108 2.11.1 Paper Feed Path ....................................................................... 108 2.11.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram ......................................................... 108 2.12 Functions of Main Components ..................................................... 109 2.12.1 Two Tray Module II/III (PL17.2 ~ 3) .......................................... 109 2.12.2 Two Tray Module IV (PL17.4) ................................................... 111 2.13 Switches and Sensors .................................................................... 112 2.14 Controller Operating Principles ..................................................... 113
3.1.3 Precautions When Performing Work ........................................... 119 3.1.4 Test print by engine itself ............................................................ 120 3.1.5 Precautions When Using FIP ...................................................... 121 3.2 Level 1 FIP .......................................................................................... 122 3.2.1 Level 1 FIP Flowchart ................................................................. 122 3.3 Level 2 FIP .......................................................................................... 123 3.3.1 Level 2 FIP .................................................................................. 123 3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message ................................. 123 3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages ....................................................... 133 3.3.4 Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP ............................................. 261 3.3.5 Printer Operation Troubleshooting FIP ....................................... 282 3.3.6 Other FIP ..................................................................................... 294 3.4 Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit ........................................ 299 3.4.1 Level 2 FIP .................................................................................. 299
Chapter 4 Disassembly and Assembly

4.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 318 4.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly ............................... 318 4.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................... 318 4.1.3 Items to Check after Assembly ................................................... 318 4.2 Disassembly Assembly Procedures ................................................ 319 4.2.1 Large capacity paper unit removal .............................................. 320 4.2.2 Removing/Replacing the Consumables ...................................... 321 4.2.3 Updating the Main Controller Program ROM .............................. 321 4.2.4 COVER ....................................................................................... 324 4.2.5 CHASIS & FEEDER/CASSETTE ................................................ 334 4.2.6 PAPER CASSETTE .................................................................... 336 4.2.7 PAPER FEEDER ........................................................................ 338 4.2.8 HOUSING ASSY RETARD ......................................................... 371 4.2.9 CHUTE ASSY IN ......................................................................... 375 4.2.10 CHUTE ASSY OUT ................................................................... 380 4.2.11 CHUTE ASSY EXIT .................................................................. 392 4.2.12 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY ..................................................... 396 4.2.13 REGISTRATION ....................................................................... 398 4.2.14 XEROGRAPHICS ..................................................................... 402 4.2.15 TCRU ASSSY ........................................................................... 404 4.2.16 FRAME ...................................................................................... 412 4.2.17 DRIVE ....................................................................................... 418
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 118 3.1.1 Troubleshooting Procedure ......................................................... 118 3.1.2 Preliminary Checks ..................................................................... 118
4.2.18 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................ 419 4.2.19 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................ 428 4.2.20 Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option FEEDER UNIT) ....................................................................... 430
7.1.6 Control Panel .............................................................................. 498 7.1.7 Status Sheet ................................................................................ 509 7.2 Panel Message For Troubleshooting .............................................. 7.2.1 List of Printer Messages .............................................................. 7.2.2 Details of Error Message and Treatment .................................... 7.2.3 Details of Warning Message and Treatment ............................... 7.3 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 7.3.1 Consumable components and regularly replaced parts .............. 7.3.2 Engine Status Sheet ................................................................... 7.3.3 List of control information and control methods .......................... 510 510 511 512 513 513 516 517
Chapter 5 Adjustment
5.1 USB ID Input ....................................................................................... 473 5.1.1 Installation Procedure for Program .............................................. 473 5.1.2 Procedure for program operation ................................................ 473 5.1.3 USB ID Confirmation ................................................................... 475
7.4 Parts List for AL-C4100 ..................................................................... 518 7.5 Exploded Diagram ............................................................................. 522 7.6 Circuit Schematic .............................................................................. 546
Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 478 6.1.1 Preparatory Maintenance ............................................................ 478 6.1.2 Consumable components and components that require regular replacement .......................................................................................... 478 6.1.3 Cleaning ...................................................................................... 480 6.2 Maintenance Menu ............................................................................ 481 6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu .................................................. 481 6.2.2 Engine Status Sheet .................................................................... 481 6.2.3 Clear Error Log ............................................................................ 482 6.3 Consumable components replacement .......................................... 484 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge replacement ...................................................... 484 6.3.2 Photoconductor Unit replacement ............................................... 486 6.3.3 Fuser Unit replacement ............................................................... 488 6.3.4 Transfer Unit replacement ........................................................... 489 6.4 Components that require regular replacement .............................. 489 6.5 Color Registration Adjustment ........................................................ 490
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1 Parts List and Explodede Diagram for Main Unit of The AcuLaser C4000 ........................................................................................................ 555 8.1.1 Attention on handling the parts list .............................................. 555 8.1.2 Parts List Tables ......................................................................... 556 8.1.3 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................... 560 8.2 Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................ 8.2.1 P/J Locations ............................................................................... 8.2.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables ........................................... 8.2.3 High-pressure electrode Location Tables ................................... 584 584 588 592
8.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information ........................................ 594 8.3.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram ............................................ 594 8.3.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components ............... 596 8.3.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components .......................................................................... 598 8.4 Parts List and Exploded Diagram for Large Capacity Paper Unit of The AcuLaser C4000 ...................................................................................... 622 8.4.1 Attention on handling the part list ................................................ 622 8.4.2 Parts List Tables ......................................................................... 623 8.4.3 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................... 624 8.5 Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................ 629 8.5.1 P/J Locations ............................................................................... 629 8.5.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables ........................................... 630
Chapter 7 AcuLaser C4100

7.1 Product Descriptions ........................................................................ 493 7.1.1 Features ...................................................................................... 493 7.1.2 Printer Basic Specification ........................................................... 494 7.1.3 Various Sensors .......................................................................... 497 7.1.4 Paper Specifications .................................................................... 497 7.1.5 Consumable Components ........................................................... 497
8.6 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information ........................................ 631 8.6.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram ............................................ 631 8.6.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components ............... 633 8.6.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components .......................................................................... 634 8.7 Component Layout ............................................................................ 641 8.8 Circuit Diagrams ................................................................................ 643
CHAPTER
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100
Revision D
1.1 Features
This printer is a non-impact color page printer that takes advantage of a laser and electrophotographic technologies. It provides 1200/600/300 dpi of resolution and 16 ppm (A4/LT) of printing speed for both color and monochrome printing. The main features of the printer are as follows:
CONTROLLER FEATURES
1. High-speed controller with a new CPU adopted 64-bit RISC CPU ---- PowerPC 750CX 400 MHz 64-bit high-speed memory ---- PC100 SDRAM DIMM 64 MB of standard RAM By installing additional RAM, the memory can be expanded up to 576 MB (64 MB + 512 MB) (Furthermore, by replacing the standard RAM with a 512 MB RAM, the memory can be expanded up to 1024 MB) 2. Enhanced ASIC is equipped (VIP2, CDMC) The color management technologies shown below have been incorporated into the hardware to achieve high-speed processing. CCNV3 CCMP CLRCTL (color conversion of RGB into CMYK) (color compression for RGBX or CMYKX and expansion) (color adjustment)
ENGINE FEATURES
1. A4 tandem engine, a high-speed engine which printing speed is 16 PPM for both color and monochrome printing (when printing A4/LT). Engine for True 1200 dpi of high resolution and full-color printing (however printing speed is reduced by half). 2. The Duplex Print Unit is equipped as standard. Special types of paper such as thick paper, OHP sheets (transparency), label sealing sheets, and envelopes cannot be printed in duplex. 3. By using high quality plain paper, higher quality printing is possible. 4. Capable of printing on thick paper and OHP sheets for laser printers. 5. Provides easy maintenance of a color laser printer. The users can replace all consumables. Toner cartridges (C, M, Y, K) Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit 6. Standard paper feed devices are the following 2-bin; the MP Tray (up to 100 sheets) and the Lower Cassette (up to 500 sheets, A4/LT). By adding the two optional Lower Cassette (up to 500 sheets * 2 cassettes, A4/LT), a maximum of 1600 sheets can be fed from the 4-bin in total. 7. Standard paper eject is up to 250 sheets into the Face-down tray.
3. Three types of standard interface are available IEEE 1284 compatible and ECP compatible parallel Interface Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 1.1 4. By expanding memory with RAM DIMMs, the following functions can be enhanced and speeded up CPGI drawing area Image creating speed Resolution 5. Firmware update function is possible (RCC compatible) when a Flash DIMM is installed 6. HDD can be installed
Product Descriptions
Features
1-20

7. Installed emulation Standard
Revision D
SOFTWARE FEATURES
1. Color technologies Smooth expanding of color images by ESC/ Page-Color 2. Reserve job function When the printer is equipped with Option HDD, the following "Reserve Job" can be used. Re-print Job Verify Job Stored Job Confidential Job Registration of job information is performed by the ESC/Page-Color driver. NOTE: Password protection is only available for "Confidential Jobs." 3. Monitoring of the printer status and printer environment by bi-directional EJL and MIB 4. Remote panel function through a Web browser (compatible with Java JDK1.1) 5. HDD (option) Electronic sorting I/F receive buffer expansion (only for Ethernet I/F) Font registration in the PostScript3 mode Registration of Reserve Job and Confidential Job Registering Form Overlay (only available for Windows environment) 6. Changing the Manual Feed specification. Same as EPL5900
ESC/Page-Color, PCL5e (B/W), GL-Like (B/W), FX (B/W), ESCP2(B/W), I239X (B/W), ESC/Page (B/W) Adobe Postscript3 EJL, PJL mode RCC mode (firmware update) DIAG mode (engine adjustment) Status Sheet (description of remaining levels of current consumables, warning occurrences, Part Numbers) Reserve Job List Form Overlay List Network Status Sheet AUX Status Sheet (only when Type-B Level 3 is installed) PS3 Status Sheet (only when PostScript 3 module is installed) Font Sample (for each mode) Hex dump Support Mode Standby Mode Setting Printer Adjust Menu Maintenance Mode (Engine Status sheet)
Options Others
Auxiliary software
Figure 1-1. Exterior View of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000 Product Descriptions Features 1-21
Revision D
1.2 Specifications
This section describes specifications for EPSON AcuLaser C4000.
1.2.1.2 Printer Basic Specification

METHOD
Electrophotographic method using scanning semiconductor laser beam and dry two-component toner.
1.2.1 Basic Specifications

1.2.1.1 Process Specifications
Printer Type Light Source Photoconductor Unit Charging Development Toner Transfer Fixing Semi-conductive laser beam+Electrophotographic with dry 2 ingredients nonmagnetic toner 4 beam semi-conductor laser OPC (Organic Photoconductor) drum Roller charger Exposed area development Chemical spherical toner and carrier (in development unit) Roller transfer method Heated roller method and flexible belt nip method
RESOLUTION
600dpi and 1,200dpi
WARMING UP TIME
30 or less seconds : when printer is powered on, or standby mode (22C 55% RH environment, at rated voltage)
PRINT MODE
600dpi Mode (Normal paper): 600dpi Mode (Special paper): 1200dpi Mode: High gross Mode: Full speed Low speed Low speed Low speed
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type
Mode Normal (low temp) Normal (high temp) Normal paper High quality (low temp) High qality (high temp) <video I/F name> <Plain paper-L mode> <Plain paper-H mode> <Thicker paper-L mode> <Thicker paper-H mode) Paper type, thickness Plain paper: 60~75g/m2 Plain paer: 65~85g/m2 High quality paper: 76~99g/ m2 High quality paper: 85~105g/m2
Specifications
1-22
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type
Mode Thick1 Thick2 Special paper Label (low temp) Label (high temp) OHP Envelope <video I/F name> <Heavier paper-H mode> <Label-L mode> <Label-H mode> <OHP mode> <Envelope mode> Paper type, thickness Thick paper: 160g/216m2 Label Label OHP films Envelope <Heavier paper-L mode> Thick paper: 100~159g/m2
Revision D
PAPER FEED REFERENCE

Centerline reference for each paper size and each paper feeder.
PRINTING SPEED Table 1-2. First Printing Time

Standard MP Tray Simplex Printing Duplex Printing 15.0 24.0 23.0 39.0 Cassette 1 15.5 24.5 23.5 39.5 Optional Feeder 500 Sheets Unit Cassette 2 17.0 27.5 25.0 42.5 Cassette 3 18.5 30.5 26.5 35.5
A4 (SEF)
NOTE: Printing Speed values at full speed mode are stated upper rows of the each column, and values at low speed mode are in lower rows of each column.
Table 1-3. Continuous printing speed

Paper size A4/Letter Print mode Full speed mode Low speed mode Sinplex printing 16 8 Duplex printing 10 5
NOTE 1: Speeds shown are for plain paper L and H modes. NOTE 2: Cleaning cycles occur during printing.
Specifications
1-23
Revision D
PAPER FEED Table 1-4. Paper Feed

Paper Source Sheets Containing Capacity *1 100 Sheets TBD Sheets *2 (10mm) *3 Paper Size A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL, GLT*5, HLT, F4*5 Unspecified sizes Min size : 88.9 x 139.7 mm Max size : 215.9 x 355.6 mm 900mm in length Applicable Paper Type *4 Standard
Table 1-5. Optional Paper Source Combination

Combination
(1) MP Tray (100 sheets*1) Cassette 1 (500 Sheets) 500 Sheets x 2 Cassette Unit
(2)
First Cassette Optional Second and Third Cassette
Standard Paper Normal Paper
Total Sheets
600
1,600
*1: RX-80 (80g/m2)

Standard Paper Normal Paper Special Applications (Labels, Transparencies) 190 g/m2
1 Sheet
TBD Sheets Standard MP Tray TBD Sheets
A4, LT
Official Postcard Envelopes (Monarch, C10, DL, C5, C6*5, ISO-B5*5) (Yokei #2, 3, 4, Youchoukei #3)*5 Unspecified size Min size : 90mm (width) 143mm (length) (with flap opened)
TBD Sheets (10mm)
---
Cassette Optional 500 Sheets Unit
500 sheets *2*3 A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL (58mm) 500 sheets *2*3 A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL (58mm)
Standard Paper Normal Paper Standard Paper Normal Paper
*1: The values in ( ) is capable containing height *2: Standard Paper : at FX P Paper (64g/ m2) *3: Standard Paper : at Fuji XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75 g/ m2) *4: Refer to 1.4 "Paper Specifications" *5: Paper size supported by the firmware (unsupported by the video I/F)
Specifications
1-24
Revision D
APPLICABLE PAPER SIZES, PAPER TYPES, AND PAPER ORIENTATION Table 1-6. Applicable Paper Sizes, Paper Types, and Paper Orientation 1
Paper Size A4 A5*6 B5 LT Normal Paper HLT GLG LGL EXE GLT*5 F4*5 Uncut Paper *1 Dimensions in mm (inches) 210.00 x 297.00 148.00 x 210.00 182.00 x 257.00 215.90 x 279.40 (8.50 x 11.00) 139.70 x 215.90 (5.50 x 8.50) 215.90 x 330.00 (8.50 x 13.00) 215.90 x 335.60 (8.50 x 14.00) 184.15 x 266.70 (7.25 x 10.50) 203.20 x 266.70 (8.00 x 10.50) 210.00 x 330.00 Width: 88.90 ~ 215.90 Length: 139.70 ~ 900.00

Standard cassette MP Tray (500 Sheets)
Optional 500 Sheets Unit *2
Duplex Printing *3
Paper Orientation SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF
*1: Paper of more than 355.60mm (14 inches) in length must be fed manually. *2: Supported envelope sizes differ by destinations. *3: Refer to "Envelope Orientation" for details on feeding direction of envelopes. *4: Flatten the curling paper. *5: Paper size supported by the firmware (unsupported by the video I/F) *6: When installing the A5 paper to cassette, set exclusive adapter in cassette. LEF (Long Edge Feed) : the long edge of the paper is fed to the printer. SEF (Short Edge Feed) : the short edge of the paper is fed to the printer. ---: Unsupported
Specifications
1-25

Special Applications : See Table 1-7
Revision D
Table 1-7. Applicable Paper Sizes, Paper Types, and Paper Orientation 2
Paper Size Dimensions in mm (inches) 100.00 x 148.00 A4:210 x 297, LT:215.9 x 279.4 A4:210 x 297, LT:215.9 x 279.4 Monarch Envelopes *2*3*4 Com-10 DL C5 C6*5 ISO-B5*5 98.43 x 190.50 (3 7/8 x 7 1/2) 104.78 x 241.30 (4 1/8 x 9 1/2) 110.00 x 220.00 162.00 x 229.00 114.00 x 162.00 176.00 x 250.00 Paper Tray Standard cassette (500 Sheets)

Optional 500 Sheets Unit *2

Duplex Printing *3

Paper Orientation SEF SEF SEF SEF*3 SEF*3 SEF*3 SEF*3 SEF*3 SEF*3
Official Postcard *4
Transparency
Special Applications
Labels
*1: Paper of more than 355.60mm (14 inches) in length must be fed manually. *2: Supported envelope sizes differ by destinations. *3: Refer to Section "Envelope Orientation" for details on feeding direction of envelopes. *4: Flatten the curling paper. *5: Paper size supported by the firmware (unsupported by the video I/F) *6: When installing the A5 paper to cassette, set exclusive adapter in cassette. LEF (Long Edge Feed) : the long edge of the paper is fed to the printer. SEF (Short Edge Feed) : the short edge of the paper is fed to the printer. ---: Unsupported
Specifications
1-26

Duplex Unit
Revision D
ENVELOPE ORIENTATION
Paper size: The regular size and unspecified size described in the Table 1-6 and 1-7 can be fed. Paper thikneess: 64 ~ 105g/m2 500 sheets x 2 unit (Large capacity paper unit)
Feeding Direction
Same specification as cassette of the main unit
OUTPUT PAPER CAPACITY

Envelope Type C5, ISO-B5 Com-10, DL, C6 Monarch
Maximum of 250 sheets to face-down tray (at 22C, 55%RH, standard paper).
NOTE 1: Only envelopes without adhesive or adhesive tapes can be used. NOTE 2: Envelopes have to be set with flap opened, and should be fed by LEF if width dimension is longer than length dimension. NOTE 3: A printing side is set to the bottom.
DIMENSIONS
Stand Alone Outline Dimensions and Weights
Table 1-8. Stand Alone Outline Dimensions and Weights

Width Standard Optional Main Unit only 500 Sheets Unit 439 439 Depth 638 563 Height 445 336 Weight 29.8 19.0
PAPER FEED SIZES

Main Unit MP Tray Paper size: Regular paper sizes or unspecified paper sizes within following useable paper size.
Minimum Maximum Width 88.9mm x to Length 139.7mm Width 215.9mm x to Length 355.6mm to 900.0mm
Unit: mm, kg NOTE 1: Unpacked dimensions are stated. NOTE 2: Dimensions has 1%mm difference, weights are 1%kg difference. NOTE 3: Main unit weights do not including consumable items Outline Dimensions and Weights with Options installed
Paper thikneess: 60 ~ 216g/m2 (Uncut paper for length 355.6mm to 900.0mm are 64 ~ 105g/m2) Cassette Paper size: Only the regular size described in the Table 1-6 and 1-7 can be fed. Paper thikneess: 60 ~ 105g/m2
Table 1-9. Outline Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed

Width Main Unit and 500 Sheets Unit 439 Depth 638 Height 781 Weight 48.8
Unit: mm, kg NOTE 1: Unpacked dimensions are stated. NOTE 2: Dimensions has 1%mm difference, weights are 1%kg difference. NOTE 3: Main unit weights do not including consumable items.
Specifications
1-27
Revision D
CONSUMABLE COMPONENTS
Toner Cartridge: Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y) Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit * Refer to Consumable Components on Page 38. NOTE: Refer to Ch6 about handling the consumable components.
PRODUCT LIFETIME
Main unit 300K printed pages or 5 years, whichever comes first. (with periodic part replacement. See Components that require regular replacement on Page 28)
NOISE Table 1-10. Noise
COMPONENTS THAT REQUIRE REGULAR REPLACEMENT

The life of regular replacement parts which are not replaced by the user. Pickup Roller 100K pages
During printing Full Speed Mode During Printing Low Speed Mode During standby Saving Electricity Mode
Main Unit MP Tray Cassette 54.0 dB (A) 54.0 dB (A) 52.0dB (A) 55.0 dB (A)
With Options Installed MP Tray Cassette 54.0dB (A) 55.0 dB (A) 54.0dB (A) 55.0 dB (A)
NOTE: Refer to Ch6 about handling the components require regular replacement.
35 dB (A) Back Ground Noise
POWER SUPPLY
115V / 120V 10% 220V / 240V 10% Supply to controller: 50 to 60Hz 3Hz 50 to 60Hz 3Hz 3.3V/5.0A 5.0V/1.0A
NOTE 1: Values measured by ISO7779 9-point method. NOTE 2: Measured with MP tray closed. NOTE 3: Simplex and duplex printing are the same values.
EMISSION POWER CONSUMPTION

120V Maximum current rated Maximum at continuous printing Power consumption Average at continuous printing Average during standby with heating on Average during power save mode with heating off TBD 850W 450Wh 850Wh 45Wh or less 240V TBD 850W 450Wh 850Wh 45Wh or less
Ozone Concentration: 0.01ppm or less (New Blue Angel standard compliance). Dust Concentration: 0.1mg/m3
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
None of the OPC, toner or plastic contains hazardous materials.
Specifications
1-28
Revision D
1.3 Various Sensors

Table 1-11. Various Sensors
Unit Detectable Matter Cartridge mounted/unmounted New cartridge Toner Cartridge (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) Cartridge type Near life end Work life end Cartridge mounted/unmounted Photoconductor Unit Near life end Work life end Cartridge mounted/unmounted Transfer Unit Near life end Work life end Cartridge mounted/unmounted Fuser Unit Near life end Work life end Standard Paper Feeder MP Tray Paper size Out of Paper Cassette mounted/unmounted Paper size Cassette Paper near end*2 Out of paper Cassette mounted/unmounted 500 Sheets x 2 cassette unit Paper size Paper near end Out of Paper Identical to standard cassette Detectable Device Automatic detection (switch method) Automatic detection*1 --Sensor detection Softcounter Automatic detection (By IC chip) Softcounter Softcounter Automatic detection Sensor detection Softcounter Automatic detection Softcounter Softcounter Automatic detection Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever Automatic detection by Mycro Switch Automatic detection by Paper Regulation Board Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever Detects 50 20sheets (FX-P paper 64g/m2) Refer to *2 Refer to *2 Refer to *2 Refer to *2 Refer to *2 Refer to *2 Refer to *9 Remarks
Optional Paper Feeder
Various Sensors
1-29
Revision D
*1: A used cartridge (with toner remaining) will be detected as a new cartridge if installed after Near End has been detected. Replacement of a toner cartridge before Near End has been detected will result in erroneous detection of Near End and End. *2: The following table describes detection consumables life end. Name Detection Sensor detection + Dispense Time Black Toner Cartridge*4 (Near End, End and Engine Stop sensor Dispense Time for reference only) *5 Printing page count Black Photoconductor Unit*5 Dispense Time Yellow Magenta Cyan Detection sensor Printing page count Dispense Time Yellow Magenta Cyan Near end ON (3,350) (2,975) (2,975) (2,975) 24k 39,040 32,800 32,800 32,800 ON (17.5k) 80k End Sensor ON + 75 (3,425) (3,050) (3,050) (3,050) 30k 48,800 41,000 41,000 41,000 Sensor ON + 500 Sensor ON + 1,875 (18.0k) 100k Engine stop*3 Sensor ON + 86 (3,436) (3,061) (3,061) (3,061) 45k 73,200 61,500 61,500 61,500 Sensor ON + 600 Sensor ON + 2,250 (18.1k) ---
Transfer
Unit*6
(Printing page count: reference only) Fuser Unit*8 Printing page count
*3: If the Engine Stop function activates, be sure to allow the engine to stop. Continued operation could damage the printer. *4: Near End and End activation times can be adjusted by the Controller. *5: Differs according to usage conditions. *6: Near End, End and Engine Stop will activate when either the page count or the Dispense Time for any color is reached. Near End and End activation times can be adjusted by the Controller. *7: End and Engine Stop will activate when either the page count or the Dispense Time for any color is reached. *8: After replacement, resetting the item in the control panel will detect the new part. *9: The shape of cartridge housing is unique to each color, and this prevents it from installing on the wrong cartridge holder.
NOTE: Dispense Time is a controller count value. Units are seconds.
Various Sensors
1-30
Revision D
Paper with punch holes or perforations. Creased, curled or torn paper. Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners. Labels that peel off easily. Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it. Ink jet paper for special applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.). Sheets already printed on other color/monochrome laser printers or photocopiers. OHP transparency sheets for color copiers or color laser printers. Iron applied cloth transfer materials (for ink jets, laser printers). Postcards of any type for ink jets. Sheets of paper stuck together. Sheets deteriorate or discolor by heat of the Fuser Unit (about TBD C or less). When non-official postcards with illustrations are used, paper feed roller may be soiled with paper dust, and these postcards are not fed properly. In this case cleaning is required following the 1.11 "Maintenance"
1.4 Paper Specifications

1.4.1 Paper Types
Standard Paper FX P Paper (64g/m2) XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75g/m2) Normal Paper 60g/m2 to 105g/m2 (16 lb to 28lb) generally applied copy paper, recycled paper Special Applications Labels Transparencies Thick paper (105 to 216g/m2) NOTE 1: lb : Ream weight = lb / 500 sheets / 1722 (431.8X558.8mm) g/m2 : 1 g/m2= 0.2659763 lb : A4 : LT
1.4.2 The paper that should not be used with this printer
The following types of paper should not be used with this printer. They could cause printing defects, paper jams or printer malfunctions. Copy paper (Carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper, acid-based paper. Paper that was previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer. Paper that is too thin or too thick. Paper that is wet or damp. Paper with special coatings or colored printer paper with processed surfaces. Glossy (too slick on its surface) paper, or paper with too smooth / rough surfaces. Paper with significantly different roughness on each surface.
Paper Specifications
1-31
Revision D
1.4.3 Paper Source Classification

Table 1-12. Paper Usability for Each Paper Source
Special Applications Transparencies Thick paper
Standard Normal Paper paper
1.4.4 Printing Area

PRINTABLE AREA
210.9 x 351.6
Envelope
Official Postcard
Labels
210.9 x 896.0 (at the time of setting uncut paper)
GUARANTEED PRINTING AREA

Area with a margin of 4 mm from each side. Refer to the following figure. (Uncut paper is not applicable.)
MP tray Standard Cassette Duplex Optional 500 Sheet Unit
A A A A
B B B B
C D D D
C D D D
C D D D
C D D D
C D D D
4 mm 4 mm
4 mm
A: Paper feed reliability and image quality assured.

B: Paper feed reliability and image quality assured, but only for the use
of generally applied types of paper.

C: Paper feed and Printing are possible for only generally applied types
of paper.
D: Sheets cannot be fed.
Guaranteed Printing Area
4 mm
Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Print Area
Paper Specifications
1-32
Revision D
Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate
1.5 Reliability and Durability

1.5.1 Reliability
MPBF
100K pages NOTE: Average number of pages printed until the occurrence of a malfunction which either cannot be solved by the user or requires the replacement of a part.
Table 1-14. Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate

Paper Type Standard Paper Normal Paper Special Applications Standard MP Tray 1/1,500 1/1,000 1/50 Standard Cassette and Optional 500 Sheets Unit 1/2,500 1/1,500 1/50
NOTE 1: Based on the use of paper taken from a newly opened package. NOTE 2: Does not include multiple-sheet feed at the boundary. * Boundary means sheets boundary between original paper and replenished paper, occurring after paper is replenished.
PAPER FEED RELIABILITY

Paper Jam Rate
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY Table 1-13. Paper Jam Rate

Standard MP Tray Paper Type Standard Paper Normal Paper Labels Special Applications Official Postcards Transparencies Thick Paper Simplex Printing 1/1,300 1/2,000 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 Duplex Printing 1/1,800 1/1,200 Standard Cassette and Optional 500 Sheets Unit Simplex Duplex Printing Printing 1/5,000 1/3,000 1/100 1/3,000 1/1,800
d
(With standard paper fed from MP tray or paper cassette) Reference point of main scanning direction (c) 2.5mm Reference point of sub-scanning direction (a) 2.0mm
.
a c
Printing Area
Paper Feed Direction
NOTE 1: Based on the use of paper taken from a newly opened package. NOTE 2: Includes miss feeds, multiple-sheet feed, and other kind of jams. Does not include multiple-sheet feed at the boundary.
Figure 1-3. Print Position Accuracy
Reliability and Durability
1-33
Revision D
SKEW
(With standard paper fed from MP tray or Paper cassette)
1.5.2 Durability
PRINTING VOLUME
Maximum
A4 1.23 1.78
Table 1-15. Paper Skew

Printing Page Simplex Scanning Direction Main Scanning Direction |a - b| Sub Scanning Direction |c - d| Main Scanning Direction |a - b| Sub Scanning Direction |c - d|
30K sheets / per month 5K sheets / per month
Average
1.5.3 Maintenance
MTTR
Averages within 30 minutes. 95% is complete within 50 minutes. Time for examining malfunction is not included. (time required for service personnel to determine and correct the cause of the malfunction)
Duplex
Table 1-16. Measured by Dot 2 pattern

A4 Between a to b Between c to d 195.58mm 282.61mm
HEIGHT OF CURL OF PRINTED PAGES

15mm or less (at the standard paper)
Reliability and Durability
1-34
Revision D
1.6 Operating Conditions (Including Comsumables)

AIR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Table 1-17. Air Temperature and Humidity
Temperature (C) Printer is under operation Printer is stopped Humidity (%RH) Others With no condensation
SPACE REQUIREMENTS
In order to ensure that the printer operates properly, provide at least as much space as shown in the diagram below. To open the cover and be able to replace the consumables easily, provide at least 350 mm of space above the top of the printer.
5 to 32
- 20 to 40
15 to 85
5 to 85
AIR PRESSURE
Altitudes : 0 to 3,100m
LEVEL
Front and Back : 5 degrees Left and Right : 5 degrees
LIGHTING
3,000 lx or less (no exposure to direct sunlight)
Figure 1-4. Space Requirement
Operating Conditions (Including Comsumables)
1-35
Revision D
1.7 Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit (Consumables Packaged), and Optional Products
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY CONDITIONS
Main unit (Consumables packaged)
TRANSPORT BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

70.9275 kPa Minimum (15,000m) * *: In pressurized luggage compartment
DROPPING Table 1-20. Dropping

Dropping Height (cm) Others Main Unit Optional 500 Sheets Unit 46 76 Dropping Direction 1 corner, 3 edges, 6 sides, one time each
Table 1-18. Temperature and Humidity

Temperature (C) Normal Conditions 0 to 35 Humidity (%RH) 15 to 80 High humidity : 80 to 95 Low humidity : 5 to 15 Warranty Period 12 months No condensation allowed Altitude (m)
High temperature : 35 to 40 Severe Conditions Low temperature : -20 to 0
VIBRATION
Frequency Acceleration Time of application : 5 to 100Hz, 100 to 5Hz : 6.86m/s2 (0.7 G) : 50 minutes along each X, Y, Z axis, total of 150 minutes
Maximum of 48 hours
0 to 3,100
Direction of application : 3 dimensional
500 sheets x 2 cassette unit (Oprion)
Table 1-19. Temperature and Humidity

Temperature (C) Normal Conditions -20 to 50 Humidity (%RH) 5 to 85 High humidity : 85 to 95 Warranty Period 12 months Maximum of 48 hours 0 to 3,100 Altitude (m) Others
High Severe temperature : Conditions 50 to 60
No condensation allowed
Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit (Consumables Packaged), and Optional Products
1-36
Revision D
1.8 Electrical Feature

Specifications here are not applicable to any optional units.
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
No break down during application of the voltages shown below for a one minute period.
FAST TRANSIENT / BURST (AC LINE NOISE)

EN61000-4 (IEC1000-4-4 ; 1995) compliance Voltage 1kv : no malfunction occurs such as defective image quality. 2kv : no damage allowed.
Table 1-21. Dielectric Strength

Across primary and chassis of power supply transformer For 200V system models AC 3,000V (Across primary and chassisi) AC 1,500V
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
DIP 95% (at -10% of rated current) 0.5 cycle No effect on printing quality
LEAK CURRENT Table 1-22. Leak Current

Destination Taiwan (110 V) China (230 V) Leak Current 3.5 mA or less 3.5 mA or less
RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY

EN61000-2 (IEC1000-4-2 ; 1995) compliance No malfunction such as defective image quality or no errors allowed even if 4kv of static electricity noise is in contact discharge.
INRUSH CURRENT
0.5 cycle 100 A or less (The time of heater inrush is included.)
INSULATION RESISTANCE
10M or more
Electrical Feature
1-37
Revision D
1.9 Compliance with Standards and Regulations

SAFETY STANDARDS
For 200V system models: IEC 60950 2nd Edition / EN60950 / A1 - A4 / CE Mark
1.10 Consumable Components

SPECIFICATIONS Table 1-23. Specifications
Name Lifetime Average of 8,500 printed sheets*1 Dimensions (mm) W :340 D : 51 H : 55 Weight (kg) 0.32 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit 30 to 50K sheets*2 W:339, D : 146, H : 179 25K sheets W:309, D : 85, H : 60 Average of 6,000 printed sheets*1 W :329 D : 51 H : 53
SAFETY STANDARDS (LASER TRANSMISSION)

IEC825 FDA
0.295
EMI
For 120V system models (US models) : FCC class B For 200V system models : EN55022
0.285 4.5 0.5
ELECTRICAL POWER HIGH FREQUENCY

None
ELECTRICAL POWER CONSUMPTION

Conforms to International Energy Star Program standard 60 minutes / 45W or less
*1: The number of sheets is the approximate number of printable images using A4 landscape continuous printing at 5% image occupation rate. The first cartridge will Near End for TBD page count. (In order to fill the developer with toner.) *2: Work life will differ with usage conditions.
OTHERS
Toner : OPC : Ozone generation : Materials : No materials hazardous to human health (conform to OSHA, TSCA, EINECS) No materials hazardous to human health (OSHA compliance) Conform to UL 478, 5th printing Swiss Environmental Protection Standards compliance (contains no Cds)
Compliance with Standards and Regulations
1-38
Revision D
PACKING STORAGE AND TRANSPORT ENVIRONMENTS

Temperature and Humidity Conditions
1.11 Maintenance
Table 1-26. Maintenance
Maintenance Item Period At the time of paper feed performance degradation Maintenance Method Wipe with a dry cloth.
Table 1-24. Temperature/Humidity

Conditions Normal Severe High temp. Low temp. Temperature 0 to 35 C 35 to 45 C -20 to 0 C Humidity 15 to 80% 80 to 95% 5 to 15% Warranty Period 24 months Maximum of one month
Pickup roller (Roll Assy)
TRANSPORT BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

70.9275 kPa Minimum (15,000m) * *: In pressurized luggage compartment
DROPPING Table 1-25. Dropping

Dropping Height (cm) Consumables 91.0 Dropping Direction 1 corner, 3 edges, 6 sides
VIBRATION
Frequency Acceleration Time of application : 5 to 100Hz, 100 to 5Hz : 6.86m/s2 (0.7 G) : 50 minutes along each X, Y, Z axis, total of 150 minutes
Direction of application : 3 dimensional
Maintenance
1-39
Revision D
1.12 Exterior View and Unit Names

The table below lists the major exterior parts names. For the corresponding location, see the following figures. Note if any part names differ from the descriptions in the Users Guide, they are shown in the brackets.
Table 1-27. Exterior View and Unit Parts

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Control panel Top cover Output tray Power switch Latch on cover A Latch on cover B Standard lower cassette MP tray (Multi-Purpose tray) Expansion tray Large capacity paper unit (option) AC inlet Stopper Interface card slot cover Ethernet interface connector Parallel interface connector USB interface connector Transfer unit Fuser unit Photoconductor unit Toner cartridge Cover D (cover assy top PHD) Part name
Figure 1-5. Exterior view and Unit parts 1
Exterior View and Unit Names
1-40
Revision D
Exterior View and Unit Names
1-41
Revision D
1.13 Controller Unit Specifications

1.13.1 Controller Basic Specifications
CPU
CPU ASIC : 64-bit RISC PowerPC 750CX 400 MHz : VIP2 CDMC (color conversion, color compression, color adjustment)
HOST INTERFACE
Standard Parallel 1ch Bi-directional compatible with IEEE 1284 standard, B-type connector Compatibility, Nibble, ECP Ethernet USB 1.1 Option : Type-B1 slot (Level 3 compatible) 100 Base-TX/10 Base-T
PRINTER SETTINGS
Printer Settings : Panel settings, EJL, PJL, HTTP, SNMP and ENPC : EEPROM 32 Kbytes
RAM
SDRAM : 64-bit width DIMM (168 pins, 3.3V, PC100) 2 slots (the standard RAM must be installed to slot-1 and SDRAM DIMM must be installed to slot-0) : 64 MB : 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB A maximum of 1024 MB for both two slots by installing 512MB
Storage cell
CONTROL PANEL
20-digit LCD, 3 LEDs, 6 buttons
Standard Optional RAM
HDD
1 (optional) IDE type
NOTE: The standard 64 MB RAM must be removed
ROM
32 - bit width Program Fonts Expansion ROM A slot : 4 MB (Flash ROM DIMM) : 4 MB : 1 slot (ROM DIMM slot) (can be installed and removed only when turning off the printer) : PS3, font ROM module
INSTALLATION METHOD
The slide drip method that inserts from the back of the main unit
Controller Unit Specifications
1-42
Revision D
1.13.2 Controller Configuration

This printer can set the following configurations for each destination. Since jumper resistors are used for the settings, these settings are determined when the printers are shipped from the factory. NOTE: Destination settings as controller configurations of the 120 V model (LT) for North/South America are not provided. Destination Setting 120 V model for North/South America Other destinations A4/LT switching LT is set A4 is set
1.13.3 External Interface Specifications

This printer is equipped with the following host interfaces. 1. Parallel Interface 2. Ethernet Interface 3. USB 1.1 Interface -- Standard -- Standard -- Standard
4. Optional Interface (Type-B) 1 slot The positions of the respective interfaces are shown in the Figure 1-8
.
USB Interface Type-B Conector
Optinal Optinal Interface Interface
Parallel Interface IEEEE 1284 B-Type 1) 2) Ethernet Interface (100 Base-TX/10 BaseT)
Figure 1-8. Positions of Host Interface

Explanation of LEDs 1) Link/receive light (color: green) 2) 100 Base/10 Base light (color: orange) The host interfaces can be enabled or disabled respectively.
1-43
Revision D
1.13.3.1 Parallel Interface Specifications

INTERFACE TYPE
IEEE 1284 bi-directional high-speed parallel interface
DEVICE ID
The initial value of this printers Device ID is as shown below. In the following description, carriage returns have been added considering legibility, however in practice, the character string is continuous without carriage return codes being included. The CMD items are in random order. MODE and STATUS items are excluded. The contents of DES items consist of MFG and MDL connected by a space. MFG : EPSON ; CMD : PJL, EJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9, PRPXL24-01, PCL, HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01**1 ; MDL :**2 ; CLS : PRINTER; DES : EPSON **2 ; **1 : POSTSCRIPT is added only when the PostScript 3 module is installed. **2 : AL-C4000 Furthermore, the user can redefine the Device ID MFG, MDL, DES and CID. Also, the CID Field does not respond with the default value, but does respond with the defined character string only when it has been redefined. If DES is not redefined, it responses MFG and MDL with a space between them. The Device ID when redefined is as follows. The asterisks "*****" are the user defined character strings. MFG :*****; CMD :PJL,EJL,ESCPL2,ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL,HPGL2-01,ESCPAGE04,ESCPAGECOLOR-01**1 ; MDL :*****; CLS :PRINTER; DES :*****; CID :*****;
OPERATING MODES
Compatibility, Nibble, ECP
CONNECTOR TYPE NAME

57RE-40360-830B (D7A) DDK or the same class of product.
COMPATIBLE PLUG
AMPHENOLE or comparable products.
1-44
Revision D
PIN ASSIGNMENT Table 1-28. Centronics Parallel Interface Pin Assignment

Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 I/O I I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O O I O GND CHASSIS GND P.L.High (+5V) Signal Names STRBX D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 ACKNLGX BUSY PE SELOT AUTOX Pin # 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 I/O I O I Signal Names GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND INITX ERRX GND NC +5V SELINX
1.13.3.2 Ethernet Interface Specifications

INTERFACE TYPES
10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, Half Duplex, Full Duplex: Auto switching when the power is turned on
PRINTING PROTOCOLS
1. TCP/IP LPR, FTP, IPP, PORT2501, PORT9100 2. Microsoft Network SMB 3. NetWare Operating mode Standby (factory default), NDS Print Server, Bindery Print Server, Remote Printer 4. AppleTalk IPP : Internet Printing Protocol
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS
1. TCP/IP SNMP, ENPC, HTTP, TELNET, DHCP, BOOTP, PING 2. Microsoft Network Auto-IP, SSDP 3. NetBEUI SNMP, ENPC 4. NetWare SNMP, ENPC 5. AppleTalk SNMP, ENPC ENPC : EPSON Network Peripheral Control Protocol
1-45
Revision D
CONNECTOR NAME
RJ45
1.13.3.3 USB Interface Specifications

STANDARD
The USB interface specifications are compatible with the Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev. 1.1.
COMPATIBLE CABLE
2-pair STP (10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX) In order to conform to FCC Class B, EN55022 Class B and VCCI Class B, a shielded type cable must be used
DEVICE ID
This printer has an 18-digit of serial ID for USB1.1. The value for this ID is printed on the bottom of the Status Sheet. Each digit denotes information as shown below. **P++YYMMDDhhmmssR ** P ++ YY MM DD HH mm ss R : Model-unique number from 00 to 99. "11" for this printer. : Identifier indicating page printer. Always P for page printers. : PC number of the assembly belt (00 to 99) : Year of assembly (lower 2-digit. 00 to 99) : Month of assembly (1 to 12) : Day of assembly (0 to 31) : Hour of assembly (0 to 23) : Minute of assembly (0 to 59) : Second of assembly (0 to 59) : Reserved (normally 0)
PIN ASSIGNMENT Table 1-29. Pin Assignment for the Ethernet I/F
Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I/O Tx+ TxRx+ N.C. N.C. RxN.C. N.C. Signal Names O O I I -
ADAPTABLE CONNECTOR
USB series B
ENTITY TYPE
See Section 1.13.3.4 "Optional Interface Specifications".
PIN ASSIGNMENT Table 1-30. Pin Assignment for the USB

Pin # 1 2 3 4 I/O I/O I/O Signal Names POWER DD+ GND
1-46
Revision D
1.13.3.4 Optional Interface Specifications

This printer includes one slot of Type-B optional interface slot as standard equipment.
EMULATION TYPE/ENTITY TYPE Table 1-31. Emulation Type/Entity Type

Emulation PS*1 ESC/Page Color ESC/Page LJ4 1239X GL2 FX ESCP2 Emulation Type POSTSCRIPT-00*1 ESCPAGECOLOR-01 ESCPAGE-04 PCL5E-00 PRPXL24-01 HPGL2-01 ESCP9 ESCPL2 EPSONPCL5 EPSONPRPXL24 EPSONHPGL2 EPSONFX EPSONLQ2 Entity Type LaserWriter*1 EPSONPAGECOLOR1
MAIN SYSTEM TYPE

MTP1200dpi, PW102000dt1200dpi, PRG (*****) rev,AP800ma, SPD0fast, D4 The asterrisks ***** are the ROM version
PRINTER NAME
Same as the Product Name of the factory default
PRODUCT NAME
Product name is AL-C4000
*1: Added when the PostScript3 module is installed.
Emulation type When Emulation is set to AUTO ; If PS is not started : AUTO (Emulation Types 1, 2, 3 . . .) If PS is started : EJL (POSTSCRIPT-00, other Emulation Types 1, 2, 3 . . .) : EJL (Default Emulation Type, other Emulation Types 1, 2, 3, . . .) Entity Type When Emulation is set to AUTO ; : Refer to the above list. When Emulation is fixed ; : The default Emulation Type and EPSONPAGECOLOR1 are returned.
When Emulation is fixed ;
1-47
Revision D
1.14 Control Panel

This section describes the control panel of this printer and its functions.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Table 1-32. LEDs and switches on the Control Panel

Location LCD Panel Name Remarks 1 line x 20-digit (5 x 7 dot matrix)
1.14.1 Exterior View and Names
Back button Up button Enter button Down button

Job Cancel button Data light Ready light Error light Start/Stop button
1 for password input *1 2 for password input *1 3 for password input *1 4 for password input *1
Color : yellow Color : green Color : red
NOTE: *1 : The key assignment of password is shown on the label for each bundling.
Figure 1-9. Control Panel Appearance
Control Panel
1-48
Revision D
FLASH 2 An error where an operator must release the error and press the Start/Stop button has occured. ON An error that cannot recover unless an operator clears the printer error has occured. Releasing the error allows the printer to recover automatically. NOTE: FLASH 1: The light is on and off alternately for 0.3 seconds each. FLASH 2: The light is on and off alternately for 0.6 seconds each.
1.14.2 Display Elements Description

LCD (LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY) (1)
A liquid crystal display that indicates up to 1-line x 20-digit (5x7 dot matrix). It displays printer statuses in normal operation. In the panel setting mode, it shows menu, items, and values.
DATA LIGHT (7)

ON Indicates that received data remain in the printer without being printed. OFF Indicates that valid printing data do not exist in the printer. FLASH Indicates that the printer is receiving or processing data.
READY LIGHT (8)

ON Indicates that the printer is ready to print. OFF Indicates that the printer cannot print. Error condition In an error occurrence, printing is disabled switching off the On Line light.
ERROR LIGHT (9)

FLASH 1 An error where printing continues if the Start/Stop button is pressed has occured.
Control Panel
1-49
Revision D
1.14.3 Button Functions Description

BACK BUTTON (2)
In normal operations Shifts to the panel setting mode. In the panel setting mode Returns to the previous (higher) hierarchy. Pressing this button when the top hierarchy (menus) is selected switches the panel setting mode to the normal operation mode.
JOB CANCEL BUTTON (6)

Normal pressing Deletes currently printed data. Every time pressing this button deletes the job. Long pressing (two seconds or longer) Deletes all data such as data in the print queue, jobs and data that are currently being received, and printing data that are being processed.
START/STOP BUTTON (10)

In normal operations Stops or resumes printing operations. Toggling this button will cause the print Ready light to alternate between being illuminated / not illuminated. Pressing this button after starting print processing stops printing after outputting a currently processed page. Pressing the button again resumes printing. NOTE: Since processing apart from printing continues even if the Ready light is off, data receiving continues until the receive buffer becomes full. In case of pressing this button longer when printing is impossible Forcibly ejects paper if printing data exist.
UP BUTTON (3)
In normal operations Shifts to the panel setting mode. In the panel setting mode Displays the value prior to the currently selected hierarchy (menus, items or values).
ENTER BUTTON (4)

In normal operations Shifts to the panel setting mode. In the panel setting mode Moves on to the next (lower) hierarchy. Determines values or selects items.
DOWN BUTTON (5)

In normal operations Shifts to the panel setting mode. In the panel setting mode Displays the value next to the currentlyselected hierarchy (menus, items or values).
Control Panel
1-50
Revision D
1.14.4 Special Operations

1.14.4.1 List of Operating Functions
A list of the special operating functions supported by this printer is shown below. Functions other than Hex dump and the Support Mode are not disclosed publicly for users.
1.14.4.2 Functions Description

HEX DUMP
This function converts receiced data into hexadecimal ASCII, then outputs it.
SUPPORT MODE
This mode allows the Support Menu to be added to the settings menu.
Table 1-33. List of Operating Functions

Function Operating Method Turn the power on pressing the Start/Stop button Turn the power on pressing the Down button Turn the power on pressing the Back, Job Cancel, and Start/Stop buttons Turn the power on pressing the Job Cancel button Turn the power on pressing the Up, Down, Enter, and Job Cancel buttons Turn the power on pressing the Down, Job Cancel, and Start/Stop buttons Turn the power on pressing the Enter, Job Cancel, and Start/Stop buttons Turn the power on pressing the Back, Up, Down, and Enter buttons Press the Back, Up, Down, Enter, and Job Cancel buttons when a Service Call error occurs
Hex Dump Support Mode

Initialization of EEPROM Panel Setting Value Initialization Forced Deleting of the Flash ROM A Module
INITIALIZATION OF EEPROM
This function first clears the EEPROM by overwriting it with 00h. Then the factory default settings are rewritten into the EEPROM. After this, a warm boot is performed and the printer will return to normal status.
PANEL SETTING VALUE INITIALIZATION

This function sets all the panel settings values back to their factory default settings. After thes, a warm boot is performed and the printer will return to normal status.
Program ROM Update ROM Module Copy Maintenance Mode

CPU reset in a Service Call occurrence.
FORCED DELETING OF THE FLASH ROM A MODULE

This function deletes all data from the flash ROM module that has been inserted into slot A. After this, a warm boot is performed and the printer will return to normal status.
PROGRAM ROM UPDATE

This function updates the flash ROM module that has been inserted into the programming socket.
Detailed Information Display in Press the Back, Enter, and Job Cancel buttons when a Service Call occurs a Service Call occurrence Printing of the Error Sheet Press the Enter button after resetting the CPU when a Service Call error occurs
Control Panel
1-51
Revision D
PROGRAM MODULE COPY

This function copies the contents of the ROM module in socket P, to the flash ROM module that has been inserted into socket A. After this, a warm booty is performed and printer will return to normal status.
1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List

This printers setting item list is shown below. Furthermore, the factory defaults values are shown in Bold style.
INFORMATION MENU
Item Status Sheet Reserve Job List *1 Form Overlay List *2 NetworkStatus Sheet *3 ColorRegist Sheet AUX Status Sheet *4 PS3 Status Sheet *5 PS3 Font Sample *5 ESC/Page Font Sample *6 LJ4 Font Sample ESCP2 Font Sample FX Font Sample I239X Font Sample C Toner *7 M Toner *7 Y Toner *7 K Toner *7 Photocondctr *7 Total Pages *7 Color Pages *7 B/W Pages *7 Value
MAINTENANCE MODE
This mode allows the Maintenance Menu to be added to the setting menu.
CPU RESET IN A SERVICE CALL OCCURRENCE

This function allows the unit to recover from a Service Req effff error without having to reboot.
DETAILED INFORMATION DESPLAY

This function displays information in greater detail, for use in the event of a service call.
PRINTING OF THE ERROR SHEET

If this procedure is performed after a CPU Reset has been done during a service call, then the unit will print out an error sheet.
E****F, E*** F, E** E****F, E*** F, E** E****F, E*** F, E** E****F, E*** F, E** E****F, E*** F, E** 0 ~ 99999999 0 ~ 99999999 0 ~ 99999999
F, E* F, E* F, E* F, E* F, E*
F, E F, E F, E F, E F, E
F F F F F
*1: This is displayed only when a Job is registered in the Quick Print Job. *2: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Form Overlay is implemented. *3: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Network I/F = On. *4: This is displayed and can be executed only when the printer is equipped with Level 3 compatible Type-B host interface and AUX I/F = On is set at startup.
Control Panel
1-52

*5: This is displayed and can be executed only when the PostScript 3 module is installed. *6: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be executed in EJL. It is not open to users. *7: This item is only displayed, and cannot be changed in the setting.
Revision D
EMULATION MENU
Item Value Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2
Parallel USB Network AUX *2
TRAY MENU
Item MP Tray Size LC1 Size *2 LC2 Size LC3 Size MP Type LC1 Type LC2 Type *3 LC3 Type *3 *2 *3 *2 * 3 Value A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Trnsprncy, Labels Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
*1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the PostScript 3 module is installed. *2: This is displayed and can be specified only when the Type-B host interface is installed.
PRINTING MENU
Item Page Size Wide A4 Orientation Resolution RITech Toner Save Image Optimum Top Offset Left Offset T Offset B L Offset B Value A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM *2 Off, On Port, Land 600, 1200 *3, 300 On, Off Off, On Auto, Off, On -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default value of the A4 type controller. *2: This item is only displayed, and its setting cannot be changed. *3: This item is displayed only when the optional lower cassette is installed. Also, Paper Size is display only.
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default value of the A4 type controller. *2: Paper sizes (width x length) for CTM (Custom) are min: 88.9 x 139.7 mm and max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm.
Control Panel
1-53

*3: This is valid only for the ESC/Page, ESC/Page-Color and PS3 mode. Other modes print in 600 dpi. Transparencies cannot be printed at 1200 dpi. (Print quality cannot be guaranteed, so 1200 dpi is not offered as an option in the driver.)
Revision D
LCD Contrast Cyan_Regist Magenta_Regist Yellow_Regist Panel Lock*5
0 ~ 8~ 15
-7 ~ 0 ~ 7 -7 0 7 -7 0 7 Off, On
SETUP MENU
Item Lang Lang Sprache LINGUA LENG SPRK Sprog Taal KIELI Lng. Time Out Paper Source MP Mode Copies Quantity Duplex Binding Start Page Paper Type Paper Side Skip Blank Page Auto Eject Page Size lgnore Auto Cont Page Protect *4 *2 *3 *1 Manual Feed Value English Franais Deutsch ITALIANO ESPAOL SVENSKA Dansk Nederl. SUOMI Portugus 0, 5 ~ 60 ~ 300 step1 Auto, MP, LC1, LC2 *1, LC3 *1 Normal, Last Off, On 1 ~ 999 1 ~ 999 Off, On Long Edge, Short Edge Front, Back Normal, Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated Front, Back Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Auto, On
*1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional lower paper cassette is installed. *2: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be set in EJL or PJL. It is not stored in NVRAM. *3: Duplex printing is available only for A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, EXE and GLG paper sizes. Use single-side printing for other sizes. *4: This is valid for PCL5e, ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX and I239X. *5: This is not displayed, and not printed on the Status Sheet. It can be set by EJL, EpsonNet WebAssist,etc.
QUICK PRINT JOB MENU *1

Item user Job *2 Copies *3 Delete *3 *4 Value xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1 ~ 999
*1: This menu is not displayed when nothing is registered in the Verify Job, Reprint Job, and Stored Job. *2: By selecting the Value (User name) and pressing the Enter button when the User is displayed, this Item appears. *3: By selecting the Value (Job name) and pressing the Enter button when the Job is displayed, this Item appears and can be selected and executed. After executing this Item, the printer return to the status when recovering from the SelecType mode. *4: After activating Delete, display will return to Job. If there is no Job, display will return to User. If there is no User, display will return to previous condition after escaping from Select Type.
Control Panel
1-54
Revision D
CONFIDENTIAL JOB MENU *1

Item user Enter Password *2 Job *3 Copies *4 Delete *4 *5 Value xxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXX xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 999
PARALLEL MENU *1
Item Parallel I/F Speed Bi-D Buffer Size Value On , Off Fast , Normal Nibble , ECP , Off Normal , Maximum , Minimum
*1: This menu is not displayed when nothing is registered in the Confidential Job. *2: By selecting the Value (User name) and pressing the Enter button when the User is displayed, this Item appears. A password must be input pressing the 1 (Back), 2 (Up), 3 (Enter), and 4 (Down) buttons. *3: After entering a password when Enter Password is displayed, this item appears if a job with the matching password exists. *4: By selecting the Value (Job name) and pressing the Enter button when the Job is displayed, this Item appears and can be selected and executed. After executing this Item, the printer return to the status when recovering from the SelecType mode. *5: After activating Delete, display will return to Job. If there is no Job, display will return to User. If there is no User, display will return to previous condition after escaping from Select Type.
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer.
USB MENU *1
Item USB I/F Buffer Size Value On , Off Normal , Maximum , Minimum
RESET MENU
Item Value
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer.
Clear Warning Reset Reset All SelecType Init
Control Panel
1-55
Revision D
NETWORK MENU *1
Item Network I/F Network Config Get IPAddress *2 IP Byte 1 *2 *3 IP Byte 2 *2 *3 IP Byte 3 *2 *3 IP Byte 4 *2 *3 SM Byte 1 *2 SM Byte 2 *2 SM Byte 3 *2 SM Byte 4 *2 GW Byte 1 *2 GW Byte 2 *2 GW Byte 3 *2 GW Byte 4 *2 Buffer Size Value On , Off No , Yes Panel, Auto , PING 0 ~ 192 ~ 255 0 ~ 168 ~ 255 0 ~ 192 ~ 255 0 ~ 168 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 Normal , Maximum, Minimum
AUX MENU *1 *2
Item AUX I/F AUX Config *3 Get IPAddress *3 *4 IP Byte 1 *3 *4 *5 IP Byte 2 *3 *4 *5 IP Byte 3 *3 *4 *5 IP Byte 4 *3 *4 *5 SM Byte 1 *3 *4 SM Byte 2 *3 *4 SM Byte 3 *3 *4 SM Byte 4 *3 *4 GW Byte 1 *3 *4 GW Byte 2 *3 *4 GW Byte 3 *3 *4 GW Byte 4 *3 *4 NetWare *3 *4 AppleTalk *3 *4 NetBEUI *3 *4 AUX Init *3 *4 Buffer Size Normal , Maximum, Minimum Value On , Off No , Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 On, Off On, Off On, Off
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer. *2: This is displayed and can be selected only when Network Config = Yes. *3: This is not displayed when Get IPAddress = Auto.
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer. *2: This is displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed. *3: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when Level 3 compatible Type-B host interface is installed. This automatically returns to "AUX Config = No" when the printer status changed to Online.
Control Panel
1-56

*4: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when "AUX Config = Yes" is selected. The setting value switches to the Online status, and becomes valid when the network card restarts. Therefore, when changing the setting value, executing AUX Status Sheet of the Test print menu before recovering from the Panel setting mode prints the previous setting value. *5: This is not displayed when Get IPAddress = Auto.
Revision D
ESC/PAGE MENU *1
Item Auto CR Auto FF CR Function LF Function FF Function Error Code Avoid Error PGI TriColorSpace CM Media Type Value On, Off On, Off CR, CR+LF CR+LF, LF CR+FF, FF Ignore, Space Off, On On, Off Normal, sRGB Off, Opt1, Opt2
*1: This is not displayed on the panel or the Status Sheet. It can be specified in EJL.
Control Panel
1-57
Revision D
LJ4 MENU
Item Font Source Font Number Pitch *3 Height *3 SymSet Value Resident , Download *1 , ROM A *2 0 ~ available (Max 65535) 0.44 ~ 10.00 ~ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi 4.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt IBM-US, ECM94-1, 8859-10ISO, IBM-DN, PcTk437, WiAnsi, WiBALT, VeInternati, Math-8, PiFont, ANSI ASCII, Spanish, French2, PcIcelandic, PcPortugues, PcCanFrench, 8859-3 ISO, WiEstonian, CodeMJK, PcGk437, 8859-7 ISO, PcCy855, PcUkr866, WiCyrillic, 8859-8 ISO, Arabic8, OCR A, Roman-8, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcMultiling, PcEur858, WiE.Europe, DeskTop, VeUS, PsMath, Legal, Swedis2, German, Windows, PcLt774, PcEt850, PcSl437, 8859-4 ISO, WiLatvian, BpBRASCII, PcGk851, WiGreek, PcCy866, PcLit771, Bulgarian, Hebrew8, PcAr864, OCR B Roman-9, 8859-9 ISO, PcBlt775, PcE.Europe, Pc1004, WiTurkish, PsText, MsPublishin, VeMath, UK, Italian, Norweg1, McText, PcTurk1, PcTurk2, PcNordic, WiBaltic, Mazowia BpAbicomp, PcGk869, Europe3, PcLt866, 8859-5 ISO, Hebrew7, PcHe862, 8859-6 ISO,
Source SymSet *5 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199 Dest SymSet CR Function LF Function Tray Assign 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199 CR , CR+LF LF , CR+LF 4, 4K , 5S
*1: This is displayed only when some download fonts exist. *2: This is displayed only when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket. *3: Either of these is displayed depending on the selected font type. In the case of a fixed pitch font, "Pitch" is displayed and in the case of a proportional pitch font, "Height" is displayed. Neither of these is displayed in the case of a bitmap font. Both Pitch and Height appears in some cases (such as changing Font Source or Font Number when PCL5 is not run internally). *4: 60 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 64 if it is set to A4. *5: When changing the Value of SymSet, and the font specified by Font Number does not include the Symbol Set, the settings are coupled to be Font Source = Resident and Font Number = 0, therefore when printing with this Symbol Set, set the Value of Font Source and Font Number to a font that supports this Symbol Set.
Form
5 ~ 60 *4 ~ 64 *4 ~ 128 Lines
Control Panel
1-58
Revision D
GL2 MENU
Item GLMode Scale Origin Pen End Join Pen0 Pen1 Pen2 Pen3 Pen4 Pen5 Pen6 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 Value LJ4GL2, GLlike Off, A0, A1, A2, A3 Corner, Center Pen0, Pen, Pen2 *1, Pen3 *1, Pen4 *1, Pen5 *1, Pen6 *1 Butt, Square, Triangular, Round Mitered, Miteredbeveled, Triangualr, Round, Beveled, None 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
ESCP2 MENU
Item Font Pitch Condensed T.Margin Text CGTable Value Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B 10 cpi , 12 cpi ,15 cpi , Prop. Off , On 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max : 67) Lines PcUSA, PcPortugue, PcTurkish2, BpBRASCII, PcEur858, PcSl437, Mazowia, PcGK851, PcCy855, PcLit 771, Hebrew8, Italic, PcCanFrenc, Pclcelandic BpAbicomp, ISO Latin 1, PcTurkish1, CodeMJK, PcGk869, PcCy866, Bulgarian, PcAr862, PcMultilin, PcNordic, PcE.Europe, Roman 8, 8859-15ISO, 8859-9 ISO, PcGk437, 8859-7 ISO, PcUkr866, Hebrew7, PcHe864
*1: This is displayed only in the GLlike mode.
Country
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal On , Off Off , On Dark , Light , Barcode 0,
PS3 MENU
Item Error Sheet Coloration Image Protect Value Off, On Color, Mono, TrueCol. Off, On
Auto CR Auto LF Bit Image ZeroChar
*1: 62 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 66 if it is set to A4.
*1: This is displayed only when PS3 is installed.
Control Panel
1-59
Revision D
FX MENU
Item Font Value Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Orator S, OCR A, OCR B 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max : 81) Lines PcUSA, PcPortugue, PcTurkish2, BpBRASCII, PcEur858, Italic, PcCanFrenc, Pclcelandic, BpAbicomp, ISO Latin1, PcMultilin, PcNordic, PcE.Europe, Roman-8, 8859-15ISO
1239X MENU
Item Font Pitch Code Page T. Margin Text Auto CR Auto LF Alt. Graphics Bit Image ZeroChar Character Set Value Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script, Presentor, Sans serif 10cpi, 12cpi,15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop. 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865 0.30 ~ 0.40 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 ~ 63 *1 ~ 67 *1~ available (Max: 81) Lines Off, On Off, On Off, On Dark, Light 0, 1 *2, 2 *2
Pitch Condensed T. Margin Text CGTable
Country
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, Barcode 0,
*1: 62 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 67 if it is set to A4. *2: 1 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 2 if it is set to A4.
Control Panel
1-60
Revision D
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. *2: The current changes 5% for each step. *3: Warm boot occurs after Enter key is pressed. The contents of this menu are not localized. When this menu is active, cover open/closed errors do not occur and printer data is not sent. *4: This setting menu sets cleaning cycle which is 32 pages or 48 pages in case the total printing number of sheets of Photoconductor Unit is 5000 or less sheets. This setting will be valid after power on cycle. *5: This menu makes the life counter of Toner Cartridge and Transfer Unit clear, when Toner Cartridge and Transfer Unit are replaced before life end.The printer is rebooted after executing this menu.
SUPPORT MENU *1
Item HDD Format *3 PS3 HDD Init *4 Standby *2 Enable , Disable Value
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. *2: STANDBYTIME command (nondisclosure) of EJL is also supported. When Disable is selected, Fuser is in the status where printing is immediately possible, except when any engine errors occur. *3: This is displayed and can be executed only when HDD is installed. *4: This is displayed and can be executed only when both of PS3 and HDD are installed.
MAINTENANCE MENU *1
Item Engine Status Sheet Clear Error Log Value
PRINTER ADJUST MENU

Item Normal Thick ExtraTHK Trnsprnc Coated Envelope Thick Back ExtraThk Back Cleaning Cycle Reset C Toner Count*5 Reset M Toner Count*5 Reset Y Toner Count*5 Reset K Toner Count*5 Reset Trnfr Unit Ct*5
*1
Value -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 32, 48 *3 *4 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3 A step is one level *2*3
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Always displayed in English regardless of the Lang setting in the Setup Menu. A list of user setting items which are not included in the Setup Menu are shown below. Initialization by the initialization menu of the Panel does not clear these setting items. Setting Item
PrinterName MFG in the Device ID MDL in the Device ID DES in the Device ID CID in the Device ID
Setting Value 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string
Default Value Setting Method (TBD) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) EJL, PrinterName command EJL EJL EJL EJL
Control Panel
1-61
Revision D
Reference: (This cannot be included in the manual) The remaining toner is displayed according to the Dispense Time (3,050 Sec = 0 %) that is administrated by the engine. However, this value is not always accurate.
1.14.6 Explanation of Each Setting Menu and Setting Items

This section describes the detailed model-dependent specifications of this printer's setting items.
1.14.6.1 Information Menu

COLOR_REGIST SHEET
This menu prints the sheet for adjusting Registration of each color (Y, M, C, K). Set the value Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist where each color is darkest or black and each color are in a line in the printing result. When reprinting the Color Registration Sheet after setting, each color results in darkest or in a line with black are located at the center of the each belt where the value is set. Design note:If any data remain in the printer mode when pressing the Enter button, the printer ejects paper. Print the Color Registration Sheet with the factory default setting expect Resolution = 600 dpi, Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist settings are current value. The LCD blinks when printing is in progress.
Table 1-34. C Toner

TonerSensor (STSWRN) Off (inactive) STSLIFE inactive Dispense time less than near end value rear end value or more less than near end value end value or more --Remaining Toner Calculated value Up to 2 % Adapt to 2 % Up to 1 % 0%
On (active)
inactive active
M TONER
The remaining M (Magenta) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only, exclusive readout). The specifications are the same as the C Toner.
Y TONER C TONER
The remaining C (Cyan) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only, exclusive readout). E****F : E*** F : E** F : E* E F: F: 100 % Remaining Toner > 75% 75 % Remaining Toner > 50% 50 % Remaining Toner > 25% 25 % Remaining Toner > 0% Remaining Toner = 0% The remaining Y (Yellow) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only, exclusive readout). The specifications are the same as the C Toner.
K TONER
The remaining K (Black) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only, exclusive readout). The specifications are the same as the C Toner.
Control Panel
1-62
Revision D
PHOTOCONDUCTOR
This displays the remaining life of the Photoconductor Unit in % (display only, exclusive readout). E****F : E*** F : E** F : E* E F: F: 100 % life cycle > 75 % 75 % life cycle > 50 % 50 % life cycle > 25 % 25 % life cycle > 0 % life cycle = 0 %
1.14.6.2 Tray Menu

MP TYPE, LC1 TYPE, LC2 TYPE, LC3 TYPE
This menu specifies the type of paper set in the MP Tray, LC1/2/3 Cassette.
Paper Type Setting Value Plain Letterhead Recycled Color Trnsprncy Labels
Contents of Setting Plain Paper (copy paper etc.) Letterform Recycled paper Color paper OHP transparency Label paper
Engine control Plain paper Plain paper Plain paper Plain paper OHP (half-speed) Label paper (half-speed)
Applicable Tray MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 MP MP
Reference: (This cannot be included in the manual) The value is displayed according to the smallest remaining amount value among the number of copies printed by the Photoconductor read from the engine, the Dispense Time of each color, and the Work Time. The value is automatically reset when installing new Photoconductor Unit. Theremaining amount is assumed as 0% after activating PHD Life Over of the engine status (STSLIFE).
TOTAL PAGES
This displays the number of sheets printed by the printer up to present (display only).
When Paper Size = envelopes (IB5, C10, C5, DL, MON, C6), the Paper Source used is always the MP tray. Engine control is performed for envelopes. The printing speed is 8ppm. When Page Size = HLT, GLT, F4, CTM, the Paper Source used is always the MP tray. The engine control is performed giving priority to the Paper Type settings. When Paper Type is Normal, the engine control is performed according to the MP Type setting.
COLOR PAGES
This displays the number of sheets printed by the printer up to present (display only).
B/W PAGES
This displays only the number of sheets printed in monochrome by the printer up to present (display only).
Control Panel
1-63

When Page Size = A4, LT, A5, B5, LGL, GLG, EXE, Paper Type = Normal and Paper Source = Auto : Selects the Paper Source that matches the specified Paper Size from the Paper Sources where the Paper Type specified by the mode matches the setting value for each tray as shown in the above table. Paper Source = MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 : Selects the specified Paper Source. Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated : The Paper Source always selects the MP Tray. Engine control Engine control is performed giving priority to the Paper Type settings. When Paper Type is set to Normal, engine control is performed with the setting value of the selected tray. The Paper Type, that is determined when selecting Paper Source, is specified only by the ESC/Page, ESC/Page-Color or LJ4 commands. The Paper Type setting does not use Bond to avoid confusion with Thick.
Revision D
1.14.6.4 Setup Menu

PAPER SOURCE
Selects the paper source when Paper Type = Normal. Auto : Feeds paper from the paper source that loads paper of the specified paper type and paper size. MP : Feeds paper from the MP Tray. LC1 : Feeds paper from the LC1. LC2 : Feeds paper from the LC2. LC3 : Feeds paper from the LC3. When Page Size is set to envelopes (IB5, C10, C5, DL, MON, C6), Paper Source always selects the MP Tray. When Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated, Paper Source is always set to the MP Tray.
QUANTITY
This menu sets the number of copies printed by collating a set of sequential pages (Collate printing), and it is specified prior to the Copies setting. Therefore, when Quantity is set to 2 or more, the setting value of Copies becomes invalid. Collate printing is performed by the RAM or HDD. Unless any HDD is installed, the driver uses the Quantity setting when the printer's RAM size is 64 MB or more. This setting is specified only by PJL and EJL, or the ESC/Page and ESC/PageColor commands, and the printer cannot store the setting value. If data for one job cannot be stored in the printer, the printer displays the "Collate was disabled" warning and prints only one copy.
1.14.6.3 Printing Menu

RITECH
This is an outline correction function which is equivalent to that of a monochrome page printer in B/W printing. In color printing, the outline correction function is accomplished by the CRIT function.
TONER SAVE
During color printing, by controlling the halftone growth and by printing with a low density, toner consumption is reduced.
Control Panel
1-64
Revision D
PAPER TYPE
Set the Paper Type to match the change in the kind of paper to be used. Printing speed and CM (Color Matching) will be decided based on the setting.
Table 1-35. Engine Control, CM (Color Matching)

Page Size Envelope*1 Paper Type --EJL Paper Face --Paper Source --Paper Type Specified by Driver (Host) --Specified Not Specified Other Than Auto Other Than Envelope Thick ExtraThk Trnsprnc Coated FRONT BACK FRONT BACK --------------------------------MP or LC1-3 Type*2 --Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Normal --Auto Trnsprnc Labels ------------Engine Control (Video Media Type) Envelope Thicker paper-H Transparency Heavier paper-L Thicker paper-H Thicker paper-H Heavier paper-L Heavier paper-L Back Heavier paper-H Heavier paper-H Back Transparency Plain paper-H High Gloss CM Plain Paper See Table 1-36 See Table 1-36 See Table 1-36 See Table 1-37 See Table 1-37 Plain Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper OHP Plain Paper
*1: MON, C10, DL, C5, C6 *2: The Paper Type specified for the Paper Source that actually feeds paper. *3: For the actual printing spped, refer to Section 1.2.1.2 "Printer Basic Specification".
Table 1-36. CM 1
CM Media Type Off Option1 Option2 MP or LC1-3 Type*3 Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Labels Trnsprnc ----CM Plain paper OHP Option1 Option2 Off Option1 Option2
Table 1-37. CM 2
CM Media Type CM Plain paper Option1 Option2
Control Panel
1-65
Revision D
PAGE SIDE
Front : Select this when printing on the front side of Paper Type = Thick or ExtraThk Back : Select this when printing on the back side of Paper Type = Thick or ExtraThk
1.14.6.5 Reset Menu

SELECTYPE INIT
This function returns the panel setting values to the factory default. However following panel setting values are not returned to factory default. a.) A value that can not be set by user (remaining toner, total printing number of sheets, etc) b.) Interface setting value c.) Password of mailbox d.) Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist setting value
LCD CONTRAST
This function adjusts the display density of LCD by adjusting the contrast voltage of LCD. When 0 is selected, the LCD display is lowest contrast and weakest. When 15 is selected, the LCD display is highest contrast and darkest. Selecting the Up button makes the contrast higher, while selecting the Down button makes it lower. Pressing the Up or Down button changes the contrast without pressing the Enter button. By pressing the Enter button, the setting is determined and becomes effective. The timing when this setting is made effective after turning the printer on is in the on-going system check, therefore the LCD shows the default value 7 just after powering on. When the panel setting value is set to 0 and the display is too light to be visible, initialize the panel setting by restarting the printer pressing the Job Cancel button.
1.14.6.6 Support Menu

This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by a special operation when the power is turned on, and can be selected. Then restarting the printer deletes the Support Menu from the Menu.
CYAN / MAGENTA / YELLOW REGIST

This menu adjusts the registration of laser scan printing position for Black in 1dot unit of 600 dpi. The adjustment is made when primarily locating the main unit and when moving it. Additionally the adjustment is performed if required. The value can be set from -7 to 7 in 1/unit (0 for default). The setting becomes valid after pressing the Enter button.
Control Panel
1-66
Revision D
1.14.6.7 Printer Adjust Menu

This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by a special operation when the power is turned on, and can be selected. Then restarting the printer deletes the Printer Adjust Menu from the Menu. These settings become effective after powering on or warm boot. When changing the default values, these changes apply to print on special paper, etc., however color quality is not guaranteed. When executing an item in the Printer Adjust Menu of the Support Mode, confirm that there is no engine-related service call in normal mode (not in Support Mode).
COATED
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the Paper Type = Coated setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
ENVELOPE
Sets the Transfer Current for printing the paper of the Envelope sizes. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
THICK BACK
Sets the Transfer Current for printing the back of the Paper Type = Thick setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
NORMAL
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the Paper Type = Normal setting. The value can be set from -15 to 15 in units of 5. The current changes 5% for each step. (0 for default) Printing result is lightest when -15 is set, and darkest when 15 is set.
EXTRATHK BACK
Sets the Transfer Current for printing the back of the Paper Type = ExtraThk setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
THICK
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = Thick setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
EXTRATHK
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = ExtraThk setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
TRNSPRNC
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = Trnsprnc setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
Control Panel
1-67
Revision D
1.14.6.8 Maintenance Menu

(This cannot be included in the manual) This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Then restarting the printer deletes the Maintenance Menu from the Menu (the Maintenance Mode is deleted = the printer has switched to the normal mode). Basically, this setting is for maintenance by service personnel.
ENGINE STATUS SHEET

Pressing the Enter button starts printing the Engine Status Sheet. If data remains in the mode, paper is output. Be sure to switch to the Maintenance Mode after confirming that there are no engine related service call in the normal mode (a mode that is not the Maintenance Mode), then execute. The RITech, Toner Save and Resolution values are printed with the value in operation, while the other values are printed with the factory default settings. Even after printing, the User Default environment (setting) does not change. The LCD display blinks during printing. The contents of the Engine Status Sheet are output with the count value of each unit of the engine. Also, the Engine Status Sheet is always printed as Lang = English regardless of the Lang setting of the Setup Menu
CLEAR ERROR LOG

This function clears the Error Log List stored to display on the Engine Status Sheet.
Control Panel
1-68
Revision D
1.15 About RAM Expansion

In case of an insufficient memory, the following errors occur in this printer: Mem Overflow, Image Optimum, Need Memory, Duplex Mem Overflow. In these cases, error processing listed below can possibly release the errors. Set the resolution to 300 dpi in the case of B/W printing. In color printing, change the compression format to the non-reversible compression. Make the receive buffer size smaller. Set an unused I/F to Off. However, in order to surely avoid problems with an insufficient memory, it is necessary to install additional memory.
1.16 Dimensions
Dimensions: Mann: 439mm x 638mm x 445mm (W x L x H) 439mm x 638mm x 781mm (Include the option feeder unit) Approx. 36.5kg (Printer body only)
The dimension of EPSON AcuLaser C4000 is shown below.
Figure 1-10. Dimension of AcuLaser C4000
About RAM Expansion
1-69
CHAPTER
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Revision D
2.1 Print Process

2.1.1 Print Process Overview
This printer is a full color laser printer that uses the principle of electrophotographic recording. Each YMCK color (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) has its own special drum and developer that are used in tandem, three Intermediate Data Transfer rollers are coordinated (2 IDT 1 rollers, 1 IDT 2 roller), and at the end of the process the layered color toner images produce a full color print. The major steps of the print process are described below: 1) Charging: The drum surfaces are charged with electricity. 2) Exposure: Image areas are exposed on drums with laser radiation. 3) Developing: Image areas on drums are developed with toner. 4) Primary transfer: The toner image on drums is transferred to transfer rollers (IDT1). 5) Secondary transfer: The toner images on primary transfer rollers (IDT 1) are transferred to the secondary transfer roller (IDT 2). 6) Cleaning: Primary transfer rollers (IDT 1) are cleaned. 7) Tertiary transfer: The complete four-color toner image on the secondary transfer roller (IDT 2) is transferred to the paper. 8) Cleaning: Secondary transfer roller (IDT 2) is cleaned. 9) Electrical charge removal: The electrical charge of the paper is discharged. 10) Fusing: Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure. 11) Cleaning: Residual toner on the drums and transfer rollers is collected.
Figure 2-1. Print Process Overview
Operating Principles
Print Process
2-71
Revision D
All major components of the printing process are consolidated in the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3), as shown in the diagram below.
2.1.2 Print Process Diagram

The diagram below illustrates the entire print process.
Figure 2-3. PHD ASSY Diagram
Figure 2-2. Print Process Diagram
Print Process
2-72
Revision D
2.1.3 Print Process Technical Explanation

2.1.3.1 Charging Process
This process gives an electrical charge to the surfaces of the photoconductive drums.
2.1.3.9 Electrical Carge Removal

This process neutralizes / removes any positive electrical charge that remains on the back of the paper due to the tertiary transfer, through the provision of a negative bias (negative voltage) by Detack Daw. The removal of this electrostatic charge helps to prevent the paper from sticking to, coiling around or being attracted toward the paper pathways, the fuser and the paper eject tray. In addition, this procedure prevents image disturbances that may be caused by electrical discharges and electrostatic noise.
2.1.3.2 Exposure Process

This process uses laser light to expose the imaging drums and form an invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface.
2.1.3.3 Developing Process

This process builds up the images on the drum surfaces, using the toners.
2.1.3.4 Primary Transfer Process

This process transfers the toner images that have been built up on the drums, to the Primary Intermediate Transfer Drums (IDT1).
2.1.3.5 Secondary Transfer Process

This process transfers the toner images from the Primary Intermediate Transfer Drums (IDT1) to the Secondary Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2).
2.1.3.6 Cleaning
This process cleans the Primary Intermediate Transfer Drums (IDT1).
2.1.3.7 Tertiary Transfer Process

This process transfers the complete 4-color toner image from the Secondary Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2) onto the paper.
2.1.3.8 Cleaning
This process cleans the Secondary Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2).
Print Process
2-73
Revision D
2.1.3.10 Fusing Process

The Fusing process fixes the toner to the paper using heat and pressure. The toner image that is transferred to the paper by IDT 2 can be easily smudged by even a light touch of a finger, so the toner image is fixed to the paper by the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). With the Heater Lamp as its heat source, the Heat Roll melts the toner, then components inside the Belt opposite the Heat Roll applies pressure to the paper and the toner is fixed in place. The fusing method of the AcuLaser C4000 differs from previous heat-roll and pressure-roll fusing methods. By using a pressure method with the belt: Contact area for the Heat-Roll is expanded. Nip pressure is reduced by expansion of contact area. Heat transferability is improved by thinner Heat-Roll, reducing warm-up time and fusing time.
2.1.3.11 Cleaning Process

This process recovers any excess toner that remains on the image drums and on the intermediate transfer drums.
Figure 2-4. Fusing Process
Print Process
2-74
Revision D
2.1.3.12 Cleaning (Full)

The Cleaning (Full) process removes residual toner from the HTC, Refresher, IDT 1 Cleaner, and IDT 2 Cleaner after the complete toner image has been transferred to the paper. Toner that is not transferred during the Secondary Transfer and 3rd Stage Transfer processes is retained on the IDT 1 Cleaner and IDT 2 Cleaner. The polarity also changes and toner returned to the drum is retained on the Refresher. Any toner that slips by the Refresher adheres to the HTC. The toner in these locations is cleaned after completion of the print. The method used to collect the toner on IDT 1 Cleaner and IDT 2 Cleaner is different from the method used on the Refresher and HTC. 1) IDT 1 Cleaner, IDT 2 Cleaner The same high voltage used during the print transfer process is applied to IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR. By applying zero volts to the IDT 1 Cleaner and IDT 2 Cleaner, any remaining toner (negative polarity) on the IDT cleaners is transferred by electric charge to IDT 1 and IDT 2. From that point, as with the print transfer process, the electric potential difference of IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR causes the remaining toner to be collected on the BTR surface.
Figure 2-5. Cleaning 1
Print Process
2-75

2) Refresher, HTC High voltage opposite that used during the print transfer process (negative) is applied to IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR. The drum surfaces are negatively charged by contact with IDT 1 rollers. By applying zero volts to the Refresher and HTC, residual toner (positive polarity) on the Refresher and HTC is transferred by electric charge to the drums. From that point, as with the print transfer process, the electric potential difference of IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR causes the remaining toner to be collected on the BTR surface. Toner picked up by the BTR surface is scraped off by the Scraper and collected in the toner collection space inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2).
Revision D
Figure 2-6. Cleaning 2
Print Process
2-76
Revision D
2.2 Flow of Print Data

2.2.1 Data Flow
Print data (electric signal) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown below to become a print image.
Flow of Print Data
2-77
Revision D
2.3 Drive Transmission Path

2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2)
Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transferred through the flow shown below.
Figure 2-8. DRIVE ASSY MAIN 2
Figure 2-7. DRIVE ASSY MAIN 2
Drive Transmission Path
2-78
Revision D
2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1)

Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE drives each of the color developers inside the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3).
2.3.3 HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5 ~ 8) (Y, M, C, K)

Rotational force of the Toner Motor inside the HOLDER ASSY drives the Agitator inside the TONER CARTRIDGE (PL12.1.1~4) in order to supply toner from the TONER CARTRIDGE to the HOLDER ASSY. It also drives the Auger inside the HOLDER ASSY to supply toner to the Developer inside the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3). There are four HOLDER ASSY, one for each YMCK color, and they all work the same way.
Figure 2-9. DRIVE ASSY DEVE 1
Figure 2-11. HOLDER ASSY 1
Figure 2-10. DRIVE ASSY DEVE 2
2-79
Revision D
2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18)

Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER drives the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1).
Figure 2-12. HOLDER ASSY 2
Figure 2-13. DRIVE ASSY FUSER
2-80
Revision D
2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8)

Rotational force of the MOTOR ASSY DUP is transferred through the flow shown below.
Figure 2-15. MOTOR ASSY DUP 2
Figure 2-14. MOTOR ASSY DUP 1
2-81
Revision D
2.4 Paper Feed

2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (without options in use)
2.4.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram
Figure 2-16. Paper Feed Path Diagram 1
Paper Feed
2-82
Revision D
Figure 2-17. Paper Feed Path Diagram 2
Paper Feed
2-83
Revision D
2.5 Functions of Main Components

The main components that make up this device will be explained with corresponding illustrations. Components are divided into blocks according to the structure of the printer. Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2) Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3) Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1) Chute Assy In (PL6.1) Chute Assy Out (PL7.1) Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1) Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1) Xerographics (PL11.1) TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3) Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1) Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1)
Figure 2-18. Functions of Main Components
2.5.1 Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2)

2.5.1.1 Main Functions
Side Guide Adjusts to needed width for paper feed direction and maintains paper position. End Guide Adjusts to needed width for paper feed direction and determines the paper supply size. Paper size is detected when the End Guide position changes the ON/OFF condition of the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). (See Section 2.5.2 Paper Feeder) ROLL ASSY (Cassette) (PL3.1.6) Paper is fed by the pinching action of the ROLL ASSY (Cassette) and ROLL ASSY (PICK UP ASSY) (PL4.3.25). (See Section 2.5.2 Paper Feeder)
Functions of Main Components
2-84
Revision D
SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) Detects temperature and humidity inside the printer. The printer adjusts the charge voltage, the supply voltage to each transfer roller, and the developer bias according to the detected temperature and humidity.
2.5.2 Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3)

SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 detects the presence/absence of the tray and the size of the paper. SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (No paper Sensor) (PL4.3.4) Detects the presence/absence of paper inside the tray by change in the actuator position. (No paper: sensor blocked) SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Low Paper Sensor) (PL4.3.4) The actuator lowers according to the level of paper in the tray. When the actuator descends to a certain level, the sensor becomes shaded, thereby allowing detection of the low quantity of paper. The actuator position can be seen from the front of the tray, allowing a rough estimate of remaining paper. SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17) The ROLL FEED ASSY (PL4.3.3) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled by the GEAR FEED (PL4.3.11, PL4.3.12) rotation. CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18) Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) is transferred to the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21). ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3) When the SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 moves, force from the SPRING FEED (PL4.3.9, PL4.3.10) causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED (PL4.3.14) to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by receiving driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and the ROLL ASSY (PICK UP ASSY) (PL4.3.25) feeds a sheet of paper from the tray. A notch in the GEAR FEED causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED to disengage after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force and stopping rotation of the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of paper is fed at a time. ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21) ROLL ASSY TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE ASSY MAIN through CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 and conveys the paper fed from the tray to the CHUTE REGI (Regi Roll) (PL10.1.14). (See Section 2.5.8 Xerographics)
Figure 2-19. Paper Feeder
2-85
Revision D
2.5.3 Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1)

CLUTCH TURN MSI (MSI Turn Clutch) (PL5.1.9) Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) is transferred to the ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) ROLL TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE ASSY MAIN through CLUTCH TURN MSI (MSI Turn Clutch) and conveys the paper fed from the tray to the CHUTE REGI (Regi Roll) (PL10.1.14). (See Section 2.5.8 Xerographics)
2.5.4 Chute Assy In (PL6.1)

SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) Determines the density of the toner image on the surface of the BTR inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) (See 5.7 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY) and sends that feedback to the Process Controller. (See Section 2.8.4 PROCESS CONTROLLER) SENSOR TNR FULL (PL6.1.13) Detects the full condition of the BTR ASSY waste toner collection space. (See Section 2.5.7 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY) DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) Supplies driving force to the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). (See Section 2.5.7 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY)
Figure 2-20. Housing Assy Retard Figure 2-21. Chute Assy In Operating Principles Functions of Main Components 2-86
Revision D
2.5.5 Chute Assy Out (PL7.1)

SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack Sensor) (PL7.1.4) Change in the actuator position detects exceeded quantities of discharged or collected paper on the top cover. (Full stack: sensor receiving) SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam Sensor) (PL7.1.4) Change in the actuator position detects if the paper has reached or is passing through the ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12). (Paper present: sensor receiving) SENSOR PAPER (MSI No Paper Sensor) (PL7.1.4) Change in the actuator position detects presence/absence of paper on the manual feed tray. (Paper absent: sensor blocked) SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40) The ROLL ASSY FEED (PL7.1.27) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled by the GEAR MSI (PL7.1.22) rotation. ROLL ASSY FEED (PL7.1.27) When the SOLENOID FEED MSI moves, force from the SPRING SOL (PL7.1.39) causes the GEAR MSI and GEAR IDLER (DRIVE MAIN ASSY) to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by receiving driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) and feeds a sheet of paper from the manual feed tray. A notch in the GEAR MSI causes the GEAR MSI and GEAR Idler (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) to disengage after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force and stopping rotation of the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of paper is fed at a time. ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12) ROLL DUP begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) and then conveys single-side printed paper from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) to the ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). (See Section 2.5.3 HOUSING ASSY RETARD)
Figure 2-22. Chute Assy Out
2-87
Revision D
2.5.6 Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1)

MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) Supplies driving force to the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4), ROLL MID (PL8.1.5), ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12). ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4) ROLL EXIT begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY DUP and then conveys the fused print onto the top cover. For double-sided printing, ROLL EXIT reverses rotation and conveys the single-side printed paper toward the REGI. ROLL MID (PL8.1.5) ROLL MID begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY DUP and then conveys the fused print onto the top cover. For double-sided printing, ROLL EXIT reverses rotation and conveys the single-side printed paper toward the REGI.
Figure 2-23. Chute Assy Exit
2-88
Revision D
2.5.7 Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1)

FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) The FUSER ASSY fixes the toner to the paper with heat and pressure, and it also conveys the paper toward and away from the fusing location. The FUSER ASSY is constructed of the following main components: Heat Roll Heater Lamp Thermostat Temp Sensor Exit Sensor Change in the actuator position detects passage of the paper after the image is fused. BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) The BTR ASSY is constructed of the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) and the waster toner collection system. The BTR is positioned opposite IDT 2 of the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3) and transfers the toner image on IDT 2 to the paper. FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9) Vents heat from FUSER ASSY and prevents inside the printer overheating. Belt Unit Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor
Figure 2-24. Fuser Assy & BTR Assy 1
2-89
Revision D
2-90
Revision D
2-91
Revision D
CHUTE ASSY REGI (CLUTCH REGI) (PL10.1.1) The CHUTE ASSY REGI is constructed of the CLUTCH REGI (PL10.1.12), the ROLL REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.10) and the ROLL REGI METAL. Driving force is transferred from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) to the ROLL REGI RUBBER by the CLUTCH REGI (PL10.1.12), and the paper is conveyed toward the PHD ASSY from either the Tray path or the MSI path. In addition, when the leading edge of the paper reaches the CHUTE REGI (PL10.1.14), the CLUTCH REGI becomes a retaining loop for the paper until the ROLL REGI RUBBER begins rotating, and it corrects skew of the paper edge to ensure proper feed. SENSOR REGI (Regi Sensor) (PL10.1.20) Detects the leading edge of the paper when it reaches the CHUTE REGI. (Paper present: sensor receiving) SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16) Regular paper scatters radiated light, and the SENSOR OHP catches that reflected light, detecting the paper. OHP (Over Head Projector) transparencies do not scatter much direct light, so the SENSOR OHP cannot catch any reflected light. This method determines if the sheet being fed from the MSI is an OHP transparency or regular paper.
2.5.8 Xerographics (PL11.1)

ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) The ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is an exposure device that sends out laser radiation to form electrostatic images on the surface of the drum. In this manual, items related to the ROS ASSY are simply called ROS. The ROS ASSY is constructed of the following main components: Quad Beam Laser Diode Scanner Motor Assy SOS PWB Lens Mirror Window PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3) The PHD ASSY (Print Head Assembly) handles the charging, developing and transferring steps of the print process. The PHD ASSY is constructed of the following components: Drum (Y) Drum (M) Drum (C) Drum (K) HTC (Y) HTC (M) HTC (C) HTC (K) IDT 1 (2) IDT 1 Cleaner (2) Developer (Y) Developer (M) Developer (C) Developer (K) Refresher (Y) Refresher (M) Refresher (C) Refresher (K) IDT 2 IDT 2 Cleaner
Figure 2-28. Xerographics
2-92
Revision D
HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) Provides high voltage to the following components during 3rd Stage Transfer and De-electrification of the print process. The BTR inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) The Detack Saw inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2)
2.5.9 TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3)

SWITCH TCRU ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.10) SWITCH TCRU ASSY (M) (PL12.2.10) SWITCH TCRU ASSY (C) (PL12.2.10) SWITCH TCRU ASSY (K) (PL12.2.10) Detects the presence/absence of TCRU ASSY (toner bottle) for each color. SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9) SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9) SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9) SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9) Detects the toner quantity for each color. HOLDER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor : Y) (PL12.2.5) HOLDER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor : M) (PL12.2.6) HOLDER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor : C) (PL12.2.7) HOLDER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor : K) (PL12.2.8) The Toner Motor built into each HOLDER ASSY drives the Agitator inside the TCRU ASSY and the Auger inside the HOLDER ASSY, thereby supplying toner to the Developers in the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3). TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL12.1.1) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL12.1.2) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL12.1.3) TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL12.1.4) The toner for each color is contained in the built-in toner bottle. PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) Stores printer dedicated data.
Figure 2-29. TCRU Assy Operating Principles Functions of Main Components 2-93
Revision D
2.5.10 Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1)

DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) Supplies driving force to the following components: PAPER FEEDER (PL4.1 ~3) HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) CHUTE ASSY OUT (MSI component) (PL7.1.1) CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) PHD ASSY (IDT 2, IDT 1, Drum) (PL11.1.3) BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) Supplies driving force to the following components: PHD ASSY (Developer) (PL11.1.3)
2.5.11 Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1)

FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) Vents heat from inside the printer and prevents internal overheating. HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11) Made up of the Main Switch and the Inlet, this controls supply of AC power from the power source to LVPS (PL15.1.10). LVPS (PL15.1.10) There are two types of LVPS: for 100/200V and for 230V. It provides AC power from the power source to the heater of the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) and also supplies stable low voltage DC power for use by such components as the logic circuits. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Controls print operations based on PRINT CONTROLLER communications and data from sensors and switches. HVPS is built into the printer. HVPS has the following main functions: Communications with PRINT CONTROLLER Reception of sensor/switch data Control of ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) To support Charging, Developing, Primary Transfer and Secondary Transfer of the print process, the HVPS supplies high voltage to the following components of the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3): HTC Refresher Developer IDT 1 IDT 2 IDT 1 Cleaner IDT 2 Cleaner
Figure 2-30. Frame & Drive
2-94

PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) Controls the motor and other components according to PWBA MCU & HVPS signals and sends data from sensors/switches to PWBA MCU & HVPS. Power from the LVPS passes through this PWB and is supplied to PWBA MCU & HVPS. This PWB is equipped with an interlock switch. PWB DRIVE has the following main functions: Reception of data from sensors/switches Control of DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2), DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1), DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18), MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8), and Toner Motors in HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5~8) Distribution of low voltage DC power from LVPS to each component Interruption of 24VDC circuits by interlock switch activation PWB CONTROLLER (PWB ESS) (PL16.1.5) Receives data from the host computer, executes printing, and has overall control of the printer.
Revision D
Figure 2-31. Electrical & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS)
2-95
Revision D
2.6 Switches and Sensors

Switches and sensors installed on this printer are shown in the diagrams below. For the function of each component, see 2.5 "Functions of Main Components".
Figure 2-32. Switches and Sensors 1
Figure 2-33. Switchse and Sensors 2
Switches and Sensors
2-96
Revision D
2.7 Mode
2.7.1 Print Mode
There are three print modes: Normal Mode, High Resolution Mode, and High Gloss Mode. These modes have sub-categories based on resolution (600 dpi/ 1200 dpi) and process speed (full speed/half speed). When process speed is set to half speed, video data transfer speed to the ROS is double the 600 dpi speed, yielding 1200 dpi resolution. 1. Use Normal Mode to print at 600 dpi 2. Use High Resolution Mode to print at 1200 dpi on plain paper 3. Use High Gloss Mode at 600 dpi with half speed to improve gloss on plain paper Relationships of resolution, process speed, paper and print mode are shown below.
2.7.2 Operation Mode

The following five modes are available in the printers Operation Mode. DIAG TEST Mode Printer is ready to receive diagnostic commands or is executing diagnostics. WAIT Mode Printer is adjusting print quality. READY Mode Printer is ready to print. PRINTING Mode Printer is printing. ERROR Mode Printer has detected some kind of problem.
Table 2-1. Print Mode

Resolution / Process speed Paper Print Mode 600dpi Simplex Normal Normal Paper Full Speed Half Speed Half Speed Duplex Full Speed Half Speed 1200dpi Simplex Half Speed Half Speed Duplex Half Speed
High Resolution High Gloss

Normal
Special Applications *1
High Resolution
*1: Thick paper, Labels, Transparencies, Envelopes, Postcards
Mode
2-97
Revision D
2.8 Control
2.8.1 Paper Size Control
The table below shows Paper Size Switch ON/OFF conditions for SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8) and corresponding Diagnostic Tool Display Data according to the paper size loaded. NOTE: Paper size switch order from the highest to lowest positions is SW1, SW2, SW3.
2.8.2 Paper Supply Selection Control

When not actively controlled by the Printer Controller, TRAY 1 is selected as the paper supply when the power is turned ON. NOTE: TRAY 1 is used as the name for the printers internal paper supply, TRAY 2 is the first level of the optional TRAY UNIT and TRAY 3 is the second level of the TRAY UNIT.
2.8.3 ROS Light Control

Image data enters the laser diode of the ROS ASSY as an electric signal (data is expressed by high/low condition of the voltage), and the laser diode converts that electric signal to a light signal (data is expressed by on/off condition of the light). Occurrence of variations such as fluxuations in laser radiation quantity, irregularities in the optics (such as the lens) or variations in the sensitivity of the drum can prevent the formation of a suitable electrostatic image, so the laser diode monitors the laser radiation quantity and controls it in order to always obtain a suitable electrostatic image. The ROS in this printer has four separate laser diodes, one each for yellow, magenta, cyan and black, and quantity of laser radiation is automatically adjusted for each.
Table 2-2. Paper Size Control

Paper Size LEGAL14 (SEF) LEGAL13 (SEF) EXECUTIVE (SEF) B5 (SEF) A4 (SEF) LETTER (SEF) A5 No cassette Paper Size Switch SW1 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF SW2 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF SW3 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 07 Diagnostic Display Data 00 01 02 03 04 06
Control
2-98
Revision D
An overview of POTENTIAL CONTROL is shown below. 1) Temperature and humidity is measured by the SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) and target values are set for drum charge voltage and developer DC voltage. 2) A POTENTIAL CONTROL patch for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) is formed and transferred to the BTR surface. (The shape of the patches is shown below.)
2.8.4 PROCESS CONTROL

In order to render a stable print, timely correction of image formation parameters is needed. Control of the entire process that includes parameter adjustment control is called PROCESS CONTROL. The following two items are the main controlling functions: Potential Control Toner Density Control The controlling functions above are supplemented by the following functions: High Area Coverage Mode Admix Mode SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) LED Light Quantity Setting
2.8.4.1 POTENTIAL CONTROL

In order to obtain stable print image density, POTENTIAL CONTROL regulates the drum charge voltage and the developer DC voltage to match the fluctuating developer capability moment by moment. Adjusted drum charge voltage and developer DC voltage is monitored, and a fixed level of print image density is maintained. POTENTIAL CONTROL performs its functions just before printing starts under the following conditions: When printing the first page after power has been turned on When the number of pages lined up for printing is 16 or more When performing a cleaning cycle between a series of pages to be printed
Figure 2-34. POTENTIAL CONTROL

3) Density on the portion of the BTR surface not holding toner and density of the patch are both measured by the SENSOR ASSY ADC (Density Sensor). 4) Density measurements taken at Step 3) are compared with target values set in Step 1). Adjustments to drum charge voltage and developer DC voltage for each color are made according to the difference in the values.
Control
2-99
Revision D
method determines the number of dispense rotations. ADC dispense rotation calculations are cancelled after 8 pages are printed. If ADC calculates that dispense rotations will be insufficient for 16 pages, the insufficient portion is used to print the first 8 pages, that amount is doubled (16 8 = 2) and added to the dispense rotations calculated by the PCDC. In the same way, if ADC calculates that dispense rotations will be excessive for 16 pages, the excess amount is used for the first 8 pages, and the amount of dispense rotations calculated by the PCDC is decreased. If the subtraction for 8 pages will not be enough to use up the excess amount, the remainder is subtracted from additional pages.
2.8.4.2 Toner Density Control

It is necessary to maintain fixed toner densities in order to obtain stable print quality. Accurately refreshing the areas of toner used by the previous print will maintain a fixed toner density. This arrangement is called PCDC. However, because PCDC used by itself will generate differences in the targeted toner densities, a method of correcting this is needed. Toner density correction using SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) accomplishes this. The combination of these two methods is called Toner Density Control. 1) PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control) By counting the video signals entering the ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1), the amount of toner used during the developing process can be calculated. The video signal count is done by detecting the charge/ discharge cycle of a condenser in the CR circuit arranged in parallel with the video signal line. Toner use is calculated by the toner dispensing time. The Toner Motor inside the HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5~8) is turned according to the calculated toner dispense time, and toner is supplied to the developer. 2) ADC (Auto Destiny Control) A toner density control patch for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) is formed by the set electric potential conditions, the patches are transferred the BTR, and the density on the BTR is measured by the SENSOR ASSY ADC. The measured values are compared to standard values. When the toner density is low, the toner dispense quantity is increased for subsequent printing; when toner density is high, the toner dispense quantity is decreased for subsequent printing. Toner dispense quantity is calculated by toner dispense time. The calculations are made for each color. ADC performs its functions after printing is completed under either of the following conditions: When the number of pages lined up for printing is 16 or more When performing a cleaning cycle between pages in a print series 3) Toner Dispensing Example The Toner Motor will rotate one time for each set period of time. Toner dispense time, calculated by items (1) and (2) above, is used to calculate the needed number of Toner Motor rotations. The following
Figure 2-35. Toner Density Control
Control
2-100
Revision D
2.8.4.3 High Area Coverage Mode

When printing a series of pages with an image coverage area requiring toner dispensing, the toner density inside the developer can become low. To counter this, High Area Coverage Mode delays the feeding of the next sheet of paper when the toner dispense time has reached its set value and continues to allow toner dispensing.
2.8.4.5 SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) LED Light Quantity Control

The SENSOR ASSY ADC is a refection type density sensor that uses an internal LED to shine light on a target, detect the reflected light with a receptor, and send an electric signal corresponding to light quantities detected. In order to correctly measure the density, it is necessary for the sensor output value (reflected light quantity) from the BTR target (when no toner is present) to be like a required value. The reflected light quantity will change according to the condition of the BTR surface and the amount of dust on the SENSOR ASSY ADC surface. For the reflected value to become a standard, the light emitted from the LED must be controlled. This control sets the light quantity as though the reflected light quantity were a prescribed value and thereafter regulates quantities to be within the allowed limits. 1) Light Quantity Setting The reflected light quantity can change substantially when the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) is replaced or the SENSOR ASSY ADC is cleaned. This is assumed to happen, and setting is performed when power is turned on or the front cover is closed. The LED light quantity is increased gradually, and output from the SENSOR ASSY ADC becomes the set value when it surpasses the prescribed value. At this time, if the SENSOR ASSY ADC output cannot be set as the prescribed value even at its maximum light quantity, then the sensor is judged to be dirty. If the output is unusually high, the sensor is judged to be damaged. 2) Light Quantity Adjustment Light Quantity Adjustment is performed just before formation of the toner density control patch when ADC is activated. Light is emitted at the currently set LED light quantity, and SENSOR ASSY ADC output is evaluated to see if it is within the fixed range. If the output value is low, the fixed value for light quantity is increased the next time ADC is activated. If the output value is high, the fixed value for light quantity is reduced the next time ADC is activated. At this time, if the value falls to the first minimum limit, the sensor is judged to be dirty and an alarm is sounded. If the value falls to the second minimum limit, the sensor is judged to be dirty and printing is stopped.
2.8.4.4 Admix Mode

There are times when High Area Coverage Mode will not be able to fully counteract low density of toner inside the developer. In another case, by bringing the printer to a location with low humidity after using it in an area of high humidity, SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) measured values and toner density standard values will differ greatly because the toner density standard values will change with each environment. To handle this, Admix Mode prevents a drop in toner density by activating toner dispensing when the toner density control patch measurements taken by the SENSOR ADC ASSY at the time of patch formation greatly falls below the standard value.
Control
2-101
Revision D
An overview of Color Registration Controls shown below. 1) SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) output is measured when there is no toner on the BTR, and the threshold is established. 2) A Color Registration Control patch is formed on the BTR surface. The patch consists of a leading black trigger followed by 10mm lines of color in K, C, K, M, K, Y order, repeated four times.
2.8.5 Color Registration Control

This printer uses a dedicated drum and developer for each of the colors yellow, magenta, cyan and black. Images are formed on each drum, and when they are layered on top of each other, some gaps in the quantity needed for each color can occur. To avoid this, Color Registration Control calculates the registration gaps and adjusts the timing of writing from the ROS.
C H E C K P O IN T
The Color Registration Control explained in this section makes adjustments to avoid color gaps in the secondary scan direction (paper transport direction). During process control, adjustments are made according to moment by moment changes in printer internal temperature and number of print pages. Because control is based on conditions in the printer, adjustment by manual operation is not possible. To avoid color gaps in the primary scan direction that are not influenced by the printer's internal conditions, make adjustments from the control panel. (Refer to Chapter 6.6.5 "Color Registration Adjustment")
Figure 2-36. Color Registration Control

3) The density of the formed patch is read by the SENSOR ASSY ADC. 4) The registration gap adjustment quantity is calculated according to the threshold established at 1) and the patch density measured at 3). 5) The ROS write timing is adjusted according to the registration gap adjustment quantity.
Control
2-102
Revision D
4) Cancellation of BTR Worklife Warning and BTR Worklife Error The SENSOR TNR FULL does not detect that the collection space is full when the power is turned on or the front door is closed, the BTR Worklife Warning or BTR Worklife Error output will be cancelled.
2.8.6 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Control

2.8.6.1 Detection of BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Position
Detection of the BTR ASSY position occurs whenever the power is turned on or the front cover is closed. Position detection is made by the SENSOR ASSY ADC, not by a sensor specialized for the task. A fixed quantity of light is emitted from the LED of the SENSOR ASSY ADC, and SENSOR ASSY ADC output above a fixed value determines the if the BTR is in the correct position. When stopped for a paper jam, there could be a toner image on the BTR, so to prevent an error in detection due to low sensor output, when the set value is not met the BTR is rotated half a revolution. When the SENSOR ASSY ADC output is above the fixed value, the BTR is judged to be in position, and when the fixed value cannot be obtained, the BTR is judged to be not in the correct position. NOTE: When the BTR ASSY is not in place, "Install Transfer Unit" and an error message will be displayed on the LCD panel.
2.8.6.2 Detection of BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Worklife Expiration

The BTR ASSY is made up of the BTR and the waste toner collection system, and it detects expiration of worklife by detecting when the waster toner collection space becomes full. The SENSOR TNR FULL (PL6.1.13) detects the full condition of the toner collection space. 1) Timing for checking of waste toner collection space condition Whenever the power is turned on or the front cover is closed Whenever paper is discharged 2) Output of BTR Worklife Warning When the SENSOR TNR FULL detects that the collection space is full, the BTR Worklife Warning is output. 3) Output of BTR Worklife Error After a BTR Worklife Warning is output, the number of prints made and the toner dispense time is calculated. If a predetermined value has been exceeded, BTR Worklife Error is output.
Control
2-103
Revision D
This condition is established to prevent erroneous detection that can occur due to position of the film as explained at 2.8.7.1 About SENSOR TONER LOW. 3) Output of No Toner Error After a No Toner Warning is output, the toner dispense time is calculated. If a predetermined value has been exceeded, No Toner Error is output. 4) Cancellation of No Toner Warning and No Toner Error After output of No Toner Error , toner dispense is activated for 1.5 seconds when the toner bottle installation is confirmed. After this, if SENSOR TONER LOW detects toner in accordance with toner presence/absence timing control, the No Toner Warning or No Toner Error will be cancelled. However, in this case, the printer continues to recognize this as a No Toner condition. When the SENSOR TONER LOW detects the presence of toner three times in a row while toner is dispensing, the printer will revert to the Toner Present condition.
2.8.7 Toner Control

Installation of the toner bottle is detected by the SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL12.2.10), and the presence/absence of toner in the bottle is detected by the SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9). There is a set of these sensors for each color, and each functions separately.
2.8.7.1 About SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9)

A SENSOR TONER LOW is installed for each color, but the printer cannot monitor each color at the same time, so checking is done one at a time. Checking of each color takes 3.5 seconds, so the total time for all four colors is 14 seconds. A single check for toner presence/absence of all four colors takes 14 seconds. The SENSOR TONER LOW is installed in the HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5~8), and it detects presence/absence of dispensed toner inside the HOLDER ASSY as it is transported from the toner bottle by the Toner Motor. Because material sticking to the SENSOR TONER LOW surface can cause it to malfunction, it is cleaned by an installed film inside the HOLDER ASSY near the Auger when toner is being dispensed. This film rotates with the Auger when toner is dispensed, cleaning toner from the surface of SENSOR TONER LOW. When the Toner Motor is stopped, however, the film may be positioned in such a way that toner presence may be judged even though there is no toner and toner absence may be judged when there is actually toner available. This misjudgment is avoided by the control functions inside the printer.
2.8.7.2 Toner Presence/Absence Control

An overview of Toner Presence/Absence Control is shown below. 1) Activation Timing Whenever the power is turned on or the front cover is closed Every 14 seconds 2) Output of No Toner Warning The No Toner Warning is output when SENSOR TONER LOW detects the absence of toner twice in a row, provided that the Toner Dispense was active between those two detections.
Control
2-104
Revision D
intervals are opened after a set number of pages, and because the number of pages output in one minute is reduced, this method is called PPM DOWN. PPM DOWN is activated on the basis of paper size or paper class.
2.8.8 Fuser Control

2.8.8.1 Fuser Temperature Control
A target temperature is set, and the Fuser Temperature Control turns ON/OFF the HEATER LAMP to constantly keep the temperature of the HEAT ROLL surface at the target temperature. The temperature of the HEAT ROLL surface is detected by the TEMP SENSOR. The TEMP SENSOR detects the temperature for a period of 40ms, activated alternately with disconnection that is controlled by observance of the resistance value. In this way, the temperature detection cycle is 80ms, and when the temperature is found to be above the target temperature, the HEATER LAMP is turned OFF, and when the temperature is found to be below the target temperature, the HEATER LAMP is turned ON. The set temperature targets are different according printer status, such as when it is inactive, printing, or executing the print process. In addition, the target temperature changes according to the internal printer temperature detected by SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) (temperature and humidity sensor), by the print volume, by the Print Mode, and by the power source input voltage.
2.8.8.2 COOL DOWN

When printing jobs are intermittent, heat distribution on the HEAT ROLL becomes uneven because of paper conveyance and paper stopping components. To keep the HEAT ROLL temperature as even as possible, HEATER LAMP activation wait times are established. This is the COOL DOWN function. COOL DOWN is only activated during a series of pages printed in a certain class/size or for an amount of time determined by the number of pages printed in the series when such a print job has been completed. In addition, COOL DOWN will activate midway through a print job of several hundred pages even when the paper class/size is changed. PPM DOWN (Pages Per Minute Down) is a simplification of COOL DOWN. This technique also seeks to improve even temperature distribution on the HEAT ROLL, and it accomplishes this by establishing non-loaded rotation time for the FUSER when paper is not being conveyed between prints. When a series print job at a certain paper class/size is being done, page
Control
2-105
Revision D
2.9 Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder)
The following sections describes Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit.
2.10 Drive Transmission Path

2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER
Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER is transferred through the flow shown below. NOTE: On the following pages, Tray 1 refers to the paper tray in the bottom of the printer, Tray 2 refers to the lower tray of the OPTION FEEDER and Tray 3 refers to the upper tray of the OPTION FEEDER.
Figure 2-37. DRIVE ASSY FEEDER
Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder)
2-106
Revision D
2.10.2 Gear Layout
Figure 2-38. Gear Layout
2-107
Revision D
2.11 Paper Feed

2.11.1 Paper Feed Path
When the OPTION FEEDER is attached, paper is supplied in the following order.
2.11.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram
Figure 2-39. Paper Feed Path Diagram
Paper Feed
2-108
Revision D
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) (PL17.3.3) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 3) (PL17.3.3) When the SOLENOID FEED moves, force from the SPRING FEED (PL17.3.9, PL17.3.10) causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED (PL4.3.14) to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by receiving driving force from the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER, and the ROLL ASSY (PL17.3.25) feeds a sheet of paper from the tray. A notch in the GEAR FEED causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED to disengage after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force and stopping rotation of the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of paper is fed at a time. ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.20) ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.20) ROLL ASSY TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE ASSY FEEDER through CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 and conveys the paper fed from the tray to the Tray 1.
2.12 Functions of Main Components

The main components that make up this device will be explained with corresponding illustrations. Components are divided into blocks according to the structure of the printer. Two Tray Module II/III Two Tray Module IV
2.12.1 Two Tray Module II/III (PL17.2 ~ 3)

SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2) (PL17.2.7) SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3) (PL17.2.7) SWITCH ASSY SIZE detects the presence/absence of the tray and the size of the paper. SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) (No Paper Sensor) (PL17.3.4) SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) (No Paper Sensor) (PL17.3.4) Detects the presence/absence of paper inside the tray by change in the actuator position. (No paper: sensor blocked) SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2) (PL17.3.17) SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3) (PL17.3.17) The ROLL FEED ASSY (PL17.3.3) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled by the GEAR FEED (PL17.3.11, PL17.3.12) rotation. CLUCH ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.18) CLUCH ASSY TURN (Tray 3) (PL17.3.18) Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL17.1.2) is transferred to the ROLL ASSY TURN .
2-109
Revision D
Figure 2-40. Two Tray Module II/III
2-110
Revision D
2.12.2 Two Tray Module IV (PL17.4)

SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) (Low Paper Sensor) (PL17.4.7) SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3) (Low Paper Sensor) (PL17.4.7) The actuator lowers according to the level of paper in the tray. When the actuator descends to a certain level, the sensor becomes shaded, thereby allowing detection of the low quantity of paper. The actuator position can be seen from the front of the tray, allowing a rough estimate of remaining paper. PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) Controls the paper supply operation for the PAPER FEEDER of each tray based on communications with PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and input from the sensors/switches. The following features are included: PWBA MCU & HVPS communications Reception of input from sensors/switches Control of DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5), each solenoid and each clutch Control of paper supply operation Distribution of low voltage DC power to each component from the printer power supply. DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5) Supplies drive to the PAPER FEEDER of each tray.
Figure 2-41. Two Tray Module IV
2-111
Revision D
2.13 Switches and Sensors

Switches and sensors installed on the AcuLaser C4000 Base Engine are shown in the diagrams below. For the function of each component, see Section 2.5 Functions of Main Components.
Figure 2-42. Switches and Sensors
Switches and Sensors
2-112
Revision D
The following figure shows C470 MAIN circuit board components.
2.14 Controller Operating Principles

This section describes C470MAIN board which is the main controller of AcuLaser C4000. The following describes controller features of the AcuLaser C4000. CPU High-speed controller with a new CPU adopted 64-bit RISC CPU Power PC 750CX 400MHz 64-bit high-speed memory PC100 SDRAM DIMM 64MB of standard RAM. The memory can be expanded up to 1GB. ASIC Enhanced ASIC is equipped. (VIP2, CDMC) The color management technologies is incorporated into the hardware to achieve high-speed processing. Interface Parallel Interface Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10Base-T) USB 1.1 Type-B Slot (Optional interface) HDD HDD can be installed. The following additional functions will become available, upon installation of the optional HDD unit: Storing of print jobs and printing (Reserve Job, Confidential Job) Storing and printing of Form Overlays Increasing the size of the I/F receiving buffer Installation of fonts under PostScript 3 mode NOTE: The Form Over function is available only in Windows. Furthermore, it is not available when in PostScript3 mode. NOTE: Only the Ethernet I/F receiving buffer may be increased in size.
Figure 2-43. C470 Main Circuit Board Components
Controller Operating Principles
2-113

The following figure shows C470 Main Circuit Board Diagrams.
Revision D
Figure 2-44. C470 Main Circuit Board Diagrams
2-114

The following table shows C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components.
Revision D Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components

Name
Location
Model Number / Function E05B93BA / 352BGA Power supply voltage: 2.5V, 3.3V Manufactured by NEC This ASIC has the following functions: 1. Half Tone Gradation Control ASIC 2. Managing a data processing at CPGI and CRIT control C309PROG / Slot P IC3: Program, 16Mbit Flash PROM IC4: Program, 16Mbit Flash PROM IC1: Font, 16Mbit Mask ROM IC2: Font, 16Mbit Mask ROM Slot A Empty slot for option Slot S0 64Mbyte (Standard) 168pin Slot S1 168pin Empty slot for additional Max. 1Gbyte
Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components

Name 64bit RISC CPU
Location
Model Number / Function IBM25PPC750CX-DP20-3T / PowerPC 750CX 400MHz Manufactured by IBM E05B92NA / 480pin Manufactured by Toshiba This ASIC has the following functions: 1. Memory Control ASIC (relation to RAM/ ROM) 2. ACC (Image Accelerator) function supports the following processings: CCTL (color control) CCNV (color conversion) CCMP (color compression) With a built-in SRAM (data processing exclusive work area) E05B72BA / BGA-313pin, 2.54mm pich, Staggered, Full glid Power supply voltage: 3.3V, 5V Manufactured by NEC This ASIC has the following functions: 1. I/O Control ASIC (manages the following I/F) Parallel I/F USB I/F Engine I/F (connection to the Mechanical Controller) Control Panel I/F 2. Other Functions Interrupt Control DMA Control (11ch) Timer VIP2 IC601
IC102
ASIC
CDMC
IC101
ROM DIMM
CODE DIMM
CN300
OPTION
CN301
Standard SDRAM Additional
CN200
CN201
DIOC
IC402
2-115
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components
Name
Location
Revision D
Model Number / Function M51953BFP / 8SOP 340mS 4.25V SCGPWM4B / 1. IC for pulse width modulation for connection between the VIP2 and the Engine (Mechanical Controller) 2. A pulse width modulation based on Video Data generated by VIP2 AT25128 / 2MHz 128kbit
Reset IC
IC502
PWM
IC600
EEPROM
IC401
2-116
CHAPTER
TROUBLESHOOTING
Revision D
3.1 Overview
After confirming the problem and carrying out preliminary checks, you should take advantage of FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure), and the information in Chapter 2: OPERATING PRINCIPLE and Chapter 7: APPENDIX to troubleshoot efficiently.
3.1.2 Preliminary Checks

Check the following before troubleshooting: 1. 2. Make sure that the power source voltage is within the specifications. (Measure the voltage at the electrical outlet.) Make sure that the power cord (PL15.1.9) is not damaged, shorted or disconnected, and that there are no incorrect connections inside the power cord. Make sure that the printer is properly grounded. Avoid setting up the printer in places that are exposed to high temperatures, excessive humidity, low temperatures, low humidity and sudden changes in temperature. Avoid setting up the printer near water lines, humidifiers, heat-radiating equipment, sources of fire, and in places that are exposed to excessive dust or where it might be directly exposed to air from air conditioners. Avoid setting up the printer in places where volatile or inflammable gases are produced. Avoid setting up the printer in places that are exposed to direct sunlight. The printer should be set up in a well-ventilated area. The printer should be set up on a stable, level surface.
3.1.1 Troubleshooting Procedure

The troubleshooting procedure flow is as follows:
3. 4.
Situation/problem confirmation DIAG Operation Writing Connection Diagram Writing Connection Diagram
5.
Preliminary check
6. 7.
Start
Level 1 FIP
Level 2 FIP
8. 9.
Fault restoration confirmation
10. The paper used in the printer should be within the correct specifications. (Standard-sized paper is recommended.) 11. The printer should be handled correctly as described in the printer documentation. 12. Parts that need to be replaced periodically should be replaced after the prescribed number of pages have been printed.
Preventative maintenance
Complete
Troubleshooting
Overview
3-118
Revision D
5. When carrying out work, you should use a wrist band to ground your body in order to eliminate static electricity from your body.
3.1.3 Precautions When Performing Work

1. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD (PL15.1.9) except when necessary when performing work.
W A R N IN G
When the printer power is turned on, never touch parts that power is being applied to other than when required to as a part of working. The power switch/inlet of the LVPS (PL15.1.10) has power applied even when the printer power is turned off, so never touch these parts at any time.
2.
When carrying out work with the covers off, the interlock and safety switches on and the power turned on, make sure that you disconnect the connector (P/ J151) of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) or remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) to prevent laser radiation from being emitted, particularly when these components are not needed.
W A R N IN G
When carrying out work with the covers off, the interlock and safety switches on and the power turned on, dangerous laser radiation is emitted by the ROS Assy, so always be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J151) of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) or remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) when these components are not needed.
3.
When carrying out work with the left cover removed and the power turned on, make sure that you disconnect the connector (P/J5011) of the HVPS SUB board (PL12.1.9), particularly when this component is not needed.
W A R N IN G
When carrying out work with the left cover removed and the power turned on, a voltage is output from the HVPS SUB board, so make sure that you disconnect the HVPS SUB connector (P/J5011). If FIP requires the HVPS SUB connector (P/J5011) to be connected, never touch the HVPS SUB board and other components that output high voltages.
4.
Be careful to avoid harmful burns when touching parts that may be hot.
Troubleshooting
Overview
3-119
Revision D
3.1.4 Test print by engine itself

Overview
This printer can perform test print as a operation check by engine itself. The printer prints a test print pattern with built-in engine function.
Test Print Method

1. 2. Remove the PWB Controller. (Refer to Chapter 4.2.19 "CONTROLLER BOARD".) Put standard A4 paper in Tray 1 and turn the power ON.
C A U T IO N
Figure 3-1. Test Print Procedure Test Print Patterns

The test print pattern is printed at 600 dpi in a stair step pattern generated at horizontal and vertical intervals of 128 dots for each of the black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y) colors, in that order. NOTE: The lines printed in vertical direction (paper feeding direction) becomes notched with this pattern. (This is not an irregularity with the print out.)
While performing the following step, absolutely DO NOT touch electrified or moving components.
3.
Short circuit the 2 pins of the test print connector (P31) on the PWBA MCU & HVPS. The location of the test print connector is shown in Figure 3-1.
NOTE: Use some conductive object; like a tip of screwdriber to shortcircuit the pins. 4. After the printer has switch to READY Mode, start the print operation. (A double-sided print operation will be performed.)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 2.7.2 "Operation Mode" about READY Mode. 5. To stop the print operation, remove the conductive object from the pins.
NOTE: Tray 1 is set as the paper supply, so if there is no paper in Tray 1, the print operation cannot be performed. NOTE: If the printer is in error state after power on, the print operation will not start.
Figure 3-2. Test Print Pattern
Troubleshooting
Overview
3-120
Revision D
10. When measuring voltages inside the FIP, the minus-side P/J3-4 at the rear is always set to SG (signal ground) or RTN (return). Because of this, after checking that both the SG and RTN lines are conducting correctly, the rear mines-side can be connected to some other SG and RTN terminals instead of the P/J3-4 connector. However, SG and RTN are not always necessarily at the same level, so be careful not to connect them incorrectly.
11. The special tool should be use to measure voltage for compact connectors. The tip of the tool is sharp, and so it should be handled with care.
3.1.5 Precautions When Using FIP

1. When carrying out troubleshooting for the FIP, it is assumed that the PWB Controller is functioning normally, so if the problems cannot be fixed by carrying out troubleshooting, try replacing the printer controller with a normal part. If the problems cannot be fixed by carrying out troubleshooting using the 3.3.4 Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP, check the symptoms while replacing parts in the order given in "Related Parts". When using the FIP to carry out troubleshooting, there are times when parts such as the PWBA MCU & HVPS and PHD Assy that are known to be working normally are required in order to identify causes of problems, and so such parts should be made ready beforehand. The "Initial Check" function of the FIP should be used to make basic level checks. The "Initial Check" function of the FIP should be used to check structural parts and parts related to the main parts to be checked, as well as the main parts themselves. Always disconnect the power cord when carrying out work, unless there is a reason for it to be connected. Furthermore, when the power cord is connected, never touch parts that power is being applied to other than when required to as a part of working. The following indications are used for connectors. P/J12 P12 J12
8.
2.
3.
12. When measuring voltages, install the PHD Assy, fuser Assy, BTR Assy and paper tray and close the front head cover Assy when turning on the power, unless specifically instructed otherwise. 13. The numeric values inside the FIP are intended as a guide only. Actual values can be considered satisfactory if they approximate these values. 14. There are no specific procedures for parts that must be removed or operations that must be carried out in order to carry out checks specified in the FIP.
15. The "Replace" section of the FIP indicates parts that are considered to be the source of the problem, and indicate that the part itself or the Assy which contains this part should be replaced in order to check the problem.
4. 5.
6.
16. In the FIP, paper supply from the paper tray at the bottom of the unit is indicated as "Tray 1", the first tray of the optional paper feed unit is "Tray 2" and the second tray is "Tray 3". 17. The FIP is divided into different sections based on specifications. Checking of problems should be carried out in accordance with the procedures given in these sections.
18. The instruction sections provided with optional units contain procedures for troubleshooting these units.
7.
: Connector P/J12 when it is connected : Plug side of connector P/J12 when the connector is disconnected (except when connected directly to circuit board) : Jack side of connector P/J12 when the connector is disconnected (except when connected directly to circuit board)
With the P/J1-2 <=> P/J3-4 connection inside the FIP, the plus side of the measuring instrument should be connected to terminal 2 of P/J1 and the minus side should be connected to terminal 4 of P/J3 when measurement is carried out.
9.
With the P/J1 <=> P/J2 connection inside the FIP, all corresponding terminals between P/J1 and P/J2 should be measured, while referring to the connection layout diagram.
Troubleshooting
Overview
3-121
Revision D
3.2 Level 1 FIP

The Level 1 FIP is the first step to take in diagnosing problems. The Level 1 FIP involves identifying error codes and other trouble symptoms, and is intended as a guide for proceeding to the troubleshooting procedures in Level 2.
3.2.1 Level 1 FIP Flowchart

Ask operator about trouble symptoms. Is the operator operating the unit correctly? Y N
Is an error code displayed? Y N
Explain the correct operating method.
Is there an image quality problem? Y N
Image quality FIP
Does an error or jam occur when printing in the problem mode? Y N
Level 2 FIP
Level 2 FIP
Other FIP
Troubleshooting
Level 1 FIP
3-122
Revision D
3.3 Level 2 FIP

3.3.1 Level 2 FIP
The Level 2 FIP includes the procedures for diagnosing problems by classifying them according to error codes and other trouble symptoms. The method of problem diagnosis allow the causes of problems to be located quickly by following the procedures indicated in the FIP or the checking procedures.
Face-down Tray
Cover A MP Tray LC1 C LC2 LC3 Power Switch Cover B
3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message

This printer is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If the printer detects an error, it indicates the error information with the LED lamps on the LCD panel. Types of error occur to a page printer vary widely, such as poor print quality or abnormal operation, and it makes identification of failed part and component more difficult. For easy and efficient repair, this section describes troubleshooting procedures using LCD messages and typical types of abnormal output. The following tables list the LCD messages. As for the units used for the messages and the cover positions, see Table 3-1. Figure 3-3 shows the locations of the components and covers referred to in the messages.
Photoconductor Unit Fuser Unit Transfer Unit
Top Cover
Toner Cartridge
Cover D
Figure 3-3. Locations of Units/Covers
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-123
Revision D Table 3-1. Printer Messages

LED Message uuuu Toner Out Replace Photocondctr Replace TransferUnit Printer Open Install LC1 Install LC2 Manual Feed sss Cant Print Duplex Paper Out ttt sss Paper Set ttt sss Print Overrun Mem Overflow Duplex Mem Overflow Invalid HDD Invalid PS3 Invalid IPDS Invalid AUX I/F Card Invalid ROM A Invalid ROM B Write Error ROM A Write Error ROM P Reset to Save Writing ROM A 4049 ~ 4063 4022 4221 4222 4228 4032 Page 127 Page 128 Page 128 Page 128 Page 128 Page 129 Writing ROM P Menus Locked (Panel setting display) Hard Disk full Reserve Job Canceled PS3 Hard Disk full Warning Warning Warning 2569 2565 2561 Error 4065 ~ 4079 4028 4224 4002 4007 4007 1013 3005 4010 3003 3000 3001 3004 4202 4201 4232 4014 4003 4003 4006 4006 1005 1005 1001 Page 129 Page 129 Page 129 Page 130 Page 130 Page 130 Page 130 Error Error Error Error Error Error (sss: See *3) Error Error (ttt: See *2, sss: See *4) Error (ttt: See *2, sss: See *4) Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error status status status Warning Category Status code Refer to:
3.3.2.1 List of Printer Messages

The table below shows the list of printer message of AcuLaser C4000. Each message is the one when Lang = English is set.
Table 3-1. Printer Messages

LED Message (Display when Power is Turned On) Service Req Cffff Service Req Eggg HDD Format ***% Optional RAM Error ROM CHECK RAM CHECK HDD CHECK Self Test Reset All Reset Cancel All Print Job Cancel Print Job Unable Clear Error Check Transparency Jam xxxx Face-down Full uuuu Toner Cart Out Install Photocondctr Install Fuser Install TransferUnit Clear Sensor Wrong Photoconductor status Service call error Service call error (Eggg: See *1) status Error status status status status status status status status status Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 6000 6001 ~ 6999 1004 1004 1003 1003 4021 4008, 4009, 4017, 4012 4090 Category Status code Refer to: Page 126 Page 126 Page 127 Page 127
(uuuu = CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed)
(uuuu = CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-124
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 3-1. Printer Messages

LED Message Form Data Canceled Collate was disabled Check Paper Size Image Optimum Check Paper Type Need Memory Format Error ROM A Form Feed (Display in test printing) Calibrating Printer Offline Cancel Print Job uuuu Toner Low Worn Photoconductor Worn Fuser Worn TransferUnit Standby Ready (Printing) (Communication to non-active I/F) (executing of Job (possible to print)) status status status (Job cancel by host) Warning 2017 ~ 2031 2010 2562 2563 1007 1000 1009 1012 1002 Warning Warning Warning status status status status status Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning status Category Status code 2570 2013 2004 2002 2008 2003 2000 1008 1010 1014 1001 1003 Refer to: Page 132 Page 126 Page 131 Page 131 Page 132 Page 132 Note *1: *2: *3: *4: See Section 3.3.3 "Service Call Error Messages".
Revision D
The relevant values among the Values of Paper Source in the panel setting except for Auto are displayed. The relevant values among the Values for Paper Size in the panel setting are displayed. The relevant values among the Values for each paper feed Size in the Tray Menu in the panel setting are displayed.
(uuuu=CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed)
C H E C K P O IN T
The Printer Message list are described in the order or descending priorities (the top item is the highest on the list or priorities).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-125
Revision D
3.3.2.2 Details of Status Message and Treatment

This section describes the status messages specific to AcuLaser C4000. NOTE: READY message means that the printer performs printing as soon as the READY message is displayed during the message shown.
3.3.2.3 Details of Error Message and Treatment

This section describes the error messages specific to AcuLaser C4000.
Optional RAM Error

Description Read/Write error occurs when checking optional RAM at power on testing. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Power off and remove the optional RAM DIMM then power on. This error will occur that RAM access time is slower than the specification time or RAM DIMM is broken.
Calibrating Printer
Description This is one of the READY messages. The engine is under adjustment. At the following timing, the engine is automatically calibrated. When turning the printer on Adjusting print quality LED The Error LED is off and the LCD display blinks. Treatment Wait for about 10 seconds to three minutes (TBD) and the printer will automatically resume. While calibrating, do not open any printer cover and do not turn the printer off.
Check Transparency
Description Paper apart from an OHP sheet is fed when OHP sheet is set to the Paper Type setting. Or, an OHP sheet s fed although OHP has not been selected in the Paper Type setting. A paper jam occurs in the Reg (paper feeding) area. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Remove set papers on MP tray then remove jammed paper from MP tray side. Open and close Cover A. Set the correct papers then the jammed print data will be print. Reference FIP FIP-9
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-126
Revision D
Jam xxxx
Description A paper jam has occurred at the location indicated in X.
Engine Status Fuser Jam X (A B) --------X (A B) --Reg Jam --X (A) ----X (A) ----Feed Jam ----X (A C) ----X (A C) X (A C) Duplex Jam ------X (B) X (B) --X (B) Jam xxxx AB A AC B AB ABC ABC Status 4012 4008 4009 4017 4012 4009 4009
uuuu Toner Cart Out

Description One of the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges is not installed. The uuuu display corresponds to the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges, and indicates the cartridge that is not installed. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment By opening the top cover and setting the displayed toner cartridge, the error is released. Reference FIP FIP-1 ~ 4
Face-down Full
Description When the printer ejects paper into the Face -down tray that has been full, printing stops. Paper that is being ejected just after the Face Down Full error occurs, the paper is ejected as it is. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED shows Blink 2. Treatment Remove paper in the Face -down tray and press the Start/Stop button to resume printing. Reference FIP FIP-41
NOTE: In some cases, a Jam occurs two locations at most simultaneously. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Jam A B: Open the Cover A and B and remove jammed paper (Fuser Jam). Jam A: Open the Cover A and remove jammed paper (Reg Jam). Open the Cover D, and detach the Photoconductor Unit to remove the paper if needed. Jam A C: Open the Cover A and the cassette C and remove jammed paper (Feed Jam). Jam B: Open the Cover B and remove jammed paper (Duplex Jam). Jam A B C: Open the Cover A and the cassette C and remove jammed paper (Feed Jam). When Fuser Jam or Duplex Jam is occurred, handle same as above Fuser Jam or Duplex Jam. Reference FIP FIP-10 ~ 13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-127
Revision D
Install Photocondctr
Description The Photoconductor Unit is not installed or is not set correctly. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Open the Cover A and then open the Cover D. Install the Photoconductor Unit. Closing the Cover D and A release the error automatically. Reference FIP FIP-5
Install TransferUnit
Description The Transfer Unit is not installed. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Opening the Cover A and closing it after installing the Transfer Unit releases the error automatically. Reference FIP FIP-6
Install Fuser
Description The Fuser U nit is not installed, or is not set correctly. Or the Fuser Unit is broken. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Turn the printer off, open the Cover A, then open the Cover D. Close the Cover A, open the Cover B, and install the Fuser Unit correctly. Close the Cover D and close the Cover B at the end. When Install Fuser massage is displayed in spite of above operation, the Fuser Unit is broken. Change to new Fuser Unit. Reference FIP FIP-7
Clean Sensor
Description The sensor window for calibrating the engine is soiled. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Open the Cover A, remove the Transfer Unit, and clean up the transparent plastic window on the backside. After that, set the Transfer Unit and close the Cover A to release the error automatically. Reference FIP FIP-29, 37
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-128
Revision D
Wrong Photoconductor
Description The appropriate Photoconductor Unit is not installed. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment By opening the Cover A and D to install the appropriate Photoconductor Unit and closing the covers, the error is automatically released. Reference FIP FIP-8
Replace Photocondctr
Description Printing stops since this error cause damages to the engine. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. PHD Life Over2 of the engine status STSLIFE2 is activated. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Open the Cover A, and then open the Cover D. Replace the Photoconductor Unit with a new one. Closing the Cover D and A automatically releases the error. Reference FIP FIP-26, 46
uuuu Toner Out

Description The printer detects that a toner is empty according to the Toner End sensor and the toner's Dispense Time of each color of the engine, and printing stops. Printing in the Toner End status cannot provide proper color expression, therefore the error cannot be released by pressing the Start/Stop button. The uuuu shows CMYK corresponding to the each C, M, Y, K toner cartridge, indicating only the toner cartridge detected that it contains no remaining toner. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Replace toner Cartridge. Reference FIP FIP-22 ~ 25, 42 ~ 45
Replace TransferUnit
Description The Transfer Unit's life cycle has ended. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. Since the number of printed copies or Dispense Time after turning the Waste Toner sensor of the engine on has reached to the setting value, the printer detects that the life cycle of the Transfer Unit ends, and then printing stops. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment By opening the Cover A, replacing the used Transfer Unit with a new Transfer Unit, and closing the Cover A, the error is automatically released. Reference FIP FIP-27, 46
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-129
Revision D
Printer Open
Description One of the Cover A, Cover B, and Cover D is open. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Closing all the Covers (Cover A, Cover B, and Cover D) releases the error. Reference FIP FIP-30
Paper Out ttt sss

Description 1: There is no paper loaded in the selected paper source sss. 2: Paper is set in none of the paper sources. ttt shows the paper size selected for the paper source sss. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment 1: Load the correct size of paper ttt in the paper source sss to clear the error. 2: Load the correct size of paper in any of the paper sources to clear the error. Reference FIP FIP-39
Install LC1, Install LC2

Description Since the Cassette 1 and/or 2 is/are not installed correctly, printing is impossible using the Cassette 2 or 3. NOTE: When "Auto" is selected for the Paper Source setting, the error "Paper Set" or "Paper Out" appears. LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. Treatment Installing the cassette s correctly releases the error. Reference FIP FIP-40
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-130
Revision D
3.3.2.4 Details of Warning Message and Treatment

This section describes the warning messages specific to AcuLaser C4000. NOTE: Warning displays do not change any LED lighting.
Worn Photoconductor
Description This warning informs the user that the Photoconductor Unit has reached the end of its life cycle. The printing quality after that this message appears is not guaranteed. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. This warning occurs when PHD Life Over of the engine status STSLIFE is activated. Treatment The Photoconductor Unit can be used until the Replace Photocondctr error appears, however the printing quality after that the Worn Photoconductor message appears is not guaranteed. This warning display is released by performing any one of the following methods. Execute Clear Warning of the Reset Menu. Execute Reset of the Reset Menu. Replace the Photoconductor Unit with a new one. Reference FIP FIP-35
uuuu Toner Low

Description This warning notifies the user that the remaining toner level of each color (C, M, Y, K) is low. The remaining toner value for each color is calculated according to the engines remaining toner sensor, and this message is displayed when the remaining toner is approximately 10% or. The u u u u indicates CMYK, which correspond to the C, M, Y and K toner cartridges, and displays only the toner cartridges detected that the remaining toner is low. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. This warning occurs for the C, M, Y, K toners Dispense Time comes 90% of toner cartridge life cycle or Toner Near Empty bit of the engine status (STSWRN), whichever comes first. Treatment This warning display is released by performing any one of the following methods. Execute Clear Warning of the Reset Menu. Execute Reset of the Reset Menu. NOTE: Be sure to open to an user. The cartridge still has some toner until uuuu Toner Out appears. Be sure not to replace the toner cartridge with a new one, or the remaining toner may pour over. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. If the toner cartridge is replaced before uuuu Toner Out occurs, the engine does not detect the new cartridge correctly in some cases. Reference FIP FIP-31 ~ 34
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-131

Execute Reset of the Reset Menu. Replace the Transfer Unit with a new one. Reference FIP FIP-36
Revision D
Worn Fuser
Description This warning message informs the user that the Fuser Unit has reached the end of its life cycle. The printing quality after that this message appears is not guaranteed. Treatment NOTE: Be sure to open to an user. Replace the Fuser Unit promptly. This warning display is released by performing any one of the following methods. Execute Clear Warning of the Reset Menu. Execute Reset of the Reset Menu. Reference FIP FIP-28
Form Data Canceled (Warning)

Description This warning occurs when form data cannot be registered. The form data are not registered but discarded. Treatment Cause and Treatment 1: The number of registered form data have reached the maximum number allowed to be registered. Delete a registered form. 2: The free space of the HDD for registration is insufficient. Delete the registered forms until an adequate free space for registering the target form is reserved. 3: A HDD does not exist. Install a HDD.
Worn Transfer Unit

Description This warning message informs the user that the Transfer Unit has almost reached the end of its life cycle. Be aware that performing printing an image data that exceeds the specified paper size shortens the Transfer Units' life cycle. Reason: The amount of wasted toner increases. NOTE: Do not open to an user this. This message appears when the remaining life is 5% e or less, or when the Waste Toner Box sensor is On. Treatment This warning display is released by performing any one of the following methods. Execute Warning Clear of the Reset Menu.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-132
Revision D
3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages

See the following tables for the detailed information on the Service-Call Error messages.
Controller Related Service-Call Error Table 3-3. List of Service-Call Errors (Controller Related)
Error Category C or D Error Code ffff 0017 0088 0089 0091 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 0800 0998 0999 1002 1010 Explanation CPU error (Interrupt exception) CPU error (System call exception) CPU error (Break point exception) CPU error (Disabled floating-point exception) CPU error (Reserved (undefined) exception) CPU error (Machine check exception) CPU error (Data access exception) CPU error (Instruction access exception) CPU error (Alignment exception) CPU error (Program exception) CPU error (Trace exception) CPU error (Performance monitor exception) CPU error (System administration interrupt exception) CPU error (Temperature management interrupt exception) IPL error (Controller defective) Engine communication error (Only when powering on) No Engine Flash ROM program data Standard RAM error (When the standard size is not determined, etc.) Verify error Reference FIP FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-48 FIP-16 FIP-16 FIP-50 FIP-49
Engine Related Service-Call Error Table 3-2. List of Service-Call Errors (Engine Related)
Error Category E E E E E E E E E Error Code ffff 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 998 ROS failure Fuser error NV-RAM error CTD sensor error Fan motor error Low density error Firmware error Environment sensor error Engine communication error Explanation Reference FIP FIP-14 FIP-15 FIP-16 FIP-17 FIP-18 FIP-19 FIP-20 FIP-21 FIP-48
C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-133
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 3-3. List of Service-Call Errors (Controller Related)
Error Category C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D C or D Error Code ffff 1020 1021 1100 1101 1120 1121 1122 1123 1180 1185 1200 1210 1400 1500 1550 1600 1700 1800 1999 2000 Explanation RAM error (Slot 0) RAM error (Slot 1) ROM checksum error (bit 0 ~ 15) (Font) ROM checksum error (bit 16 ~31) (Font) ROM checksum error (bit 0 ~ 7) (Program) ROM checksum error (bit 8 ~ 15) (Program) ROM checksum error (bit 16 ~ 23) (Program) ROM checksum error (bit 24 ~ 31) (Program) Optional ROM module A checksum error Unsupported ROM module EEPROM write error EEPROM write count limit Engine initialization malfunction CCNV hardware error Compression SRAM initialization hardware error Video related hardware error (including PWM IC calibration error) Built-in network hardware error DIMM SPD error Other hardware error Software error Reference FIP FIP-50 FIP-50 FIP-51 FIP-51 FIP-52 FIP-52 FIP-52 FIP-52 FIP-53 FIP-53 FIP-54 FIP-54 FIP-56 FIP-55 FIP-57 FIP-58 FIP-59 FIP-60 FIP-56 FIP-56
Revision D
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-134
Revision D
FIP-1 Yellow Toner Cartridge Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Cartridge installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (Y) installation Switch TCRU Assy (Y) actuator installation Switch TCRU Assy (Y) connector installation Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) check Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Is the switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) functioning normally? Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P51-11 <=> P51-12. Is the voltage between P51-11 <=> P51-12 3.3V DC? Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) operation 1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (Y). 2. Check the continuity between J51-11 <=> J51-12. Does J51-11 <=> J51-12 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (Y) is pressed, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (Y). 2. Check the continuity between the following lines. J51-11 <=> J431-2 J51-12 <=> J431-1 Is the continuity between J51 <=> J431 normal? Treatment Yes No
Reinstall applicable parts.
With the tool: Go to step 2. Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Switch TCRU Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6)
Replace the Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-135
Revision D
Step
Check PWB drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive REGI. 2. Check the continuity between P42-4 <=> J51-11. Is the continuity between P42-4 <=> P51-11? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity between J12-27 <=> J42-4. Is the continuity between J12-27 <=> J42-4 normal?
Treatment Yes No Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Go to step 7.
Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-136
Revision D
FIP-2 Magenta Toner Cartridge Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Cartridge installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (M) installation Switch TCRU Assy (M) actuator installation Switch TCRU Assy (M) connector installation Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) check Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Is the switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) functioning normally? Switch TCRU Assy (M) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P51-13 <=> P51-14. Is the voltage between P51-13 <=> P51-14 3.3V DC? Switch TCRU Assy (M) (PL12.2.10) operation 1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (M). 2. Check the continuity between J51-13 <=> J51-14. Does J51-13 <=> J51-14 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (M) is pressed, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (Y). 2. Check the continuity between the following lines. J51-13 <=> J432-2 J51-12 <=> J432-1 Is the continuity between J51 <=> J431? PWB drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P42-5 <=> J51-13. Is the continuity between P42-5 <=> P51-13? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity between J12-26 <=> J42-5. Is the continuity between J12-26 <=> J42-5 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Switch TCRU Assy (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6)
Go to step 7.
Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-137
Revision D
FIP-3 Cyan Toner Cartridge Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Cartridge installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (C) installation Switch TCRU Assy (C) actuator installation Switch TCRU Assy (C) connector installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) check Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Is the switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) functioning normally? Switch TCRU Assy (C) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P51-29 <=> P51-30. Is the voltage between P51-29 <=> P51-30 3.3V DC? Switch TCRU Assy (C) (PL12.2.10) operation 1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (C). 2. Check the continuity between J51-11 <=> J51-12. Does J51-29 <=> J51-30 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (C) is pressed, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (Y). 2. Check the continuity between the following lines. J51-29 <=> J433-2 J51-30 <=> J433-1 Is the continuity between J51 <=> J433 normal? PWB drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P42-6 <=> J51-29. Is the continuity between P42-6 <=> P51-29? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity between J12-25 <=> J42-6. Is the continuity between J12-25 <=> J42-6 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Switch TCRU Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6)
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-138
Revision D
FIP-4 Black Toner Cartridge Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Cartridge installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (K) installation Switch TCRU Assy (K) actuator installation Switch TCRU Assy (K) connector installation Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) check Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Is the switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) functioning normally? Switch TCRU Assy (K) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P51-31 <=> P51-32. Is the voltage between P51-31 <=> P51-32 3.3V DC? Switch TCRU Assy (K) (PL12.2.10) operation 1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (K). 2. Check the continuity between J51-31 <=> J51-32. Does J51-31 <=> J51-32 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (K) is pressed, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (K). 2. Check the continuity between the following lines. J51-31 <=> J434-2 J51-32 <=> J434-1 Is the continuity between J51 <=> J434 normal? PWB drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P42-3 <=> J51-31. Is the continuity between P42-3 <=> P51-31? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity between J12-28 <=> J42-3. Is the continuity between J12-28 <=> J42-3 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Switch TCRU Assy (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6)
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-139
Revision D
FIP-5 PHD Detached

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn on the power. Does an error occur even when a new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the harness Assy CRUM and the harness Assy EEPROM. Is P/J71 connected normally? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) connection check Check the connection of the P/J710 connector for the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) and the harness Assy CRUM. Is P/J710 connected normally? Power supply to PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 2. Measure the voltage between the following lines. P71-3 <=> P71-2 Is there 3.3V DC between P71-3 <=> P71-2? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P71-4 <=> P710-3 P71-5 <=> P710-2 Is the continuity between J71 <=> J710 normal? Power supply to PWB drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector on the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P61-5. Is there 3.3V DC between P61-6 <=> P61-5/7? Check Treatment Yes Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2. No
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 4.
Reconnect or replace the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) or harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Reconnect or replace the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 11.
Replace the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
Go to step 8.
Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-140
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB drive. 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. P61-5 <=> P41-21/22 P61-6 <=> P41-23 Is there continuity between P61 <=> P41? Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-21/22 <=> J11-20/19 J41-23 <=> J11-18 Is the continuity between J41 <=> J11?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
Replace the Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-141
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P71-2 <=> J140-5 P71-3 <=> J140-4 Is the continuity between P71 <=> J140 normal? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM and the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J71-2 <=> J710-5 J71-3 <=> J710-4 Is the continuity between J71 <=> J710 normal? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P71-2 <=> J140-5 P71-3 <=> J140-4 P71-4 <=> J140-3 P71-5 <=> J140-2 Is the continuity between P71 <=> J140 normal?
Treatment Yes No
10
Replace the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
11
Go to step 12.
Replace the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
12
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-142
Revision D
FIP-6 BTR Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) 1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Turn on the power. Does an error occur even when a new BTR Assy is installed? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection 1. Disconnect the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Check the connection of the sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) P/J136 connector. Is P/J136 connected correctly? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) and Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) connection Check the connection of the P/J1361 connector for the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1. Is P/J1361 connected normally? 5V DC power supply to Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) 1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). 2. Measure the voltage between the following lines J136-4 <=> J136-3. Is there 5V DC between J136-4 <=> J136-3? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J1361 connector from the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-4 <=> J1361-2 Is the continuity between J136 <=> J1361 normal? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 5V DC power supply 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Is there 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 4.
Reinstall or replace applicable parts.
Go to step 5.
Reinstall or replace applicable parts.
Go to step 11.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Replace the Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10).
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-143
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24. Is there continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24? Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS P/J11. (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-24 <=> J11-17 J41-22/21 <=> J11-19/20 Is the continuity between J41 <=> J11 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-13 <=> P1361-4 J13-14 <=> P1361-3 Is the continuity between J13 <=> J1361 normal?
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
10
Replace the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-144
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) signal check Is there 0V DC between P/J136-5 <=> P/J136-3? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J1361 relay connector between the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-1 <=> J1361-5 J136-2 <=> J1361-4 J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-5 <=> J1361-1 Is the continuity between P136 <=> J1361 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-12 <=> P1361-5 J13-14 <=> P1361-3 J13-15 <=> P1361-2 J13-16 <=> P1361-1 Is the continuity between J13 <=> J1361 normal?
Treatment Yes Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) Go to step 12. No
11
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-145
Revision D
FIP-7 Fuser Detached

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) check 1. Remove the Fuser Assy (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1). 2. Measure the resistance between P321-A4 <=> P321-A5 Is the resistance 400 between P321-A4 <=> P321-A5? Fuser Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the Fuser Assy with a new part. 2. Turn on the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) connection check 1. Check the connection of the P/J138 relay connector for the Harness Assy FSR2 and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J232-A1 <=> P138-5 J232-A2 <=> P138-4 Is the continuity between J232 <=> J138 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) connection check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1). 2. Measure the voltage between the following lines. J138-1 <=> P13-21 J138-2 <=> P13-20 Is the continuity between J138 <=> J13 normal? Check Treatment Yes Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2. No
Go to step 3.
Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Go to step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Harness Assy FSR2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4)
Replace the Harness Assy Front 1. (PL 15.2.7)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-146
Revision D
FIP-8 CRUM ID Error

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation PWBA CRUM installation inside PHD Assy PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy with a new part. 2. Turn on the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the harness Assy CRUM and the harness Assy EEPROM. Is P/J71 connected normally? Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1) and Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) connection check Check the connection of the P/J710 connector for the Plate Assy dispenser and Harness Assy CRUM. Is P/J710 connected normally? 3.3V DC power supply to PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 2. Measure the voltage between the following lines. P71-3 <=> P71-2 Is there 3.3V DC between P71-3 <=> P71-2? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J710-2 <=> J71-5 J710-3 <=> J71-4 Is the continuity between J710 <=> J71 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Reconnect or replace the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Reconnect or replace the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 11.
Replace the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-147
Revision D
Step
Check 3.3V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-6 <=> J61-5. Is there 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. P41-21/22 <=> P61-5 P41-23 <=> P61-7 Is there continuity between P41 <=> P61?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Go to step 10. J41-21/22 <=> J11-19/20 J41-23 <=> J11-18 Is the continuity between J41 <=> J11? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P140-4 <=> P11-18 P140-5 <=> P11-19/20 Is there continuity in all circuits? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM and the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J710-4 <=> J71-3 J710-5 <=> J71-2 Is the continuity between J710 <=> J71 normal?
10
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-148
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J140-2 <=> J71-5 J140-3 <=> J71-4 Is the continuity between P140 <=> J71 normal? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PHD Assy with a new part. 2. Turn on the power. Does the error still occur?
Treatment Yes No
12
Go to step 13.
Replace the Harness Assy EEPROM.
13
Go to FIP-Noise (Page 5-296).
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-149
Revision D
FIP-9 Media Type Mismatch

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) installation Chute Assy Regi installation Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) check 1. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. 2. Move a normal-sized piece of paper in and out of the sensor range. 3. Move a piece of OHP film in and out of the sensor range. Is the Sensor OHP functioning normally? Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) signal check 1. Remove the Sensor OHP. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.4) 2. Connect the sensor OHP connector. 3. Measure the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3 with that out of the paper is sensor range. Is the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3 0V DC? Check Treatment Yes No With the tool: Go to step 2. Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) signal check 1. Move normal-sized piece of paper into the sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) range. Go to step 5. 2. Measure the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3. Does the voltage change between 0V DC and +3.3V DC between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3? Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J321 connector from the Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16). 2. Disconnect the P/J32 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity between J32-2 <=> J321-2. Is there continuity between J32-2 <=> J321-2? Power supply to Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) Measure the voltage between P/J321-1 <=> P/J321-3. Is the voltage between P/J321-1 <=> P/J321-3 5V DC? Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17) continuity 1. Disconnect P/J32 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Disconnect the P/J321 connector from the Sensor OHP. 3. Check the continuity between J32-3 <=> J321-1. Is there continuity between J32-3 <=> J321-1?
Go to step 6.
Replace the Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17).
Replace the Sensor OHP. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-150
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect P/J11 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. P32-3 <=> P11-17 Is there continuity between P32-3 <=> P11-17? Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-24 <=> J11-18 Is there continuity in all lines between J41 <=> J11? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P41-24 <=> P61-8 Is there continuity in all circuits between P41 <=> P61? Harness Assy LVCN (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following circuit. J165-1 <=> J61-8 Is there continuity in all lines between J165 <=> J61?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
Replace the PWD Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
11
Replace the Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-151
Revision D
FIP-10 Feed Jam

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Paper cassette installation Condition of paper inside cassette Worn or damaged roll or gear inside feeder Paper scraps or foreign particles in paper path Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) installation Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) installation Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from Tray 2 or tray 3? The paper Check the paper in Tray 1 and the Tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12). Is the paper normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) check 1. Insert and remove a piece of paper upward between the Roll Regi Metal (PL10.1.9) and the Roll Regi Rubber (PL10.1.10). 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Is the Sensor Regi functioning normally? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) Harness connection check 1. Remove the Chute Assy Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1) 2. Check the connection of the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) P/J181 connector. Is the continuity between P/J181 normal? 3.3V DC power supply to Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) Measure the voltage between connectors P18-1 <=> P18-2 of the PWBA MCU & HVPS. Is there 3.3V DC between P18-1 <=> P18-2? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to Option Feeder FIP-1 Feed Jam (Page 5-299). Go to step 4.
Go to step 3. Replace the paper and go to step 4. Remove the foreign particles and go to step 5. Problem solved.
Go to step 5. With the tool: Go to step 6. Without the tool: Go to step7.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Reinstall applicable parts
Go to step 12.
Go to step 9.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-152
Revision D
Step
Check 3.3V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-6 <=> J61-5. Is there 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. P61-6 <=> P41-23 P61-5 <=> P41-21/22 Is there continuity between P61-6 <=> P41-23? Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-23 <=> J11-18 J41-22/21 <=> J11-19/20 Is there continuity in all lines? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) harness continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J181 connector from the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.12). 2. Check the continuity for the following. J18-1 <=> J181-3 J18-2 <=> J181-2 J18-3 <=> J181-1 Is the continuity between J181 <=> J18 normal? Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) 1. Replace the Sensor Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.2) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) operation check 1. Print a single page using the paper feed method that is giving the problem. 2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Main is operating. (If it is difficult to tell, carry out the "No" procedure.) Is the Drive Assy Main operating?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
Replace the PWD Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
11
12
Go to step 13.
Replace the Clutch Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
13
Go to step 14.
Problem solved.
14
TRAY1 Go to step 27. MSI Go to step 46.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-153
Revision D
Step
Check Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.10) check 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Drive Assy Main is operating. Is the Drive Assy Main functioning normally? Power supply to Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Disconnect the P/J48 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Close the I/L Switch. 4. Measure the voltage between P48-1 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P48-1 <=> P/J60-2? I/L Switch check 1. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9) 2. Open and close the Cover Assy Front Head (PL1.1.2). 3. Check the operation of the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the I/L Switch being pressed correctly? I/L Switch function check 1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. While pressing and releasing the I/L Switch, check the continuity for the following. P60-1 <=> P41-17/18 P60-2 <=> P41-35 For each circuit, is there continuity when the I/L Switch is pressed and no continuity when it is released? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 24V DC power supply check 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P60-1 <=> P60-2?
Treatment Yes No
15
Go to step 16.
16
Go to step 22.
Go to step 17.
17
Go to step 18.
18
Go to step 19.
19
Go to step 20.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-154
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J63 connector of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J60-1 <=> J63-1 J60-2 <=> J63-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J60 <=> J63? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. Is there continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 5V DC power supply check 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. J61-8 <=> J61-7 (5V DC) J61-6 <=> J61-5 (3.3V DC) Are the voltages between the P/J61 <=> P/J61 terminals at the standard values? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J165 connector of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J61-5 <=> J165-4 J61-6 <=> J165-3 J61-7 <=> J165-2 J61-8 <=> J165-1 Is the continuity between J61 <=> J165 normal? Harness Assy Drive (PL15.2.2) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J11 connector of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-30 <=> J11-11 J41-31 <=> J11-10 J41-33 <=> J11-8 Is there continuity in the J41 <=> J11 lines?
Treatment Yes No
20
Go to step 21.
Replace the Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6)
21
22
Go to step 24.
Go to step 23.
23
24
Go to step 25.
Replace the Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-155
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) 1. Replace the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) operation check 1. Carry out a test print. 2. Check the leading edge of the paper. Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn (PL4.3.21)? Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) operation check 1. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 is operating. Is the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 functioning normally? 24V DC power supply to Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) Measure the voltage between P/J47-13 <=> P/J47-9 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there +24V DC between P/J47-13 <=> P/J47-9? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity check 1. Disconnect P/J47 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J475 connector of the Clutch Assembly Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J47-13 <=> P475-2 J47-14 <=> P475-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J47 <=> P475? PWD Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect P/J47 and P/J60 from the PWB Drive. 2. With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. Is the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1?
Treatment Yes No
25
Go to step 26.
Problem solved.
26
Problem solved.
27
Go to step 35.
28
Check if the clutch is slipping or if the gears are damaged. If parts are damaged, replace appropriate parts.
Go to step 29.
29
Go to step 30.
Go to step 31.
30
Go to step 33.
Replace the Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28).
31
Go to step 32.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-156
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J163 connector of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J60-1 <=> J163-1 J60-2 <=> J163-2 Is there continuity in all lines normal? Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) resistance check 1. Disconnect the P/J475 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1. 2. Measure the resistance between J475-1 <=> J475-2. Is the resistance 200 between J475-1 <=> J475-2? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1). Is the continuity normal between J12-9 <=> J42-22 normal? Solenoid Feed Tray1 (PL.4.3.17) operation check 1. Carry out a test print. 2. Check the operation of the Roll Assy Feed (PL4.3.3) from the rear of the printer. Is the Roll Assy Feed operating? Solenoid Feed Tray1 (PL.4.3.17) check 1. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 is operating. Is the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 functioning normally? 24V DC power supply to Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL.4.3.17) Measure the voltage between P/J47-11 <=> P/J47-9 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 24V DC between P/J47-11 <=> P/J47-9? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J474 connector from the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17). 3. Check the continuity for the following. J47-11 <=> P474-2 J47-12 <=> P474-1 Is there continuity in all lines normal?
Treatment Yes No
32
Go to FIP-DC.
Replace the Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6).
33
Go to step 34.
Replace the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18).
34
Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3). With the tool: Go to step 36. Without the tool: Go to step 37.
35
36
Go to step 37.
37
Go to step 38.
Go to step 39.
38
Go to step 44.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-157
Revision D
Step
Check I/L Switch check 1. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9) 2. Open and close the Cover Assy Front Head (PL1.1.2). 3. Check the operation of the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the I/L Switch being pressed correctly? I/L switch function check 1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. While pressing and releasing the I/L Switch, check the continuity for the following. P60-1 <=> P47-13 P60-2 <=> P41-35 For each circuit, is there continuity when the I/L Switch is pressed and no continuity when it is released? PWB drive (PL15.1.15) 24V DC power supply check 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P60-2. Is there +24V DC between P60-1 <=> P60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J63 connector of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J60-1 <=> J63-1 J60-2 <=> J63-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J60 <=> J63? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. Is there continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1? Solenoid Feed Tray 1(PL.4.3.17) resistance check Disconnect the P/J474 connector from the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17). Is the resistance 100 between J474-1 <=> J474-2? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1). 3. Check the continuity between J12-10 <=> J42-21. Is the continuity between J12-10 <=> J42-21 normal?
Treatment Yes No
39
Go to step 40.
40
Go to step 41.
41
Go to step 42.
42
Go to step 43.
43
Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) Replace the Solenoid FeedTray 1 (PL.4.3.17).
44
Go to step 45.
45
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-158
Revision D
Step
Check Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) operation check 1. Print while feeding paper from the MSI. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Turn (PL5.1.2). Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Turn? Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) check 1. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Clutch Turn MSI is operating. Is the Clutch Turn MSI functioning normally? Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) resistance check 1. Disconnect the P/J19 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Measure the resistance between J19-1 <=> J19-2. Is the resistance 200 between J19-1 <=> J19-2? 24V DC power supply to Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL.11.1.3). 2. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive. 4. Measure the voltage between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20. Is the voltage 24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> P60-2. Is the voltage 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity Is there continuity in all lines? 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-17 <=> J11-24 J41-18 <=> J11-23 J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21 Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) operation check 1. Print while feeding paper from the MSI. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Roll Assy Feed (PL7.1.27). Is the paper fed?
Treatment Yes No With the tool: Go to step 47. Without the tool: Go to step 48.
46
Go to step 52.
47
Check if the clutch is slipping or if the gears are damaged. If parts are damaged, replace appropriate parts.
Go to step 48.
48
Go to step 49.
Replace the Clutch Turn MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.8.4)
49
Go to step 51.
Go to step 50.
50
51
52
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-159
Revision D
Step
Check Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) check 1. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Solenoid Feed MSI is operating. Is the Solenoid Feed MSI functioning normally? Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) resistance check 1. Disconnect the P/J132 connector from the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12) 2. Measure the resistance between J132-1 <=> J132-2. Is the resistance 100 between J132-1 <=> J132-2? Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 2 and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J132-1 <=> J139-11 J132-2 <=> J139-10 Is there continuity between P132 <=> J139? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P139-1 <=> J13-11 P139-2 <=> J13-10 Is there continuity between P13 <=> J139? Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) 24V DC power supply 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL 15.1.15). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20. Is the voltage 24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between connectors P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20 of the PWB Drive. Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20?
Treatment Yes No
53
Go to step 54.
54
Go to step 55.
Replace the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12)
55
Go to step 56.
56
Go to step 57.
57
Go to step 58.
Go to step 59.
58
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-160
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2. Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2?
Treatment Yes No
59
PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Go to step 60.
60
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-161
Revision D
FIP-11 Regi Jam

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Actuator Regi (PL10.1.21) installation Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) installation Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1) installation Is the paper in tray 1/2/3 and the tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) check Use the Sensor Regi diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Regi functioning normally? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) harness connection check 1. Remove the Chute Assy Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1) 2. Check the connection of the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) P/J181 connector. Is the continuity between P/J181 normal? Actuator Regi (PL10.1.21) Operate and release the actuator regi manually and monitor the operation. Does the Actuator Regi move smoothly? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) Harness continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J18 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J181 connector from the PWB Drive (PL10.1.20). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J181-1 <=> J18-3 J181-2 <=> J18-2 J181-3 <=> J18-1 Is the continuity between J181 <=> J18 normal? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Replace the paper and go to step 3. Remove the foreign particles and go to step 4. Problem solved.
Go to step 4. With the tool: Go to step 5. Without the tool: Go to step 6. Go to step 13.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Actuator Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.3)
Go to step 9.
Replace the Chute Assy Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-162
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P18-1. Is there continuity between P11-18 <=> P18-1? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P/J61-5 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J61-6 <=> P/J61-5? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> P/J165-4 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J165-3 <=> P/J165-4? Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) 1. Replace the Sensor Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.2) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) check Use the Clutch Regi diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. The interlock switch should be closed. Is the Clutch Regi functioning normally? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) resistance check Disconnect the J18 connector from the Clutch Regi. Is the resistance 200 between J18-4 <=> J18-5? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) power supply 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the Interlock SW. 3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there +24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20?
Treatment Yes No Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
12
Replace the Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1). With the tool: Go to step 14. Without the tool: Go to step 15.
13
Problem solved.
14
Go to step 19.
Go to step 15.
15
Go to step 16.
16
Go to step 17.
Go to step 20.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-163
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-17/18 <=> J11-24/23 J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21 Is there continuity in all lines? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit 1. Disconnect the P/J18 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity between P11-23/24 <=> P18-4. Is there continuity between P11-23/24 <=> P18-4? Roll Regi Metal (PL10.1.9) and Roll Regi Rubber (PL10.1.10) Manually turn the Roll Regi Metal and Roll Regi Rubber. Do both rollers turn smoothly? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2. Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2?
Treatment Yes No
17
Go to step 18.
18
Go to step 21.
Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Replace the parts that are preventing the rollers from turning.
19
20
PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Go to step 21.
21
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-164
Revision D
FIP-12 Fuser Jam

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Exit actuator installation Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation Chute Assy In (PL2.1.5) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation PHD Assy In (PL11.1.3) installation Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the error still occur even when the new Fuser Assy is installed? Is the paper in tray 1/2/3 and the tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) connector Remove the Fuser Assy (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) and check if there are any broken or bent terminals. Is the Fuser Assy connector bent or damaged? Sensor Exit check Use the Sensor Exit diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Exit functioning normally? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Replace the Fuser Assy (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Go to step 14.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-165
Revision D
Step
Check Power supply to Sensor Exit 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Remove the Sensor Exit from the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 3. Connect the P/J232 of the Sensor Exit connector. 4. Measure the voltage between J232-A5 <=> J232-A4 of the Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) connector. Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J232-A5 <=> J232-A4? Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-17 <=> J138-5 / P138-1 <=> J232-A5 J13-18 <=> J138-4 / P138-2 <=> J232-A4 J13-19 <=> J138-3 / P138-3 <=> J232-A3 Is there continuity in all lines? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P13-17. Is there continuity between P11-18 <=> P/J13-17? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) power supply circuit continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P/J61-5 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J61-6 <=> P/J61-5? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> P/J165-4 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J165-3 <=> P/J165-4?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 14.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
Replace the Harness with no continuity.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
12
Replace PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-166
Revision D
Step
Check Sensor Exit signal check 1. Move a piece of paper into and away from the sensor element of the exit sensor. 2. Measure the voltage between P/J327-3 <=> P/J327-2. Is the voltage between P/J327-3 <=> P/J327-2 0V DC when the paper is in the sensor element, and 3.3V DC when it is away? Harness Assy FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) continuity check 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J138 relay connector between the Harness Assy FSR2 and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J232-A4 <=> P138-2 J232-A3 <=> J138-3 Is the continuity between J232 <=> J138 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-19 <=> J138-3 J13-18 <=> J138-4 Is the continuity between J13 <=> J138 normal? Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) operation check 1. Carry out a test print. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes in between the Heat Roller and Belt Assy. Has the edge of the single printed page passed in between the heat roller and belt Assy? Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) check Use the Drive Assy Fuser diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Drive Assy Fuser functioning normally? Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) power supply 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn ON the I/L Switch. 3. Measure the voltage between P/J52-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive. Is there +24V DC between P/J52-1 <=> P/J60-2?
Treatment Yes No
14
Go to step 15.
Go to step 17.
15
Go to step 16.
Replace the Harness Assy FSR2 (PL 6.1.9).
16
Go to step 17.
Replace the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL 15.2.7).
17
18
Go to step 19.
19
Go to step 22.
Go to step 20.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-167
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the I/L switch. 3. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive. Is there 24V DC between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following. J60-1 <=> J163-1 J60-2 <=> J163-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J60 <=> J163? Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) check 1. Replace the Drive Assy Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4) 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
20
Go to step 21.
21
22
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-168
Revision D
FIP-13 Duplex Jam

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) installation Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) installation Actuator Dup (PL7.1.13) installation Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) installation Is the paper in Tray 1/2/3 and the Tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) check Use the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam) functioning normally? Power supply to Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL.11.1.3). 2. Disconnect the P/J133 connector from the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam). 3. Measure the voltage between J133-3 <=> J133-2. Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J133-3 <=> J232-A4? Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-1 <=> P139-11 / J139-1 <=> J133-3 J13-2 <=> P139-10 / J139-2 <=> J133-2 J13-3 <=> P139-9 / J139-3 <=> J133-1 Is there continuity in all lines? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4. With the tool: Go to step 5. Without the tool: Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-169
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P/J13-1. Is there continuity between P11-18 <=> P13-1? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P/J61-5 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J61-6 <=> P/J61-5? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> P/J165-4 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is there 3.3V DC between P/J165-3 <=> P/J165-4? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) signal check 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Remove the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam), and then reconnect the connector. 3. Move a piece of paper into and away from the sensor element of the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam). 4. Measure the voltage between P/J133-1 <=> P/J133-2. Is the voltage between J133-1 <=> J133-2 0V DC when the paper is inserted, and 3.3V DC when the paper is removed? Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J133 connector from the Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam). 2. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy Front 2. 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J133-1 <=> J139-3 J133-2 <=> J139-2 J133-3 <=> J139-1 Is the continuity between J133 <=> J139 normal?
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
11
12
Go to step 13.
Go to step 15.
13
Go to step 14.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-170
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-1 <=> J139-11 J13-2 <=> J139-10 J13-3 <=> J139-9 Is the continuity between J139 <=> J13 normal? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) check 1. Replace the Sensor Paper. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.2) 2. Carry out duplex printing. Does the error still occur? Exit Roll Turn the Exit Roll of the Fuser Assy (PL.9.1.1) manually. Does the Exit Roller turn smoothly when it is turned manually? Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) operation check Carry out duplex printing. Does the paper turn over when duplex printing is carried out? Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) check 1. Install the PDH Assy. 2. Use the Motor Assy Dup diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Motor Assy Dup functioning normally? Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) power supply 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the I/L Switch. 3. Measure the voltage between P/J50-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive. Is there +24V DC between P/J50-1 <=> P/J60-2? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the I/L switch. 3. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive. Is there 24V DC between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2?
Treatment Yes No
14
Go to step 16.
15
Go to step 16.
End of procedure
16
Go to step 17.
Replace the parts that are preventing the rollers from turning. With the tool: Go to step 18. Without the tool: Go to step 19.
17
Go to step 23.
18
Go to step 22.
Go to step 19.
19
Go to step 20.
20
Go to step 21.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-171
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following. J60-1 <=> J163-1 J60-2 <=> J163-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J60 <=> J163? Harness Assy Dup (PL7.1.23) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J131 connector from the Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J50 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J131-1 <=> J50-6 J131-2 <=> J50-5 J131-3 <=> J50-4 J131-4 <=> J50-3 J131-5 <=> J50-2 J131-6 <=> J50-1 Is the continuity between J131 <=> J50 normal? Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) check 1. Replace the Motor Assy Dup. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.4) 2. Carry out duplex printing. Does the error occur even when the Motor Assy Dup is replaced with a new one?
Treatment Yes No
21
22
Go to step 23.
Replace the Harness Assy Dup (PL 7.1.23).
23
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-172
Revision D
FIP-14 ROS Failure

Step Check Harness Assy ROS (PL15.2.5) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J151 connector from the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J15 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity in all lines between J15 <=>J151. Is the continuity normal between J15 <=> P151? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Install the new PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? LD 5V DC circuit continuity (1) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity between P15-6 <=> P140-1. Is there continuity between P15-6 <=> P140-1? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10), Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. J140-1 <=> P71-6/J71-1 <=> J710-6 J140-6 <=> P71-1/J71-6 <=> J710-1 Is there continuity in all lines? Power supply to 5V DC/24V DC 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Measure the voltages at each terminal of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). P/J41-24 <=> P/J41-21/22 (5V DC) P/J41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20 (24V DC when interlock switch is on) Are the voltages between all terminals at the standard values? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Replace the Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5).
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the harness with no continuity.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-173
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J41-17/18 <=> J11-24/23 J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21 J41-24 <=> J11-17 J41-23 <=> J11-18 J41-21/22 <=> J11-20/19 Is there continuity in all lines? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J15 and P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P11-23/24 <=> P15-4 P11-17 <=> P15-7 <=> P140-6 P/J15-6 <=> P/J1401 Is there continuity in all circuits? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P60-1 <=> P41-17/18 (Press the interlock switch) P61-8 <=> P41-24 Is there continuity in all circuits? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6), Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 and P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J163-1 <=> J60-1 J165-1 <=> J61-8 Is there continuity in all lines?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-174
Revision D
Step
Check ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) 1. Replace the ROS Assy with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) 1. Replace the Conn Assy CRUM MC. 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
10
Go to step 11.
Problem solved.
11
Go to step 12.
Problem solved.
12
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-175
Revision D
FIP-15 Fuser Failure

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) and Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) connector check 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Check if there are any broken or bent terminals in the Fuser Assy and Harness Assy FSR2. Are any of the terminals in the Fuser Assy and Harness Assy FSR2 connectors bent or broken? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) continuity 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J138 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy FSR2. 3. Disconnect the P/J162 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 4. Check the continuity for the following lines. J232-A2 <=> P138-4 J232-A1 <=> P138-5 J232-3 <=> J162-2 J232-1 <=> J162-1 Is there continuity in all lines? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J138-5 <=> J13-17 J138-4 <=> J13-18 Is there continuity in all lines? Check Treatment Yes Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2. No
Go to step 3.
Replace the applicable parts.
Go to step 4.
End of procedure
Go to step 5.
Replace the Harness Assy FSR2 (PL 6.1.9).
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-176
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 3. Check the continuity between J61-4 <=> J165-5. Is there continuity between J61-4 <=> J165-5? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity between J12-20 <=> J42-11. Is there continuity between J12-20 <=> J42-11? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity Check the continuity between P42-11 <=> P61-4 of the PWB Drive. Is there continuity between P42-11 <=> P61-4? LVPS (PL15.1.10) 1. Replace the LVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-177
Revision D
FIP-16 NV-RAM Error

Step Check Turn off the power and turn on the power. Does the problem occur? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Treatment Yes Go to step 2. No Problem solved, or if an error occurs again, go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-178
Revision D
FIP-17 CTD Sensor Error

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) check 1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new BTR Assy is installed? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) continuity check 1. Remove the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Disconnect the P/J1361 replay connector from the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy CTD. 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-1 <=> J1361-5 J136-2 <=> J1361-4 J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-4 <=> J1361-2 J136-5 <=> J1361-1 Is the continuity between J136 <=> J1361 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Remove the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-12 <=> P1361-5 J13-13 <=> P1361-4 J13-14 <=> P1361-3 J13-15 <=> P1361-2 J13-16 <=> P1361-1 Is the continuity between J13 <=> P1361 normal? Treatment Yes Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2. No
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 4.
End of procedure
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-179
Revision D
Step
Check Replace the Sensor Assy ADC (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? 5V DC power supply 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22. Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity between J41-24 <=> J11-17. Is the continuity normal between J41-24 <=> J11-17 normal? Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) 1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Assy ADC is installed? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Is there 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-1 <=> P165-2. Is there 5V DC between P165-1 <=> P165-2.
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
End of procedure
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
End of procedure
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-180
Revision D
FIP-18 Fan Motor Failure

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) installation Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) installation Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) Fail signal Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J42-29 <=> P/J42-14/15 Is there 3.3V DC between P/J42-29 <=> P/J42-14/15? Power supply to Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) Measure the voltage between connectors P/J166-1 <=> P/J166-3 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is the voltage 15V DC or 24V DC between P/J166-1 <=> P/J166-3? Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) 1. Replace the Fan Rear. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) Fail signal Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J42-27 <=> P/J42-14/15 Is there 3.3V DC between P/J42-27 <=> P/J42-14/15? Power supply to Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J50-7 <=> P/J50-9 Is there 24V DC between P/J50-7 <=> P/J50-9? Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) 1. Replace the Fan Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.3) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 4.
Replace the LVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3)
Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
Problem solved.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-181
Revision D
FIP-19 Low Density Error

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation Remaining Toner BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) check 1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new BTR Assy is installed? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check Check the P/J136 connector of the Harness Assy CTD and sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) Is the Harness Assy CTD connected correctly to the Sensor Assy ADC? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). 2. Disconnect the P/J1361 relay connector between the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-1 <=> J1361-5 J136-2 <=> J1361-4 J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-4 <=> J1361-2 J136-5 <=> J1361-1 Is the continuity between J136 <=> J1361 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 4.
End of procedure
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-182
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P1361-1 <=> J13-16 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 P1361-3 <=> J13-14 P1361-4 <=> J13-13 P1361-5 <=> J13-12 Is the continuity between P1361 <=> J13 normal? 5V DC power supply 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22. Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity between J41-24 <=> J11-17. Is the continuity normal between J41-24 <=> J11-17 normal? Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) 1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Assy ADC is installed? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Is there 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-1 <=> P165-2. Is there 5V DC between P165-1 <=> P165-2.
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
End of procedure
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-183
Revision D
FIP-20 Firmware Error

Step 1 Check Does the error occur even when the power is turned Off and back On? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check Check the connection of the P/J144 connector of the PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8). Is P/J144 correctly connected? 3.3V DC power supply to PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) 1. Disconnect the P/J144 connector from the PWB EEPROM. 2. Measure the voltage between J144-2 <=> J144-1. Is there 3.3V DC between J144-2 <=> J144-1? 3.3V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-6 <=> J61-5. Is there 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection 1. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the connection of the P/J140 connector of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Is P/J140 correctly connected? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity 1. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J140-9 <=> J144-2 J140-10 <=> J144-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J140 <=> J144? PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) 1. Replace the PWB EEPROM. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.8) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error code still appear? Go to step 2. Treatment Yes No See if the problem recurs; if it does, go to step 2. Connect P/J144 correctly.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Connect P/J140 correctly.
Go to step 8.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-184
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection 1. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the connection of the P/J140 connector of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Is P/J140 correctly connected? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity 1. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J140-7 <=> J144-4 J140-8 <=> J144-3 Is there continuity in all lines between J140 <=> J144? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Connect P/J140 correctly.
Go to step 10.
10
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-185
Revision D
FIP-21 Environment Sensor Error

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) installation Connector connections 1. Remove the Housing Assy Elec. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1) 2. Check the connection of the P/J24 connector of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) 4. Check the connection of the P/J2361 relay connector between the Harness Assy TMPB (PL15.2.12) and the Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3). 5. Check the connection P/J231 connector of the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). Are the connectors connected correctly? Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) signal check Measure the voltage at the P/J2361 relay connector between the Harness Assy TMPB (PL15.2.12) and the Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3). P/J2361-1 <=> P/J2361-2 (3V DC or 0.1V DC or less) P/J2361-3 <=> P/J2361-2 (2.5V DC or more) Are the voltages between P/J2361 <=> P/J2361 within the ranges? Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) signal check 1. Remove the Sensor Hum Temp. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.5) 2. Connect the P/J231 connector of the Sensor Hum Temp. 3. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. P/J231-4 <=> P/J231-3 (3V DC or 0.1V DC or less) P/J231-2 <=> P/J231-3 (2.5V DC or more) Are the voltages between P/J231 <=> P/J231 within the ranges? Power supply to Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) Measure the voltage between P231-1 <=> P231-3. Is there +5V DC between P/J231-1 <=> P/J231-3? Treatment Yes Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2. No
Go to step 3.
Reconnect the connector or replace the parts.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 4.
Replace the Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3).
Go to step 5.
Replace the Sensor Hum Temp. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.5)
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-186
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3), Harness Assy TMPB (PL15.2.12) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. J24-1 <=> P2361-4/J2361-1 <=> J231-4 J24-2 <=> P2361-3/J2361-2 <=> J231-3 J24-3 <=> P2361-2/J2361-3 <=> J231-2 J24-4 <=> P2361-1/J2361-4 <=> J231-1 Is there continuity in all lines? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 and P/J24 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity between P11-17 <=> P24-4. Is the continuity normal between P11-17 <=> P24-4 normal? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between connectors P41-24 <=> P42-14/15 of the PWB Drive. Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P42-14/15. PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Is there 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7. Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-1 <=> P165-2. Is there 5V DC between P165-1 <=> P165-2.
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
10
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-187
Revision D
FIP-22 Yellow Toner Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (Y) (PL12.1.1) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (Y). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (Y) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (Y). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J441-2 <=> J51-16 J441-3 <=> J51-15 Is the continuity between J441 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-23 <=> J42-8. Is the continuity between J12-23 <=> J42-8 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-188
Revision D
Step
Check Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (Y) of Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn on the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J511-1 <=> J51-5 J511-2 <=> J51-4 J511-3 <=> J51-3 J511-4 <=> J51-2 J511-5 <=> J51-1 Is the continuity between J511 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?
Treatment Yes Check the toner mixing Auger and the Gears for damage. No
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-189
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-25 <=> J41-16 J11-26 <=> J41-15 J11-27 <=> J41-14 J11-28 <=> J41-13 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P163-1 <=> P163-2. Is there 24V DC between P163-1 <=> P163-2?
Treatment Yes Replace the PWB Drive (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5). If this does not solve the problem, replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) No
11
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-190
Revision D
FIP-23 Magenta Toner Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (M) (PL12.1.2) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (M). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (M) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (M). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J442-2 <=> J51-18 J442-3 <=> J51-17 Is the continuity between J442 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-22 <=> J42-9. Is the continuity between J12-22 <=> J42-9 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-191
Revision D
Step
Check Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (M) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn on the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J513-1 <=> J51-10 J513-2 <=> J51-9 J513-3 <=> J51-8 J513-4 <=> J51-7 J513-5 <=> J51-6 Is the continuity between J512 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.3) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-29 <=> J41-12 J11-30 <=> J41-11 J11-31 <=> J41-10 J11-32 <=> J41-9 Is there continuity in all lines?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
Replace the PWB Drive (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5). If this does not solve the problem, replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-192
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P163-1 <=> P163-2. Is there 24V DC between P163-1 <=> P163-2?
Treatment Yes Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) No
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-193
Revision D
FIP-24 Cyan Toner Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (C) (PL12.1.3) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (C). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (C) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance +0.2V DC between P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J443 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (C). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J443-2 <=> J51-34 J443-3 <=> J51-33 Is the continuity between J443 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-21 <=> J42-10. Is the continuity between J12-21 <=> J42-10 normal? Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Check the toner mixing Auger and the Gears for damage.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-194
Revision D
Step
Check Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.7) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn on the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J513-1 <=> J51-23 J513-2 <=> J51-22 J513-3 <=> J51-21 J513-4 <=> J51-20 J513-5 <=> J51-19 Is the continuity between J513 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-33 <=> J41-8 J11-34 <=> J41-7 J11-35 <=> J41-6 J11-36 <=> J41-5 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P163-1 <=> P163-2. Is there 24V DC between P163-1 <=> P163-2?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-195
Revision D
FIP-25 Black Toner Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (K) (PL12.1.4) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (K). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (K) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J444 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (C). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J444-2 <=> J51-36 J444-3 <=> J51-35 Is the continuity between J444 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-24 <=> J42-7. Is the continuity between J12-24 <=> J42-7 normal? Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Check the toner mixing Auger and the Gears for damage.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-196
Revision D
Step
Check Power supply to Toner Motor (K) of Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn on the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J514-1 <=> J51-28 J514-2 <=> J51-27 J514-3 <=> J51-26 J514-4 <=> J51-25 J514-5 <=> J51-24 Is the continuity between J514 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.5) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-37 <=> J41-4 J11-38 <=> J41-3 J11-39 <=> J41-2 J11-40 <=> J41-1 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P163-1 <=> P163-2. Is there 24V DC between P163-1 <=> P163-2?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-197
Revision D
FIP-26 PHD Life Over

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation PWBA CRUM installation inside PHD Assy PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur even when the new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check 1. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) 2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM. Is the continuity between Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM normal? PWBA CRUM connection check 1. Remove the Holder TCRU Assy Unit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) 2. Check the connection between the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) and the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected correctly to the harness connector? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J710-2 <=> J71-5 J710-3 <=> J71-4 J710-4 <=> J71-3 J710-5 <=> J71-2 Is the continuity between J710 <=> J71 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Reconnect or replace the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
Go to step 5.
Reconnect or replace the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8).
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-198
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P71-2 <=> J140-5 P71-3 <=> J140-4 P71-4 <=> J140-3 P71-5 <=> J140-2 Is the continuity between P71 <=> J140 normal? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-199
Revision D
FIP-27 BTR Life Over

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) 1. Remove the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Look at the part of the BTR Assy that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full (PL6.1.13). Is the part of the BTR Assy that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full blocked with recovered toner? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Are the transparent sections at the left and right of the BTR Assy part that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full (PL6.1.13) clean? Is the BTR Assy part that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full clean? BTR Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new BTR Assy is installed? Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) check Use the Sensor TNR Full diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor TNR Full functioning normally? Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) signal check 1. Remove the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Insert an obstruction such as a piece of paper into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full and then remove it. 3. Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1 Is the voltage between P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1 3.3V DC when the obstruction is inserted, and 0V DC when it is removed? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Clean the transparent surfaces.
End of procedure
Go to step 9.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-200
Revision D
Step
Check Power supply to Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1 Is there +5V DC between P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1? Harness Assy TFLSNS (PL6.1.14) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector from the Sensor TNR Full. 2. Disconnect the P/J141 relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J142-1 <=> J141-3 J142-2 <=> J141-2 J142-3 <=> J141-1 Is the continuity between J142 <=> J141 normal? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 8.
Replace the Sensor TNR Full. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.3)
Replace the Harness Assy TFLSNS (PL6.1.14).
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-201
Revision D
FIP-28 Fuser Life Over

Step Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Treatment Yes No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-202
Revision D
FIP-29 CTD Sensor Dustiness

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation Sensor Assy (PL6.1.11) cleaning 1. Clean the sensor element of the Sensor Assy ADC with a soft cloth. 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check 1. Open the BTR Assy (PL9.1.2). 2. Check the connection of the P/J136 connector for the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). Is the Harness Assy CTD connected correctly to the Sensor Assy ADC? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check 1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Disconnect the P/J1361 relay connector between the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-1 <=> J1361-5 J136-2 <=> J1361-4 J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-4 <=> J1361-2 J136-5 <=> J1361-1 Is the continuity between J136 <=> J1361 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P1361-1 <=> J13-16 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 P1361-3 <=> J13-14 P1361-4 <=> J13-13 P1361-5 <=> J13-12 Is the continuity between P1361 <=> J13 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-203
Revision D
Step
Check Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) signal check Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10). P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3 Is there 0V DC between P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3?
Treatment Yes No
Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-204
Revision D
FIP-30 Front Cover

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) installation Front Cover installation Interlock SW actuator installation Interlock SW check Use the Interlock SW diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Interlock SW functioning normally? Interlock Switch operation check 1. Check that the PHD Assy is installed. 2. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9) 3. Open and close the Chute Assy Out (PL2.1.6) and check the operation of the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Does the Interlock Switch operate normally? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) signal check 1. Open and close the Chute Assy Out (PL2.1.6). 2. Check the following voltages. P/J41-35 <=> P/J41-21/22 Are the voltages between P/J41-35 <=> P/J41-21/22 0V DC when the Chute Assy Out is closed? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the parts that are causing the obstruction, or replace the PWB Drive (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-205
Revision D
FIP-31 Yellow Toner Near Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (Y) (PL12.1.1) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (Y). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (Y) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15 Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (Y). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J441-2 <=> J51-16 J441-3 <=> J51-15 Is the continuity between J441 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Toner Low is installed? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J12-23 <=> J42-8 J12-3 <=> J42-28 Is there continuity in all lines? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-206
Revision D
Step
Check Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (Y) of Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2 Is there + 24V DC between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2. 24V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there + 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J511 connector from the Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J511-1 <=> J51-5 J511-2 <=> J51-4 J511-3 <=> J51-3 J511-4 <=> J51-2 J511-5 <=> J51-1 Is the continuity between J511 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-207
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following. J11-25 <=> J41-16 J11-26 <=> J41-15 J11-27 <=> J41-14 J11-28 <=> J41-13 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
12
Go to step 13.
13
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-208
Revision D
FIP-32 Magenta Toner Near Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (M) (PL12.1.2) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (M). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (M) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17 Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (M). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J442-2 <=> J51-18 J442-3 <=> J51-17 Is the continuity between J442 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Toner Low is installed? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J12-22 <=> J42-9 J12-3 <=> J42-28 Is there continuity in all lines? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-209
Revision D
Step
Check
Treatment Yes Check the toner mixing Auger and the Gears for damage. If there is damaged part, replace the applicable part and if there is nothing, replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. No
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (M) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2 Is there +24V DC between P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2. 24V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there +24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J512 connector from the Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J512-1 <=> J51-10 J512-2 <=> J51-9 J512-3 <=> J51-8 J512-4 <=> J51-7 J512-5 <=> J51-6 Is the continuity between J512 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.3) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-210
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following. J11-29 <=> J41-12 J11-30 <=> J41-11 J11-31 <=> J41-10 J11-32 <=> J41-9 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
12
Go to step 13.
13
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-211
Revision D
FIP-33 Cyan Toner Near Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (C) (PL12.1.3) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (C). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (C) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33 Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J443 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (Y). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J443-2 <=> J51-34 J443-3 <=> J51-33 Is the continuity between J443 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Toner Low is installed? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J12-21 <=> J42-10 J12-3 <=> J42-28 Is there continuity in all lines? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-212
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2 Is there + 24V DC between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2. 24V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there + 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J513 connector from the Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J513-1 <=> J51-23 J513-2 <=> J51-22 J513-3 <=> J51-21 J513-4 <=> J51-20 J513-5 <=> J51-19 Is the continuity between J513 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-213
Revision D
Step
Treatment Yes No
12
Go to step 13.
13
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-214
Revision D
FIP-34 Black Toner Near Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (K) (PL12.1.4) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (K). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (K) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35 Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J444 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (Y). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J444-2 <=> J51-36 J444-3 <=> J51-35 Is the continuity between J444 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Toner Low is installed? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J12-24 <=> J42-7 J12-3 <=> J42-28 Is there continuity in all lines? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-215
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (K) of Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2 Is there +24V DC between P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2. 24V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. Is there +24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J514-1 <=> J51-28 J514-2 <=> J51-27 J514-3 <=> J51-26 J514-4 <=> J51-25 J514-5 <=> J51-24 Is the continuity between J514 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.5) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-216
Revision D
Step
Treatment Yes No
12
Go to step 13.
13
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-217
Revision D
FIP-35 PHD Life Warning

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation PWBA CRUM installation inside PHD Assy PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur even when the new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check 1. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) 2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM. Is the continuity between Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM normal? PWBA CRUM connection check 1. Remove the Holder TCRU Assy Unit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) 2. Check the connection between the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) and the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). Is the continuity between Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM normal? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J710-2 <=> J71-5 J710-3 <=> J71-4 J710-4 <=> J71-3 J710-5 <=> J71-2 Is the continuity between J710 <=> J71 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-218
Revision D
Step
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-219
Revision D
FIP-36 BTR Life Warning

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) 1. Replace the BTR Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur even when the new BTR Assy is installed? Sensor TNR Full check Use the Sensor TNR Full diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor TNR Full functioning normally? Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) signal check 1. Remove the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Insert an obstruction into the sensor element of the Sensor TNR Full and then remove it. 3. Measure the following voltage at the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full. P/J142-2 <=> P/J142-3 Is the voltage between P/J142-2 <=> P/J142-3 3.3V DC when the obstruction is inserted, and 0V DC when it is removed? Power supply to Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) Measure the following voltage at the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full. P/J142-1 <=> P/J142-3 Is there +5V DC between P/J142-1 <=> P/J142-3? Harness Assy TFLSNS (PL6.1.14) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.3) 2. Disconnect the P/J141 relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J142-1 <=> J141-3 J142-2 <=> J141-2 J142-3 <=> J141-1 Is the continuity between J142 <=> J141 normal? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
End of procedure
Go to step 7.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 11.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Replace the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-220
Revision D
Step
Check 5V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between P61-8 <=> J61-7. Is there +24V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7? PWB drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24. Is there continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24? Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J11-17 <=> J41-24 J11-19/20 <=> J41-22/21 Is there continuity in all lines? Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J140-12 <=> J141-2 J140-11 <=> J141-3 Is there continuity in all lines? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5).
Go to step 10.
10
11
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-221
Revision D
FIP-37 CTD Sensor Dustiness

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation Sensor Assy (PL6.1.11) cleaning 1. Clean the sensor element of the sensor Assy ADC with a soft cloth. 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check 1. Open the BTR Assy (PL9.1.2). 2. Check the connection of the P/J136 connector for the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11). Is the Harness Assy CTD connected correctly to the Sensor Assy ADC? Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check 1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) 2. Disconnect the P/J1361 relay connector between the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J136-1 <=> J1361-5 J136-2 <=> J1361-4 J136-3 <=> J1361-3 J136-4 <=> J1361-2 J136-5 <=> J1361-1 Is the continuity between J136 <=> J1361 normal? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P1361-1 <=> J13-16 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 P1361-3 <=> J13-14 P1361-4 <=> J13-13 P1361-5 <=> J13-12 Is the continuity between P1361 <=> J13 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-222
Revision D
Step
Check Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) signal check Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10). P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3 Is there 0V DC between P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3?
Treatment Yes No
Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-223
Revision D
FIP-38 Tray 1 Paper Near Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) installation Sensor actuator installation Does the error occur even when paper is added? Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) check Use the Sensor No/Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor No/Low Paper functioning normally? Lever Low Paper (PL4.2.10) 1. Remove the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). 2. Operate the Lever Low Paper manually. Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly? Power supply to Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) 1. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P47-8 <=> P47-9. Is there 3.3V DC between P47-8 <=> P47-9? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWBA Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J473 connector from the Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J47-8 <=> J423-3 J47-9 <=> J423-2 J47-10 <=> J423-1 Is the continuity between J47 <=> J423 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
With the tool: Go to step 3. Without the tool: Go to step 4. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
End of procedure
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the Lever Low Paper. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.8).
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Replace the Sensor Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28).
Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) sensor signal check 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL4.2.10) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8. P/J47-10 <=> P/J47-9 Is the voltage between P/J47-10 <=> P/J47-9 +3.3V DC at the Low Paper condition, and 0V DC when the lever is released?
Replace the Sensor No/Low Paper (L/P). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.13)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-224
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J42 and P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between P47-10 <=> P42-20. Is there continuity between P47-10 <=> P42-20? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check Check the continuity for the following. J42-20 <=> J12-11 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 and P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P47-8 <=> P61-6. Is there continuity between P47-8 <=> P61-8? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J61-6 <=> J165-3 J61-5 <=> J165-4 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Replace the LVNC (PL15.2.1).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-225
Revision D
FIP-39 Paper Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) installation Link Actuator (PL4.3.6) installation Actuator No Paper (PL4.3.4) installation Does the error occur even when paper is added? Link Actuator (PL4.3.6), Actuator No Paper (PL4.3.5) Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. Do the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper operate smoothly? Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (N/P) check Use the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) functioning normally? Power supply to Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (N/P) Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. P/J47-5 <=> P/J47-6 Is there +3.3V DC between P/J47-5 <=> P/J47-6? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J472 connector from the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P). 2. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J47-5 <=> J472-3 J47-6 <=> J472-2 J47-7 <=> J472-1 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) sensor signal check 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL4.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. P/J47-7 <=> P/J47-6 Is the voltage between P47-7 <=> P47-6 +3.3V DC at the No Paper condition, and 0V DC when paper is present? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
2 3
Go to step 3. With the tool: Go to step 4. Without the tool: Go to step 5. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
End of procedure Replace the part that is causing the problem. (Refer to Ch44.2.7.15, 4.2.7.16) Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.13)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-226
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between P47-7 <=> P42-19. Is there continuity between P47-7 <=> P42-19? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity between P42-19 <=> J12-12. Is there continuity between P42-19 <=> J12-12? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Check the continuity between P47-5 <=> P61-6. Is there continuity between P47-5 <=> P61-6? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Check the continuity between J61-6 <=> J1165-3. Is there continuity between J61-6 <=> J1165-3?
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-227
Revision D
FIP-40 Upper Cassette Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8) installation Paper Cassette installation Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8) 1. Remove the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). 2. Operate the Switch Assy Tray 1 actuators manually. Do the switch Assy Tray 1 actuators operate smoothly? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Replace the Switch Size Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.7)
Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8) continuity While operating the Switch Assy Tray 1 actuators manually, check the following continuities. P/J47-1 <=> P/J47-3 Go to step 5. P/J47-2 <=>P/J47-3 P/J47-4 <=> P/J47-3 For each circuit, is there continuity when the actuator is operated, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. P/J47-1 <=> J471-4 P/J47-2 <=> J471-3 P/J47-3 <=> J471-2 P/J47-4 <=> J471-1 Is there continuity in all lines? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity Check the continuity for the following circuits. P47-1 <=> P42-16 P47-2 <=> P42-17 P47-4 <=> P42-18 Is there continuity in all circuits?
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-228
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. J42-16 <=> J12-15 J42-17 <=> J12-14 J42-18 <=> J12-13 Is there continuity in all lines? Actuator Size (PL3.2.21) While changing the paper size settings, check the Actuator Size operation. (Refer to Ch7.) Does the Actuator Size operate correctly? Switch size tray 1 (PL4.2.8) signal 1. Insert a Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4) that contains paper. 2. Check the voltages between the following terminals, and compare them with the specified paper size values. (Refer to Ch7.) P/J47-1 <=> P/J47-3 P/J47-2 <=> P/J47-3 P/J47-4 <=> P/J47-3 Do the signals match the paper size settings?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the cassette Assy (PL2.1.4), or replace the defective part.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-229
Revision D
FIP-41 Full Stack

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) installation Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5) installation Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5) Operate the full stack actuator manually, and look at the relationship between its movement and the paper sensor (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack). Does the Actuator Full Stack move smoothly? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) check Use the Sensor Paper (Full Stack) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Paper (Full Stack) functioning normally? Power supply to Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) 1. Remove the Sensor Paper (Full Stack). 2. Measure the voltage between J134-3 <=> P/J134-2. Is there 3.3V DC between P/J134-3 <=> P/J134-2? Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) signal check 1. Operate the Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5) manually. 2. Measure the voltage between P/J134-1 <=> P/J134-2. Is the voltage between P/J13-3 <=> P/J13-2 +3.3V DC when the Actuator Full Stack is operated, and 0V DC when it is released? Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2), Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-5 <=> P139-7/J139-5 <=> J134-2 J13-6 <=> P139-6/J139-6 <=> J134-1 Is there continuity in all lines? Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2), Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity Check the continuity for the following lines. J13-4 <=> P139-8/J139-4 <=> J134-3 J13-5 <=> P139-7/J139-5 <=> J134-2 Is there continuity in all lines? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Replace the Actuator Full Stack. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.3)
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Replace the Sensor Paper (Full Stack). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.2)
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-230
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J11 and P/J13 connectors of the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P13-4. Is there continuity between P11-18 <=> P13-4? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P41-21/22. Is there 3.3V DC between P41-23 <=> P41-21/22? PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive. 2. Measure the voltage between J61-6 <=> J61-5. Is there 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> J165-4. Is there 3.3V DC between P165-3 <=> P165-4?
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Replace the LVNC (PL15.2.1).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-231
Revision D
FIP-42 Yellow Toner Empty 2

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (Y) (PL12.1.1) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (Y). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (Y) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance +0.2V DC between P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (Y). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J441-2 <=> J51-16 J441-3 <=> J51-15 Is the continuity between J441 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-23 <=> J42-8. Is the continuity between J12-23 <=> J42-8 normal? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-232
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (Y) of Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J511-1 <=> J51-5 J511-2 <=> J51-4 J511-3 <=> J51-3 J511-4 <=> J51-2 J511-5 <=> J51-1 Is the continuity between J511 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-25 <=> J41-16 J11-26 <=> J41-15 J11-27 <=> J41-14 J11-28 <=> J41-13 Is there continuity in all lines?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-233
Revision D
Step
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-234
Revision D
FIP-43 Magenta Toner Empty 2

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (M) (PL12.1.2) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (M). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (M) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (M). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J442-2 <=> J51-18 J442-3 <=> J51-17 Is the continuity between J442 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-22 <=> J42-9. Is the continuity between J12-22 <=> J42-9 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-235
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (M) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J512-1 <=> J51-10 J512-2 <=> J51-9 J512-3 <=> J51-8 J512-4 <=> J51-7 J512-5 <=> J51-6 Is the continuity between J512 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.3) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-29 <=> J41-12 J11-30 <=> J41-11 J11-31 <=> J41-10 J11-32 <=> J41-9 Is there continuity in all lines?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-236
Revision D
Step
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-237
Revision D
FIP-44 Cyan Toner Empty 2

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (C) (PL12.1.3) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (C). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (C) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J443 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (C). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J443-2 <=> J51-34 J443-3 <=> J51-33 Is the continuity between J443 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-21 <=> J42-10. Is the continuity between J12-21 <=> J42-10 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-238
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J513-1 <=> J51-23 J513-2 <=> J51-22 J513-3 <=> J51-21 J513-4 <=> J51-20 J513-5 <=> J51-19 Is the continuity between J513 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-33 <=> J41-8 J11-34 <=> J41-7 J11-35 <=> J41-6 J11-36 <=> J41-5 Is there continuity in all lines?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-239
Revision D
Step
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-240
Revision D
FIP-45 Black Toner Empty 2

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Toner Cartridge installation Toner Motor installation Toner Cartridge (K) (PL12.1.4) check 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (K). 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed? Sensor Toner Low (K) (PL12.2.9) signal check Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Is the resistance +0.2V DC between P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J444 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (K). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J444-2 <=> J51-36 J444-3 <=> J51-35 Is the continuity between J444 <=> J51 normal? Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check 1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur? Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity between J12-24 <=> J42-7. Is the continuity between J12-24 <=> J42-7 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
End of procedure
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-241
Revision D
Step
Check
Toner Motor check Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The Interlock SW should be closed. Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? Power supply to Toner Motor (K) of Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8) 1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Turn On the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Measure the voltage between P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2. Is there +24V DC between P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2. Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8). 2. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J514-1 <=> J51-28 J514-2 <=> J51-27 J514-3 <=> J51-26 J514-4 <=> J51-25 J514-5 <=> J51-24 Is the continuity between J514 <=> J51 normal? Toner Motor check 1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.5) 2. Turn On the power. Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed? Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check Check the following. Are the continuities normal? J11-37 <=> J41-4 J11-38 <=> J41-3 J11-39 <=> J41-2 J11-40 <=> J41-1 Is there continuity in all lines?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
End of procedure
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-242
Revision D
Step
12
Go to step 13.
13
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-243
Revision D
FIP-46 PHD Life Over 2

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation PWBA CRUM installation inside PHD Assy PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur even when the new PHD Assy is installed? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check 1. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) 2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM. Are the Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM connected correctly? PWBA CRUM connection check 1. Remove the Holder TCRU Assy Unit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) 2. Check the connection between the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) and the Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). Is the PWBA CRUM Connector connected correctly to the harness connector? Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). 2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J710-2 <=> J71-5 J710-3 <=> J71-4 J710-4 <=> J71-3 J710-5 <=> J71-2 Is the continuity between J710 <=> J71 normal? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-244
Revision D
Step
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Replace the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10)
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-245
Revision D
FIP-47 BTR Life Over 2

Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) installation BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) 1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Turn On the power. Does the error still occur even when the new BTR Assy is installed? Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) check Use the Sensor TNR Full diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor TNR Full functioning normally? Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) signal check 1. Disconnect the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) 2. Measure the following voltage the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1 Is there 0V DC between P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1? Power supply to Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1 Is there +5V DC between P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1? Harness Assy TFLSNS (PL6.1.14) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector from the Sensor TNR Full. 2. Disconnect the P/J141 relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J142-1 <=> J141-3 J142-2 <=> J141-2 J142-3 <=> J141-1 Is the continuity between J142 <=> J141 normal? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
End of procedure
Go to step 7.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-246
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Turn On the power. Does the problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-247
Revision D
FIP-48 Engine Communication Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Reinsert the DIMM. Improving the CONTROLLER PWB Environment: Update the program to the latest one in the DIMM.B Replacing the CONTROLLER PWB and Performing Checks: Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU PWB with a normal one? Treatment Yes No
Replace or reinstall the relevant part.
Go to step 2.
2 3
Replace or reinstall the relevant part. -
Go to step 3. Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-248
Revision D
FIP-49 Verify (DIMM Slot Related) Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Reinsert the DIMM. Checking the DIMM: After formatting the DIMM, load the control program to the DIMM. Insert the DIMM in the socket P until it locks securely. NOTE: Since the DIMM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the correct direction. Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-249
Revision D
FIP-50 Error in Standard RAM (Slot 0, 1)

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Checking the SD-RAM: Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots and then reinsert them in the RAM slots. Be sure to insert the SD-RAMs one by one (S0 and S1) in order so that the SD-RAM error can be identified. Every time you insert an SD-RAM, follow the procedures below and repeat it for each one. Replace or reinstall the relevant 1. Turn the power off. part. 2. Add the SD-RAM. 3. Turn the power on. Insert the SD-RAM in the socket until it is locked securely. NOTE: Since the SD-RAM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the correct direction.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-250
Revision D
FIP-51 ROM Checksum Error (MASK ROM for Font)

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Replace the CODE ROM-DIMM (C309PROG): Replace the mounted CODE ROM-DIMM. Does the problem still occur? Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Replace the CONTROLLER PWB.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-251
Revision D
FIP-52 ROM Checksum Error (CODE, IPL)

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Replace the CODE ROM-DIMM (C309PROG): Replace the mounted CODE ROM-DIMM. Does the problem still occur? Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Replace the CONTROLLER PWB.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-252
Revision D
FIP-53 ROM Module (DIMM Slot A Related) Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Checking the DIMM: Insert the DIMM in the socket until it is locked securely. 2 NOTE: Since the DIMM has the right direction and location for insertion, be sure to insert it in the correct direction and location. Check if the DIMM is available for this printer, AcuLaser C4000. In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Problem solved. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-253
Revision D
FIP-54 EEPROM Writing Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Checking the EEPROM: Error C1200... Execute SelecType Init in the Panel Setting, or replace EEPROM. Error C1210...Replace EEPROM. In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-254
Revision D
FIP-55 CCNV Hardware Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Replacing the IC concerned: Replace IC601 (VIP2: E05B93BA). Replace IC600 (PWM). In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-255
Revision D
FIP-56 Engine Initialization Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Initializing the MCU PWB: By using the DIAG command, execute Slave Initialize. Turn the power off once and on again. Does the printer operate normally? Replacing the relevant unit: Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. No With the tool: Go to step 2. Without the tool: Go to step3.
2 3
Problem solved. Replace or reinstall the relevant part.
Go to step 3. Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-256
Revision D
FIP-57 SRAM (for Compression) Initialization Hardware Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Checking the SD-RAM: Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots and then reinsert them in the RAM slots. Be sure to insert the SD-RAMs one by one (S0 and S1) in order so that the SD-RAM error can be identified. Every time you insert an SD-RAM, follow the procedures below and repeat it for each one. Replace or reinstall the relevant 1. Turn the power off. part. 2. Add the SD-RAM. 3. Turn the power on. Insert the SD-RAM in the socket until it is locked securely. NOTE: Since the SD-RAM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the correct direction. Replacing the IC concerned: Replace IC601 (VIP2: E05B93BA). Replace IC600 (PWM). In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Replace or reinstall the relevant part.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-257
Revision D
FIP-58 Video System Hardware Error (including PWM Calibration Error IC)
Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Replacing the IC concerned: Replace IC601 (VIP2: E05B93BA). Replace IC600 (PWM). In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2 No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-258
Revision D
FIP-59 Built - in Network Hardware Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Checking the network setting Check if the existing network is operating normally. Print the network status sheet to check if the every setting is correct. Check if the network environment of the client side is correct. Replacing the relevant unit: Replacing the CONTROLLER PWB. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Go to step 2. No
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-259
Revision D
FIP-60 DIMM SPD Error

Step Check Initial setting: Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the printer back to the standard status. Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB. Replacing CODE ROM (C309PROG): Replace the mounted CODE ROM with another one for checking. Treatment Yes Replace or reinstall the relevant part. Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Go to step 2. No
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-260
Revision D
FIP-P5 "Dropout, thin areas, stripes or bands in the direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction" FIP-P6 "Black Dots" FIP-P7 "Fogging" FIP-P8 "Paper Skew" FIP-P9 "Wrinkles" FIP-P10 "Unsatisfactory Fixing" NOTE: The types of rollers that relate to image quality troubleshooting and their spacing in the printer are given in the following table.
Part Magnet Roll Drum BTR Padolle HTC IDT 1 IDT 2 Heat Roll Cycle 29mm 63mm 65mm 7.5mm 23mm 132mm 132mm 82mm
3.3.4 Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP

NOTE: This section contains instructions for troubleshooting when the printer controller is operating normally. However, it is possible to tell basically if there is a problem with the printer controller or with the engine itself by carrying out a test print using just the printer engine, except for some problems which cannot be checked by means of a test print. If the print test using the engine is normal There is a problem with the printer controller. If the print test using the engine also shows a problem There is a problem with the printer engine. If the problem is judged to be with the printer controller, replace the printer controller with a normal part and re-check. If the problem still occurs after the printer controller has been replaced, check the host computer, and then use the following image quality FIP classified by trouble symptoms to carry out troubleshooting more efficiently. If problems occur with the image quality of printouts, make a printout using an A4 page and use the image quality FIP table classified by trouble symptoms to make an accurate judgment and to get a proper understanding of the problem so that troubleshooting can be carried out effectively. If the problem cannot be fixed using the image quality FIP, repeat the check procedure once more using the image quality FIP, and then check by replacing parts in the order given in the "Related parts" section of the image quality FIP, and also use the specifications section to carry out troubleshooting. Check that all assemblies are properly grounded. The image quality FIP contains instructions on diagnosing the following basic image quality problems. FIP-P1 "Light image" FIP-P2 "All White" FIP-P3 "All Black" FIP-P4 "Dropout, thin areas, ripples or bands in paper feed direction"
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-261
Revision D
FIP-P1 "Light image"
Description / initial check Dropout in print image This means that there are patches in the printed image where the ink is missing or is coated very lightly. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. Parts connected to Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Item Paper condition 1. Insert a fresh, dry piece of paper. 2. Carry out a test print. Is the image density normal? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Replace the PHD Assy. Is the image density normal? Drum grounding Check the Drum grounding circuit. Is the Drum grounding normal? Check Yes No
Problem solved.
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Repair, clean or replace the malfunctioning part.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-262
Revision D
Item
Check Laser beam path 1. Check that thee are no obstructions to the laser beam path between the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) and the Drum. 2. Check that the window of the ROS Assy is not dirty. Is the laser beam path free from obstructions, and is the window of the ROS Assy clean? ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) 1. Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) 2. Carry out a test print. Is the image density normal? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Check the BTR Assy roller. Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn? Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2), Spring BTR R2 (PL6.1.3), Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4) Check the continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In. Is there continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In?
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Remove the obstruction or clean the window of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1).
Problem solved.
Go to step 6.
Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Go to step 7.
Replace the part that is preventing continuity.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-263
Revision D
FIP-P2 "All White"
Description / initial check Printout is completely white (on white paper) This means that no printing image is appearing at all, so that the whole page remains white. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1/2/3/4) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) Item 1 Check Toner Cartridge (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1.1/2/3/4) Is there enough toner inside the Toner Cartridge? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Replace the PHD Assy. Does this solve the problem? Drum grounding Check the Drum grounding circuit. Is the Drum grounding normal? Go to step 2. Yes No Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE. Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-264
Revision D
Item
Check Laser path 1. Check the laser path from the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) to the drum inside the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Check that the window of the ROS Assy is not dirty. Are there any foreign particles or dirt in the laser path? ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) 1. Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) 2. Carry out a test print. Does this solve the problem? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Check the BTR Assy roller. Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn? Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2), Spring BTR R2 (PL6.1.3), Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4) Check the continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In. Is there continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In?
Yes
No
Remove the foreign particles or dirt.
Go to step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to step 6.
Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-265
Revision D
FIP-P3 "All Black"
Description / initial check Printout is completely black This means that the whole image appears solid black. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and LVPS (PL15.1.10) Item PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Is printing normal? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Cover the whole of the laser beam output window of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) with a piece of paper. 2. Carry out a test print. Is the printout completely black? Check Yes No
Problem solved.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-266
Revision D
Item
Check ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) 1. Cover half of the laser beam output window of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) with a piece of paper. 2. Carry out a test print. Is the printout half white and half black?
Yes
No
Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-267
Revision D
FIP-P4 "Dropout, thin areas, ripples or bands in paper feed direction"
Description / initial check Printout contains white dropout or black stripes. This means that there are white or thin stripes or dark stripes in the printout in the paper feed direction. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) Item Check Paper 1. Insert some fresh standard-sized paper. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-268
Revision D
Item
Check Laser path 1. Check the laser path from the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) to the drum inside the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). 2. Check that the window of the ROS Assy is not dirty. Are there any foreign particles or dirt in the laser path? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path for foreign particles or obstructions. Are there any obstructions in the paper feed path? BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Check the BTR Assy roller. Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting. W A R N IN G
Yes
No
Remove the foreign particles or dirt.
Go to step 4.
Remove the obstructions from the paper feed path. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
6 2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll. Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged?
Replace the related parts one by one.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-269
Revision D
FIP-P5 "Dropout, thin areas, stripes or bands in the direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction"
Description / initial check Printout contains white dropout or black stripes. This means that there are white or thin stripes or dark stripes in the printout in the direction that is perpendicular to the paper feed direction. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. Parts connected to ROS Assy (PL11.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Item Check Paper 1. Insert some fresh standard-sized paper. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-270
Revision D
Item 3 BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Check the BTR Assy roller. Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn? Periodicity check Does the problem show periodicity?
Check
Yes Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) Replace the applicable parts. Go to step 4.
No
Go to step 5.
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting. W A R N IN G 5 2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll. Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged? Drive Assy Deve (PL14.1.1) 1. Replace the Drive Assy Deve. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2) 2. Reprint the problem image. Does the problem still occur? Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) 1. Replace the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2) 2. Reprint the problem image. Does the problem still occur? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) connection Check the connections of each circuit in the PHD Assy. Are all circuits in the PHD Assy connected correctly? Drum grounding Check the Drum grounding circuit. Is the Drum grounding normal?
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Problem solved.
Go to step 8.
Problem solved.
Go to step 9.
Replace or repair parts.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-271
Revision D
FIP-P6 "Black Dots"
Description / initial check Black dots appear on print. This means that there are round black (colored) spots in the printout. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) Item PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? Check Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-272
Revision D
Item
Check Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting. W A R N IN G
Yes
No
2 2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll. Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged? 3 BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) Check the BTR Assy roller. Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn?
Go to step 3.
Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-273
Revision D
FIP-P7 "Fogging"
Description / initial check Printout is blurry. This means that toner is adhering to the white areas of the printout. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. BTR Assy (PL9.1.2), ROS Assy (PL11.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Item PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur? Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1) grounding Check the Chute Assy In grounding circuit. Is the in Chute Assy In grounded? Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) grounding Check the Chute Assy Out grounding circuit. Is the in Chute Assy Out grounded? Check Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Repair the location of the grounding fault. Repair the location of the grounding fault.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-274
Revision D
Item 4
Check Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) grounding Check the Chute Assy Exit grounding circuit. Is the in Chute Assy Exit grounded? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) grounding Check the Fuser Assy grounding circuit. Is the in Fuser Assy grounded? Go to step 5.
Yes
No Repair the location of the grounding fault. Repair the location of the grounding fault.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-275
Revision D
FIP-P8 "Paper Skew"
Description / initial check Printing skewed This means that the image is printed at an angle. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. PAPER FEEDER, Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1), Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) and Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) Item Check Paper setting/Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4) 1. Remove the Cassette Assy where the problem occurred. 2. Reinsert the paper. 3. Reprint the page that caused the problem. Does the problem still occur? Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Paper feed path Clean or replace the applicable Check if there are any problems such as burring, foreign matter or dirt in the paper feed path. part. Are there any obstacles in the paper feed path?
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-276
Revision D
Item 3
Check Paper supply rollers Check the paper supply rollers. Are the paper supply rollers worn or damaged? Paper feed rollers Check all rollers in the paper feed path. Are there any problems with the paper feed rollers such as foreign particles or dirty, bent or malfunctioning rollers? ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) Check the installation of the ROS Assy. Is there a problem with the installation of the ROS Assy? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the same problem still occur?
Yes Clean or replace the applicable part. Go to step 4.
No
Clean or replace the applicable part.
Go to step 5.
Reinstall the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Go to step 6.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-277
Revision D
FIP-P9 "Wrinkles"
Description / initial check Wrinkles in printout This means that there are wrinkles in the paper after printing. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. PAPER FEEDER, Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1), Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Item Check Paper moisture 1. Replace with fresh paper from a packet that has just been opened. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-278
Revision D
Item
Check Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting. W A R N IN G
Yes
No
2 2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll. Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged? 3 Paper skew Is the paper being fed at an angle?
Go to step 3.
Go to FIP-P8 (Page 5-276).
Go to step 4.
Paper feed path Clean or replace the applicable Check if there are any problems such as burring, foreign matter or dirt in the paper feed path. part. Are there any obstacles in the paper feed path? Paper feed rollers Check all rollers in the paper feed path. Are there any problems with the paper feed rollers such as foreign particles or dirty, bent or malfunctioning rollers? Clean or replace the applicable part.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-279
Revision D
FIP-P10 "Unsatisfactory Fixing"
Description / initial check Poor toner fixing This means that when the image is rubbed it a finger, the printed image can be removed easily. initial check Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them? Related parts The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts one by one and check. LVPS (PL15.1.10), PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11) Item Check Paper moisture 1. Replace with fresh paper from a packet that has just been opened. 2. Carry out a test print. Does the problem still occur? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting. W A R N IN G 2 2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll. Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged? Yes No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-280
Revision D
Item
Check Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) Turn the Gear Idler by hand and check that the Heat Roll and the Belt Assy contact each other evenly. Are the Heat Roll and Belt Assy contacting each other evenly?
Yes Replace the related parts one by one.
No Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-281
Revision D
3.3.5 Printer Operation Troubleshooting FIP

This section describes the FIP for troubleshooting printer operation.
FIP-OP1 Printer does not work

Main power supply does not turn on.
Treatment Yes No
Step
Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Power Cord (PL15.1.9) and cord connection Mains power supply voltage LVPS (PL15.1.10) PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.2.5/6/7/8) Drive Assy Deve (PL14.1.1) Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5) Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL4.3.17) Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17) Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) Clutch Assy Turn (PL17.3.18) Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28)
Repair or replace the applicable part.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-282
Revision D
Step Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5) Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2)
Check
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Power Cord (PL15.1.9) continuity Check the continuity in Power Cord. Is there continuity in Power Cord? AC power supply Measure the AC power supply voltage. Is the AC power supply voltage within the specifications? Fuse Check the fuse in the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Is the fuse blown? Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) 1. Disconnect the P/J162 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 3. Check the insulation between J162-1 <=> J162-3. Is there a short-circuit between J162-1 <=> J162-3? Heater Measure the resistance between P232-1 <=> P232-3. Is the resistance around 10 between P232-1 <=> P232-3? 24V power supply 1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Turn on the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive. 3. Turn on the power and measure the following voltage. J60-1 <=> J60-2 Is there 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2?
Go to step 3.
Replace the Power Cord (PL15.1.9). Ask the customer to fix the power supply.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 7.
Replace the Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9).
Go to step 6.
Go to step 8.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-283
Revision D
Step
Check PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 1. With the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive connected, turn on the power. 2. Check if the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) 1. Connect the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Remove the Fan Rear. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2) 3. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) operates. Does the Fan Fuser operate? Two Tray Module 1. Remove the Two Tray Module. 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1), Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17), Clutch Assy Turn (PL17.3.18) 1. Install the Two Tray Module. 2. Remove the following parts one by one, and turn the power on after each part is removed and check if the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Drive Assy Feeder (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7) PWBA Feeder (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) Solenoid Feed (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) Clutch Assy Turn (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30) Does the Fan Rear operate when a part is removed? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors one by one from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Turn the power on after each connector is disconnected and check if the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate when a harness is disconnected? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) related check 1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate?
Treatment Yes Replace the PWBA Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) No
Go to step 9.
Replace the Fan Rear. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2)
Go to step 10.
10
Go to step 11.
Go to step 13.
11
Replace applicable parts. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30)
Go to step 12.
12
Replace applicable harness.
13
Go to step 14.
Go to step 22.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-284
Revision D
Step
Check ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) 1. Remove the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) 1. Remove the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) 1. Remove the Clutch Turn MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.8.4) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) 1. Remove the Clutch Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) 1. Remove the HVPS Sub. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.9) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5) 1. Disconnect P/J15 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) 1. Disconnect P/J13 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate?
Treatment Yes Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) No
14
Go to step 15.
15
Replace the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12)
Go to step 16.
16
Replace the Clutch Turn MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.8.4)
Go to step 17.
17
Go to step 18.
18
Replace the HVPS Sub. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.9)
Go to step 19.
19
Replace the Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5).
Go to step 20.
20
Go to step 21.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-285
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) 1. Connect P/J15 of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy Front 2. 3. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL4.3.17) 1. Remove the Solenoid Feed Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) 1. Remove the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.18) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) 1. Disconnect P/J47 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) 1. Remove the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Drive Assy Deve (PL14.1.1) 1. Remove the Drive Assy Deve. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.1) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) 1. Remove the Drive Assy Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate?
Treatment Yes No
21
22
Replace the Solenoid Feed Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17)
Go to step 23.
23
Replace the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.18)
Go to step 24.
24
Go to step 25.
25
Replace the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2)
Go to step 26.
26
Replace the Drive Assy Deve. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.1)
Go to step 27.
27
Replace the Drive Assy Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4)
Go to step 28.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-286
Revision D
Step
Check Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) 1. Remove the Motor Assy Dup. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.4) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) 1. Remove the Fan Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.3) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Harness Assy Dup (PL7.1.23) 1. Disconnect P/J50 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.2.5/6/7/8) 1. Remove the Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) one by one. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2, 4.2.15.3,4.2.15.4, 4.2.15.5) 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate? Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) 1. Disconnect P/J51 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Does the Fan Rear operate?
Treatment Yes Replace the Motor Assy Dup. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.4) No
28
Go to step 29.
29
Replace the Fan Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.3)
Go to step 30.
30
Replace the Harness Assy Dup (PL7.1.23).
Go to step 31.
31
Replace applicable Holder Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2, 4.2.15.3,4.2.15.4, 4.2.15.5)
Go to step 32.
32
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-287
Revision D
FIP-OP2 LCD/LED display error

LCD/LED display is incorrect.
Treatment Yes No
Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Control Panel (PL TBD) PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) LVPS (PL15.1.10) Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)
Check
Go to step 2.
3.3V DC power supply Measure the voltage between connectors P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2 of the LVPS. Is the voltage 3.3V DC between P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2? Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) continuity 1. Disconnect P/J164 from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Disconnect P/J311 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J164-1 <=> J311-1 J164-2 <=> J311-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J164 <=> J311?
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the Harness Assy LVRPG. (PL 15.2.4)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-288
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) and Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3) 1. Disconnect P/J22 controller from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect P/J220 controller from the Control Panel (PL TBD). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J22-1 <=> J221-1 <=> J2211-1 J22-2 <=> J221-2 <=> J2211-2 J22-3 <=> J221-3 <=> J2211-3 J22-4 <=> J221-4 <=> J2211-4 J22-5 <=> J221-5 <=> J2211-5 J22-6 <=> J221-6 <=> J2211-6 J22-7 <=> J221-7 <=> J2211-7 J22-8 <=> J221-8 <=> J2211-8 J22-9 <=> J221-9 <=> J2211-9 J22-10 <=> J221-10 <=> J2211-10 J22-11 <=> J221-11 <=> J2211-11 J22-12 <=> J221-12 <=> J2211-12 J22-13 <=> J221-13 <=> J2211-13 J22-14 <=> J221-14 <=> J2211-14 J22-15 <=> J221-15 <=> J2211-15 J22-16 <=> J221-16 <=> J2211-16 J22-17 <=> J221-17 <=> J2211-17 J22-18 <=> J221-18 <=> J2211-18 J22-19 <=> J221-19 <=> J2211-19 J22-20 <=> J221-20 <=> J2211-20 Is there continuity in all lines? Control Panel (PL TBD) 1. Replace the Control Panel. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.1) 2. Turn on the power. Is the display still unstable? PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) 1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1) 2. Turn on the power. Is the display still unstable?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-289
Revision D
FIP-OP3 Keypad operation not possible

Keypad buttons do not operate.
Treatment Yes No
Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Control Panel (PL TBD) PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) LVPS (PL15.1.10) Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)
Check
Repair and replace the applicable part.
Go to step 2.
3.3V DC power supply 1. Disconnect P/J164 from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. P164-1 <=> P164-4 (3.3V DC) P164-3 <=> P164-4 (5V DC) Are the voltages between all terminals at the standard values? Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) continuity 1. Disconnect P/J311 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J164-1 <=> J311-1 J164-2 <=> J311-2 Is there continuity in all lines between J164 <=> J311?
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4).
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-290
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) and Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3) 1. Disconnect P/J22 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect P/J220 connector from the Control Panel (PL TBD). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J22-1 <=> J221-1 <=> J2211-1 J22-2 <=> J221-2 <=> J2211-2 J22-3 <=> J221-3 <=> J2211-3 J22-4 <=> J221-4 <=> J2211-4 J22-5 <=> J221-5 <=> J2211-5 J22-6 <=> J221-6 <=> J2211-6 J22-7 <=> J221-7 <=> J2211-7 J22-8 <=> J221-8 <=> J2211-8 J22-9 <=> J221-9 <=> J2211-9 J22-10 <=> J221-10 <=> J2211-10 J22-11 <=> J221-11 <=> J2211-11 J22-12 <=> J221-12 <=> J2211-12 J22-13 <=> J221-13 <=> J2211-13 J22-14 <=> J221-14 <=> J2211-14 J22-15 <=> J221-15 <=> J2211-15 J22-16 <=> J221-16 <=> J2211-16 J22-17 <=> J221-17 <=> J2211-17 J22-18 <=> J221-18 <=> J2211-18 J22-19 <=> J221-19 <=> J2211-19 J22-20 <=> J221-20 <=> J2211-20 Is there continuity in all lines? Control Panel (PL TBD) 1. Replace the Control Panel. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.1) 2. Turn on the power. Do the keypad switches still not work? PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) 1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1) 2. Turn on the power. Do the keypad switches still not work?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-291
Revision D
FIP-OP4 Incorrect printer operation

Printer operation is unstable.
Treatment Yes No
Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) LVPS (PL15.1.10) Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) Printer engine Carry out a test print. Does the test print complete normally?
Check
Go to step 2.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 3.
5V DC power supply 1. Disconnect P/J61 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 2. Measure the voltage between P61-8 <=> P61-7. Is the voltage 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7? 3.3V DC power supply 1. Leave the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL.15.1.15) disconnected. 2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P61-5. Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) 1. Leave the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL.15.1.15) disconnected. 2. Disconnect P/J165 from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. P165-1 <=> P61-8 P165-2 <=> P61-7 P165-3 <=> P61-6 P165-4 <=> P61-5 Is there continuity in all lines between P165 <=> P61? Reset Carry out a test print. Is the printer Reset after test printing is carried out?
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-292
Revision D
Step
Check Interface Cable 1. Replace the Interface Cable connecting the host computer and the printer. 2. Send a print command from the host computer. Is the printer operation still unstable? PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) 1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1) 2. Send a print command from the host computer. Is the printer operation still unstable? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) 1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Send a print command from the host computer. Is the printer operation still unstable?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 8.
Problem solved.
Go to step 9.
Problem solved.
Notify the customer that the problem is probably with the host computer.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-293
Revision D
3.3.6 Other FIP

This section contains power supply FIP and noise FIP that are not included in the error code FIP, image quality FIP and printer operation FIP. It should be used as a result of first referring to the error code FIP, image quality FIP and printer operation FIP.
FIP-AC
Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Power Cord (PL15.1.9) disconnection or breakage Incorrect mains power supply voltage Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11) continuity check 1. Disconnect the Power Cord (PL15.1.9) and wait 10 seconds. 2. With the Power Cord disconnected, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW. Is the continuity normal between J161-1 <=> J161-2? Treatment Yes No
Repair
Go to step 2.
Replace the Harness Assy AC SW. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.4)
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-294
Revision D
FIP-DC
Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Blown fuse inside LVPS (PL15.1.10) AC power supply problem LVPS (PL15.1.10) check 1. Disconnect the LVPS connectors J163, J165 and J164. 2. Turn on the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11). 3. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. P163-1 <=> P163-2 (24V DC) P165-1 <=> P165-2 (5V DC) P165-3 <=> P165-4 (3.3V DC) Are the voltages normal between each terminal? Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) check 1. Turn off the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11), and then connect J164 to the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11). Is the voltage +3.3V DC between P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2? Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) check 1. Turn off the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11), and then connect J165 to the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW. Is the voltage +5V DC between P/J165-1 <=> P/J165-2? Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) check 1. Turn off the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11), and then connect J163 to the LVPS (PL15.1.10). 2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW. Is the voltage +24V DC between P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2? Check Treatment Yes No
Repair.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Check for a Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) frame short.
Go to step 5.
Check for a Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) frame short.
End of procedure
Check for a Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) frame short.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-295
Revision D
FIP-Noise
Step Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) HSG Assy Bias (PL11.1.4) PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11) Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1) Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2) Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5) Wire Assy FSR Earth (PL6.1.20) Wire Assy Dup Earth (PL7.1.43) Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) Incorrect mains power supply voltage External interference 1. Check if there is any electrical equipment such as generators, wireless transmitters and motors that may generate interference being used within 3 meters of the printer. 2. Turn off the power for any electrical equipment that may be generating interference, or move the printer at least 6 meters away from such equipment. Does the electrical interference problem still occur? AC ground Check the AC power supply outlet. Is the AC power supply outlet positioned correctly and grounded? PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) 1. Replace the PHD Assy. 2. Turn on the power. Does the electrical interference problem still occur? Check Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Ask the customer to repair the AC power supply outlet.
Go to step 5.
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-296
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11) Check the grounding screw for the grounding cable of the Harness Assy AC SW. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.4) Is the cable grounded correctly? HSG Assy Bias (PL11.1.4) Check the spring and Stud Plunger (PL11.1.5) of the HSG Assy Bias. (Refer to Ch44.2.14.2) Are the spring and Stud Plunger not bent or dirty, and are they contacting correctly? Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5) connection Check the connection of the Wire Assy BTR2 connector (P/J5020) and the Wire Assy DTSK connector (P/J5030) on the HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9). Are the Wire Assy BTR2 and Wire Assy DTSK connected correctly? Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5) connection 1. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020) and (P/J5030) on the HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J5020 <=> Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4) J5030 <=> Stud BTR (PL6.1.7) Is there continuity in both the Wire Assy BTR2 and the Wire Assy DTSK? Ground harnesses Check that the following harnesses are grounded and that they have continuity. Wire Assy Dup Earth (PL7.1.43) Wire Assy FSR Earth (PL6.1.20) Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) Are all harnesses connected correctly and do they have continuity? Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1) 1. Remove the Chute Assy In. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.1) 2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy In. Are all blades free from bends and contamination and are they correctly installed? Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) 1. Remove the Chute Assy Out. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.1) 2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy Out. Are all blades free from bends and contamination and are they correctly installed?
Treatment Yes No Install the grounding screw correctly.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Replace the applicable parts.
Go to step 8.
Connect correctly.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 10.
Replace or ground any harnesses without continuity.
10
Go to step 11.
Repair or replace any blades that are bent or contaminated, or replace the Chute Assy In. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.1) Repair or replace any blades that are bent or contaminated, or replace the Chute Assy Out. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.1)
11
Go to step 12.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-297
Revision D
Step
Check Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) 1. Remove the Chute Assy Exit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.1) 2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy Exit. Are all blades free from bends and contamination and are they correctly installed? Circuit board grounding Check that all of the circuit board mounting screws that are used as grounding screws are securely tightened. Are all circuit boards grounded correctly? Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) 1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) 2. Turn on the power. Does the electrical interference problem still occur?
Treatment Yes No Repair or replace any blades that are bent or contaminated, or replace the Chute Assy Exit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.1) Repair any poor ground connections.
12
Go to step 13.
13
Go to step 14.
14
Problem solved.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP
3-298
Revision D
3.4 Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit

3.4.1 Level 2 FIP
The following is described about troubleshooting of the Large Capacity Paper Unit. The Level 2 FIP includes the procedures for diagnosing problems by classifying them according to error codes and other trouble symptoms. The method of problem diagnosis allow the causes of problems to be located quickly by following the procedures indicated in the FIP or the checking procedures.
FIP-1 Feed Jam

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Paper cassette installation Condition of paper inside cassette Worn or damaged Roll or gear inside Feeder Paper scraps or foreign particles in paper path Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5) installation Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5) 1. Carry out a print. 2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Feeder is energized. Is the Drive Assy Feeder energized? Power supply to Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J84 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 4. Measure the voltage between P84-3/4 <=> P/J81-1. Is there 24V DC between P84-3/4 <=> P/J81-1? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) 1. Carry out a print. 2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Feeder is energized. Is the Drive Assy Feeder energized? Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from TRAY 3? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 3.
Replace the Drive Assy Feeder (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7) and go to step 4.
Go to step 33.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 34.
Go to step 19.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit
3-299
Revision D
Step 6
Check Is the paper in TRAY 2 normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 2. Does the problem still occur? Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) operation check 1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 2. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Assy Turn (PL17.3.20). Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn when a single page is printed? Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) check Use the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The INTERLOCK SW should be closed. Is the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 functioning normally? Power supply to Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 4. Measure the voltage between P82-13 <=> P/J81-1. Is there +24V DC between P82-13 <=> P/J81-1? Harness Assy FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J825 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 2) (PL17.3.8). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.4) 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J82-13 <=> P825-2 J82-14 <=> P825-1 Is the continuity between J82 <=> P825 normal? Go to step 7.
Treatment Yes No Replace the paper and go to step 7. Remove the foreign particles and go to step 8. Go to step 19. With the tool: Go to step 10. Without the tool: Go to step 11.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 14.
10
Check if the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) is slipping or if the gears are damaged and go to step 14.
Go to step 11.
11
Go to step 12.
Go to step 33.
12
Go to step 13.
Replace the Harness Assy FDR 2T.
Troubleshooting
3-300
Revision D
Step
Check Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) resistance check 1. Disconnect the J825 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn. 2. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Is the resistance 200 between J825-1 <=> J825-2? Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) operation check 1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 2. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Is the paper fed from the Cassette Assy when a single page is printed? Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) check Use the Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The INTERLOCK SW should be closed. Is the Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 functioning normally? Power supply to Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 4. Measure the voltage between P82-11 <=> P/J81-1. Is there +24V DC between P82-11 <=> P/J81-1? Harness Assy FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J824 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch44.2.20.22) 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J82-11 <=> P824-2 J82-12 <=> P824-1 Is there continuity between each terminal? Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) resistance check 1. Disconnect the P/J824 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch44.2.20.22) 2. Measure the resistance between J824-1 <=> J824-2. Is the resistance 100 between J824-1 <=> J824-2? Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from TRAY 2?
Treatment Yes Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) No Replace the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.4) With the tool: Go to step 15. Without the tool: Go to step 16.
13
14
Go to step 19.
15
Check if the Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17) spring or stopper is loose and go to step 19.
Go to step 16.
16
Go to step 17.
Go to step 33.
17
Go to step 18.
Replace the Harness Assy FDR2T (PL17.4.3).
18
Go to step 19.
Replace the Solenoid Feed TRAY 2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22)
19
Go to step 20.
Troubleshooting
3-301
Revision D
Step 20
Check Is the paper in TRAY 3 normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Paper feed path Check the paper feed path. Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path? Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 3. Does the problem still occur? Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) operation check 1. Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 3. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Assy Turn (PL17.3.20) Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn when a single page is printed? Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) check Use the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The INTERLOCK SW should be closed. Is the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 functioning normally? Power supply to Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder. 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 4. Measure the voltage between P83-13 <=> P/J81-1. Is there +24V DC between P83-13 <=> P/J81-1? Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J835 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 3) (PL17.3.18). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30) 2. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J83-13 <=> P835-2 J83-14 <=> P835-1 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Treatment Yes Go to step 21. No Replace the paper and go to step 21. Remove the foreign particles and go to step 22. Problem solved. With the tool: Go to step 24. Without the tool: Go to step 25.
21
Go to step 22.
22
Go to step 23.
23
Go to step 28.
24
Check if the Clutch is slipping or if the gears are damaged and go to step 28.
Go to step 25.
25
Go to step 26.
Go to step 33.
26
Go to step 27.
Replace the Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4).
Troubleshooting
3-302
Revision D
Step
Check Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) resistance check 1. Disconnect the P/J835 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30) 2. Measure the resistance between J835-1 <=> J835-2. Is the resistance 200 between J835-1 <=> J835-2? Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) operation check 1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 3. 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Is the paper fed from the Cassette Assy when a single page is printed? Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) check Use the Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. The INTERLOCK SW should be closed. Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 functioning normally? Power supply to Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder. 3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 4. Measure the voltage between P83-11 <=> P/J81-1. Is there +24V DC between P83-11 <=> P/J81-1? Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J834 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 3) (PL17.3.17). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) 2. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J83-11 <=> P834-2 J83-12 <=> P834-1 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Treatment Yes No Replace the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30)
27
28
Check that no parts are missing. If all parts are okay, replace the paper and replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Check if the Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17) spring or stopper is loose.
29
Go to step 30.
30
Go to step 31.
Go to step 33.
31
Go to step 32.
Replace the Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4).
32
Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) resistance check 1. Disconnect the J834 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 3). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Measure the resistance between J834-1 <=> J834-2. Is the resistance 100 between J834-1 <=> J834-2?
Replace the Solenoid Feed TRAY 3. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22)
Troubleshooting
3-303
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. P81-2/25 <=> P82-11 <=> P82-13 <=> P83-11 <=> P83-13 <=> P84-3/4 P81-22 <=> P82-14 P81-21 <=> P83-14 P81-20 <=> P82-12 P81-19 <=> P83-12 Is there continuity in all circuits between P82 <=> P81? Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-1 <=> J21-26 J81-2 <=> J21-25 J81-4 <=> J21-23 J81-5 <=> J21-22 J81-6 <=> J21-21 J81-7 <=> J21-20 J81-14 <=> J21-13 J81-19 <=> J21-8 J81-20 <=> J21-7 J81-21 <=> J21-6 J81-22 <=> J21-5 J81-25 <=> J21-2 J81-26 <=> J21-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J81 <=> J21?
Treatment Yes No
33
Go to step 34.
Replace the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10)
34
Go to step 35.
Troubleshooting
3-304
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity 1. Disconnect the J210/P810 relay connector between the Harness Assy OPT Main and the Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J21-26 <=> P210-A1 J21-25 <=> P210-A2 J21-23 <=> P210-A4 J21-22 <=> P210-A5 J21-21 <=> P210-A6 J21-20 <=> P210-A7 J21-13 <=> P210-B1 J21-8 <=> P210-B6 J21-7 <=> P210-B7 J21-6 <=> P210-B8 J21-5 <=> P210-B9 J21-2 <=> P210-B12 J21-1 <=> P210-B13 Is there continuity in all lines between J21 <=> P210?
Treatment Yes No
35
Go to step 36.
Replace the Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8).
Troubleshooting
3-305
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) continuity 1. Remove the Option Feeder (Refer to Ch2), and then disconnect the P/J810 relay connector between the Harness Assy OPF REC and the Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2). 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. J210-A13 <=> P810-B1 J210-A12 <=> P810-B2 J210-A10 <=> P810-B4 J210-A9 <=> P810-B5 J210-A8 <=> P810-B6 J210-A7 <=> P810-B7 J210-B13 <=> P810-A2 J210-B8 <=> P810-A7 J210-B7 <=> P810-A8 J210-B6 <=> P810-A9 J210-B5 <=> P810-A10 J210-B2 <=> P810-A13 J210-B1 <=> P810-A14 Is there continuity in all lines between J210 <=> P810?
Treatment Yes No
36
Replace the Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2).
Replace the Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9).
Troubleshooting
3-306
Revision D

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) installation Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) installation Does the error occur even when paper is added? Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) check Use the Sensor Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Low Paper functioning normally? Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly? Power supply to Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) 1. Remove the Cover R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9) 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Measure the voltage between P82-8 <=> P82-9. Is there 3.3V DC between P82-8 <=> P82-9? Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J823 connector from the Sensor Low Paper Tray 2 (PL17.4.7). 3. Check the continuity between the following lines. J82-8 <=> J823-3 J82-9 <=> J823-2 J82-10 <=> J823-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J82 <=> J823? Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) sensor signal check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) manually, measure the following voltage. P/J82-10 <=> P/J82-9 Is the voltage between P/J82-10 <=> P/J82-9 +3.3V DC at the low paper condition, and 0V DC when the lever is released? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
With the tool: Go to step 3. Without the tool: Go to step 4. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Go to step 5.
End of procedure
Go to step 4. Replace the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9).
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Replace the Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3).
Go to step 8.
Replace the Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7).
Troubleshooting
3-307
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-18 <=> P82-10. Is there continuity between P81-18 <=> P82-10? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-18 <=> J810-A9/P810-A6 <=> J210-B9/P210-B5 <=> J21-9 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P82-8 <=> P81-24. Is there continuity between P82-8 <=> P81-24? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Treatment Yes No Replace the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10)
Go to step 9.
Replace any Harness Assy with no continuity.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
3-308
Revision D

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) installation Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) installation Does the error occur even when paper is added? Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) check Use the Sensor Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor Low Paper functioning normally? Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly? Power supply to Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) 1. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Measure the voltage between P83-8 <=> P83-9. Is there 3.3V DC between P83-8 <=> P83-9? Harness Assy Feeder 3T (PL17.4.4) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J833 connector from the Sensor Low Paper Tray 3 (PL17.4.7). 3. Check the continuity between the following lines. J83-8 <=> J833-3 J83-9 <=> J833-2 J83-10 <=> J833-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J83 <=> J833? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
With the tool: Go to step 3. Without the tool: Go to step 4. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Go to step 5.
End of procedure
Go to step 4. Replace the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9).
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) sensor signal check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8. P/J83-10 <=> P/J83-9 Is the voltage between P/J83-10 <=> P/J83-9 +3.3V DC at the low paper condition, and 0V DC when the lever is released?
Replace the Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7).
Troubleshooting
3-309
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-19 <=> P83-10. Is there continuity between P81-19 <=> P83-10? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-17 <=> J810-A10/P810-A5 <=> J210-B10/P210-B4 <=> J21-10 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P83-8 <=> P81-24. Is there continuity between P83-8 <=> P81-24? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
3-310
Revision D
FIP-4 Tray 2 Paper Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) installation Actuator No Paper (PL17.3.5) installation Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) installed Does the error occur even when paper is added? Link Actuator (PL17.3.6), Actuator No Paper (PL17.3.5) Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. Does the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper move smoothly? Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) check Use the Sensor No Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Is the Sensor No Paper functioning normally? Power supply to Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) 1. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Measure the voltage between P82-5 <=> P82-6. Is there 3.3V DC between P82-5 <=> P82-6? Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3) and Harness Assy NPRSJ (PL17.4.11) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J822 connector from the Sensor No Paper (Tray 2) (PL17.3.4). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.36) 3. Check the continuity between the following lines. J82-5 <=> J8220-3/P8220-1 <=> J822-3 J82-6 <=> J8220-2/P8220-2 <=> J822-2 J82-7 <=> J8220-1/P8220-3 <=> J822-1 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) sensor signal check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. P/J82-7 <=> P/J82-6 Is the voltage between P/J82-7 <=> P/J82-6 +3.3V DC at the no paper condition, and 0V DC when paper is present? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
2 3
End of procedure Replace the part that is causing the problem. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.35) Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Sensor No Paper (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.36).
Troubleshooting
3-311
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-16 <=> P82-7. Is there continuity between P81-16 <=> P82-7? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-16 <=> J810-A11/P810-A4 <=> J210-B11/P210-B3 <=> J21-11 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-24 <=> P82-5. Is there continuity between P81-24 <=> P82-5? Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Go to step 9.
10
Go to step 11.
11
Troubleshooting
3-312
Revision D
FIP-5 Tray 3 Paper Empty

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) installation Actuator No Paper (PL17.3.5) installation Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) installed Does the error occur even when paper is added? Link Actuator (PL17.3.6), Actuator No Paper (PL17.3.5) Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. Does the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper move smoothly? Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) check Use the Sensor No Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Sensor No Paper functioning normally? Power supply to Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) 1. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Measure the voltage between P83-5 <=> P83-6. Is there 3.3V DC between P83-5 <=> P83-6? Harness Assy Feeder 3T (PL17.4.4) and Harness Assy NPRSJ (PL17.4.11) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J83 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J832 connector from the Sensor No Paper (Tray 3). (Refer to Ch44.2.20.36) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J83-5 <=> J8220-3/P8220-1 <=> J832-3 J83-6 <=> J8220-2/P8220-2 <=> J832-2 J83-7 <=> J8220-1/P8220-3 <=> J832-1 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) sensor signal check 1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. P/J83-7 <=> P/J83-6 Is the voltage between P/J83-7 <=> P/J83-6 +3.3V DC at the no paper condition, and 0V DC when paper is present? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
2 3
End of procedure Replace the part that is causing the problem. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.35) Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Sensor No Paper (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.36).
Troubleshooting
3-313
Revision D
Step
Check PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-15 <=> P83-7. Is there continuity between P81-15 <=> P83-7?
Go to step 9.
Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) Replace the PWBA MCU & 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder. HVPS. 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-15 <=> J810-A12/P810-A3 <=> J210-B12/P210-B1 <=> J21-12 Is there continuity between each terminal? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity between P81-24 <=> P83-5. Is there continuity between P81-24 <=> P83-5?
10
Go to step 11.
11
Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch44.2.18.1) Replace the PWBA MCU & 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3 Is there continuity between each terminal?
Troubleshooting
3-314
Revision D
FIP-6 Upper Cassette Detached

Step Check Initial setting Do the following checks show a problem? Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7) installation PAPER CASSETTE installation Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7) Do the Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 actuators operate smoothly? Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7) continuity 1. Operate the Switch Assy Size (Tray 2) actuators manually. 2. Check the continuity between the following terminals of the P/J82 connector of the PWBA Feeder. P/J82-1 <=> P/J82-3 P/J82-2 <=> P/J82-3 P/J82-4 <=> P/J82-3 For each circuit, is there continuity when the actuator is operated, and no continuity when it is released? Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 2. Disconnect the P/J821 connector from the Switch Assy Size (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch44.2.20.20) 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J82-1 <=> J821-4 J82-2 <=> J821-3 J82-3 <=> J821-2 J82-4 <=> J821-1 Is there continuity in all lines between J82 <=> J821? PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity 1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. P81-11 <=> P82-1 P81-12 <=> P82-2 P81-13 <=> P82-4 Is there continuity in all circuits between P81 <=> P82? Treatment Yes No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Replace the Switch Assy Size TRAY 2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.20)
Go to step 5.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
3-315
Revision D
Step
Check Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check 1. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. J81-11 <=> J810-B3/P810-B11 <=> J210-A3/P210-A11 <=> J21-16 J81-12 <=> J810-B2/P810-B12 <=> J210-A2/P210-A12 <=> J21-15 J81-13 <=> J810-B1/P810-B13 <=> J210-A1/P210-A13 <=> J21-14 Is there continuity between each terminal? Actuator Size (PL3.2.21) While changing the paper size settings, check the Actuator Size operation. (Refer to Ch7.) Does the Actuator Size operate correctly? Switch Assy Size (PL17.2.7) signal 1. Insert a Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4) that contains paper. 2. Check the voltages between the following terminals, and compare them with the specified paper size values. (Refer to Ch7.) P/J82-1 <=> P/J82-3 P/J82-2 <=> P/J82-3 P/J82-4 <=> P/J82-3 Do the signals match the paper size settings?
Treatment Yes No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4), or replace the defective part.
Troubleshooting
3-316
CHAPTER
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Revision D
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes procedures for disassembly and assembly of the AcuLaser C4000. Note the procedures are applicable only when the printer has no options installed. For information on removing/installing the options, please see the AcuLaser C4000 Setup Guide.
4.1.2 Tools
The table below shows the tools used for servicing.
Table 4-1. Tools

Must Phillips screw driver (#2) Phillips screw driver (#1) Tweezers Recommended Soldering iron E-ring holder Mini screw driver
4.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly

Precautions for disassembly and assembly are as follows:
W A R N IN G
Before starting, be sure to turn the printer off and unplug the power cable from the AC power socket. As this printer weighs as much as 36.5 Kg , make sure that it is always carried carefully by 4 people or more. When working on the FUSER ASSY or nearby parts, be sure to wait until the temperature of the parts cool down to a safe level. When printing, make sure that all the outer covers are installed. In case you need to print before assembling, note the cautions below: 1. Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught in the rotating parts such as rollers and cooling fans. 2. Never touch any electrical terminal or high voltage components such as HVPS and LVPS. Use anti-static devices such as wrist straps in order to avoid static electric discharges when touching internal components, in order to protect the microprocessor and order circuits. When servicing, avoid handling any parts forcibly. Doing so might damage the parts and cause printer malfunction. Various types of screws are used to assemble the printer, and wrong usage might crush tapped hole and cause troubles. Therefore, be sure to mount the right screws to the specified positions.
Pliers Guidance Video
4.1.3 Items to Check after Assembly

Performs the items described below when completing assembly after repairing the printer or replace any parts. Clean the housings and the interior of the engine. Refer to chapter 6. After assembling or adjust the printer, print an engine status sheet to check the counters for the consumables and other parts which need replacing. If any of them is close to its life, replace it with a new one. Check the program ROM version, and update it if necessary. Refer to Section 4.2.3. Print several status sheets and check print quality. Send a few pages of data from the host computer and check for proper functions of the printer.
C A U T IO N
Disassembly and Assembly
Overview
4-318
Revision D
Refer to the followings which explain descriptions used in this chapter. Regarding (PL X, Y, Z) at the end of each heading of removal sections, it corresponds to the numbers in the part list in Appendix. Referring to the numbers, you can find the appearance and location of the parts efficiently. Directions are described as mentioned below. (See Figure 4-1.) Front: Front side viewing the printer toward its front side Back: Rear side viewing the printer toward its front side Left: Left hand side viewing the printer toward its front side Right: Right hand side viewing the printer toward its front side Screws are mentioned with descriptions including (mounting location, color, feature, thread part length, and so on). The number in drawing corresponds to the step number in the section. Secre the screws in the drawings using a Philips screw driver if no instruction is given. If black arrows are shown with numbers, they show the order to act for the step. Refer to Appendix for the connector (P/J) locations and harness routings.
4.2 Disassembly Assembly Procedures

This section describes procedures for disassembling/assembling the printer. Unless otherwise specified, assembly can be performed by reversing the disassembly procedure. In principle, you are to remove all options before servicing. However, you can leave them if possible.
C A U T IO N
Some parts are listed as spare parts but not mentioned in disassembly/assembly procedure. Therefore, look carefully how they are installed before you removing them.
NOTE: Directions used in this section are defined as shown in the figure below: Rear
Left
Right Front
Figure 4-1. Directions
Disassembly Assembly Procedures
4-319

In this procedure, "Press latch A" and "Press latch B" releases the latch that is shown in the below figures.
Revision D
4.2.1 Large capacity paper unit removal

1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove all interface cables from the interface connectors.
W A R N IN G
Be sure to lock both casters before removing the unit from the printer. Otherwise, the unit may move and cause an accident.
3. Remove the standard lower cassette from the printer. 4. Remove the two screws securing the front of the unit to the printer.
Figure 4-2. Large capacity paper unit 1

5. Remove the cover on the back of the standard lower cassette, and remove the two screws securing the back of the unit. Then reattach the cover.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_201FA
4-320

6. Insert the standard lower cassette into the printer. 7. Carefully lift up the printer with two or more people until the holes on the bottom of the printer are free from the five pins on the top of the unit, and place it on a flat stable surface.
Revision D
4.2.2 Removing/Replacing the Consumables

The consumables available (can be replaced by users) for this printer are as shown below. Refer to Chapter 6 for the procedure. TONER CARTRIDGE (Y, M, C, K) PHD ASSY BTR ASSY FUSER ASSY
4.2.3 Updating the Main Controller Program ROM

The program ROM of this printer is a flash ROM module and can be updated in one of the following 2 ways: 1. Transferring the ROM updating program data (*.CRB) from the host computer via the standard parallel interface. 2. Copying the program ROM from the flash ROM module which has the most updated program. Also, when you failed to write the program into the flash ROM and perform the same writing operation again or when you copy the program from the flash ROM module to another flash ROM module. See the following sections for the procedures of each operation.
4.2.3.1 Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface

Follow the instructions below to update the program ROM using a standard parallel interface. NOTE: The personal computer to be used should be able to send binary data from DOS prompt via a parallel interface.
4-321
Revision D
PROCEDURE
1. Print a status sheet, and make sure of current program version. 2. Turn off the printer and the personal computer, and connect an interface to each of them. Be sure to disconnect all interface cables except for the parallel interface cable so the printer will not receive data from any other interfaces. 3. Turn on the printer while pressing the DOWN, JOB CANCEL and START/ STOP buttons. 4. The LCD panel of the printer will indicate the messages as follows: Program Device Ver. xx.xx Please Send Data
4.2.3.2 Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module

Follow the steps below. 1. Set the ROM module in which the program is to be written in the socket A of the CONTROLLER PWB. NOTE: Format this ROM module in the way describe in Section 4.2.3.3. 2. Turn the printer on while pressing the ENTER, JOB CANCEL, and START/ STOP buttons. (Keep the buttons down until proceeding to Step 4.)
RAM CHECK**MB
3. When the RAM CHECK finishes, the printer will enter the program ROM copy mode. The LCD message show below appears.
5. Check that the message Please Send Data is indicated on the LCD panel of the printer. 6. To transfer the program data file from the computer to the printer, type the command (shown below) on the DOS prompt (from the directory that has ****.crb) and press the ENTER key of the computer. copy /b pic****. crb 1ptl 7. The LCD panel of the printer will indicate the message as follow: OLD: xxxx NEW: xxxx 8. Press the ENTER button on the controller panel of the printer. 9. You see the messages changing as follow: Erasing Device PRG FF XXXXC0
ROM Copy Mode Then press the Enter button. You see the message below: DIMM P>A COPYING
4. When the program has been properly updated, the printer enters the Ready status. 5. Turn the printer power off and remove the ROM module from the socket A.
10. When the check sum is indicated on the LCD panel, the program has been downloaded. Then turn the printer off. 11. Turn the printer back on and print a status sheet. Then referring to the status sheet you printed in step 1, check that the program firmware version was updated.
4-322
Revision D
4.2.3.3 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module

Flash ROM module can be formatted as instructed below. 1. Install the ROM module to be formatted to the socket A of the CONTROLLER PWB. NOTE: Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the CONTROLLER PWB as it is. 2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the UP, DOWN, ENTER, and JOB CANCEL buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to release them.
RAM CHECK **MB

When the RAM CHECK finishes, the printer will enter the ROM formatting mode. The LCD message show below appears.
DIMM A ERASING
Release the buttons at this point. The LCD message below appears.
DIMM A ERASING
3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been formatted.
DIMM A ERASED
4-323
Revision D
4.2.4 COVER
4.2.4.1 CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2). (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Remove the HOLDER LEVER OUT. (See Section 4.2.4.3.) 3. Release the 2 hooks securing the CONTROL PANEL (PL.1.1.1) to the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. And then push the upper part of control panel to outside a little bit. 4. Pull up the control panel to direction of allows on the figure, then remove the CONTROL PANEL from the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
Figure 4-5. CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal (1)
Figure 4-6. CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal (2)
4-324
Revision D
4.2.4.2 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2) Removal

1. Press the latch B on the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
C A U T IO N C A U T IO N
Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD in condition without the B latch button being pushed in.
In the following step, the CHUTE ASSY OUT and the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD are kept connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, does not move the CHUTE ASSY OUT and the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD too far from the printer.
2. Free the 2 hooks securing the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD to the CHUTE ASSY OUT and remove the hooks from the upper locations. 3. Move the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD a little way from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J220) on the CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1). 5. Free the HARNESS ASSY DUP (PL7.1.23) from the hooks of the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J137) on the HOLDER LEVER OUT (PL1.1.5). 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. Follow the steps below when assembling the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 1. Press the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 2. Connect the connector (P/J137) of the HOLDER LEVER OUT. 3. Secure the HARNESS ASSY DUP to the hooks of COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 4. Connect the connector of the CONTROL PANEL. 5. Close the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 6. Place the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD over its installation location and press down to set the retaining hooks.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_001FC
Figure 4-7. COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-325
Revision D
4.2.4.3 FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the HOLDER LEVER OUT (PL1.1.5) to the rear of the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 3. Remove the HOLDER LEVER OUT (PL1.1.5) along with the FAN FUSER and the LEVER OUT (PL1.1.7) from the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J137) for the FAN FUSER. 5. Release the 4 hooks securing the FAN FUSER to the HOLDER LEVER OUT. 6. Remove the FAN FUSER from the HOLDER LEVER OUT.
Figure 4-8. FUN FUSER (PL1.1.9) Removal
4-326
Revision D
4.2.4.4 COVER ASSY TOP MAIN (PL1.1.12) Removal

1. Remove the COVER TOP (PL1.1.11) from the printer body. 2. Remove the 4 TONER CARTRIDGES (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1.1, 2,3,4). 3. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL7.1.1). 4. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) from the printer body. 5. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN to the printer body. 6. Release the 2 secured hooks at the back of the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN to the printer body and the hooks at the upper front of COVER SIDE L (PL7.2.1) and COVER SIDE R (PL7.2.2). 7. Lift the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN a short distance from the printer body, and then remove the left side component of the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN as it bends to the left direction. 8. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN from the printer.
Figure 4-9. COVER ASSY TOP MAIN (PL1.1.12) Removal
4-327
Revision D
4.2.4.5 COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from the printer body. 4. Pull out the STUD TOP (PL1.1.29) securing the COVER ASSY TOP PHD at the left and right. 5. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from the printer body.
4.2.4.6 COVER REAR (PL1.1.28) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Lift the COVER REAR a little in the rear direction, then remove the COVER REAR.
Figure 4-10. COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) Removal
Figure 4-11. COVER REAR (PL1.1.28) Removal
4-328
Revision D
4.2.4.7 LINK: L (PL1.2.5) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.8) on the rear of the COVER FRONT IN (PL 1.2.10), then release the boss of the LINK;L. 4. At the left side of the printer body, release the hook of the SPRING LINK: L (PL1.2.4) from the convex surface. 5. Slide the LINK: L toward the rear of the printer, then align the axle of the printer body with the hole of the LINK: L. 6. Remove the LINK: L along with the SPRING LINK: L from the printer body. 7. Remove the SPRING LINK: L from the LINK: L.
C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.4.8 LINK: R (PL1.2.5) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.9) on the rear of the CONVER FRONT (PL 1.2.9), then release the boss of the LINK;R. 4. At the right side of the printer, pull out the hook of the SPRING LINK: R (PL1.2.4) from the convex surface. 5. Slide the LINK: R toward the rear of the printer, then align the axle of the printer body with the hole of the LINK: R. 6. Remove the LINK: R along with the SPRING LINK: R from the printer body. 7. Remove the SPRING LINK: R from the LINK: R.
C H E C K P O IN T
It is better to Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK by using the small screwdriver.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_109FB
Figure 4-12. LINK: L (PL1.2.5) Removal
Figure 4-13. LINK: R (PL1.2.5) Removal 4-329
Revision D
4.2.4.9 COVER SIDE R (PL1.2.2) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the 1 screw (silver, with a brim, 8mm) securing the COVER SIDE R to the rear of the printer body. 3. Release the 1 hook securing the front side of the COVER SIDE R.
C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.4.10 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.2.6) Removal

1. Release the latch A and open CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) and CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 2. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the COVER ASSY FRONT to the CHUTE ASSY IN . 3. Close the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 4. Release the latch B and open CHUTE ASSY OUT. 5. Pull the COVER ASSY FRONT a little ways from the CHUTE ASSY IN. 6. Release the boss at the front of the LINK:R (PL 1.2.5) with spreading the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.8) at the back of the COVER ASSY FRONT. Then remove the COVER ASSY FRONT.
C H E C K P O IN T
In the next procedure, it is easy to remove by moving the front of the COVER SIDE R with pushing and spreading COVER ASSY FRONT (PL 1.2.6) to outside a little bit.
4. Lift the upper part of the COVER SIDE R while pulling it to the right, then remove it from the printer body.
LINK R
Figure 4-14. COVER SIDE R (PL1.2.2) Removal Disassembly and Assembly
Figure 4-15. COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.2.6) Removal
4-330
Revision D
4.2.4.11 COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) Removal

1. Open the COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) from the front side of printer body. 2. While allowing the left side of the COVER MSI left side elongated hole section to bend, pull out the reinforced portion of the TRAY ASSY MSI (PL7.2.12) of the elongated hole section. 3. Pull the reinforced portion of the TRAY ASSY MSI from the COVER MSI right side elongated hole section. 4. While lowering the front edge of the COVER MSI, pull the COVER MSI toward the front and remove it.
4.2.4.12 TRAY ASSY MSI (PL1.2.12) Removal

1. Open the COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) from the printer body. 2. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 3. Open the TRAY ASSY MSI, slide the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) inward then lift it up to avoid the left and right mounting pieces and remove the plate.
Figure 4-17. TRAY ASSY MSI (PL1.2.12) Removal

Figure 4-16. COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) Removal
4-331
Revision D
4.2.4.13 COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL1.2.10) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 3. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 5. Release the reinforced portion at the front of the LINK: L (PL1.2.5) from the back panel of the COVER ASSY FRONT. 6. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the COVER ASSY FRONT IN to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 7. Release the 2 hooks securing the COVER ASSY FRONT IN to the CHUTE ASSY OUT, and remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN.
C H E C K P O IN T
Figure 4-18. COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL1.2.10) Removal
4-332
Revision D
4.2.4.14 COVER SIDE L (PL1.2.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the 1 screw (silver, with a brim, 8mm) securing the COVER SIDE L to the rear side of the printer body. 3. Release the 1 hook securing the front side of the COVER SIDE L.
C H E C K P O IN T
In the next procedure, it is easy to remove by moving the front of the COVER SIDE L with pushing and spreading COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL 1.2.10) to outside a little bit.
4. Remove the COVER SIDE L from the printer body.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_007FD
Figure 4-19. COVER SIDE L (PL1.2.1) Removal
4-333
Revision D
4.2.5 CHASIS & FEEDER/CASSETTE

4.2.5.1 FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3) Removal
1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 4. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 5. Remove the COVER CASSETTE REAR. (See Section 4.2.7.2.) 6. Move the shaft socket of the LINK ACTUATOR secured to the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.6) away from the FEEDER parts, the let the shaft of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER come free. 7. Pull out the LINK ACTUATOR of the hole of the FEEDER part and remove it. 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J2361) used to connect the printer body and the FEEDER ASSY from the left side surface of the printer body. 9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) that connect the printer body and FEEDER ASSY from the right side surface of the printer body. 10. Disconnect the connector (P/J47) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the right side surface of the printer body. 11. Remove the 8 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the FEEDER ASSY to the printer body.
C A U T IO N
J47
P/J2361
P/J210 FEEDER ASSY
When performing the following step, the 1 screw (L85) (PL4.1.13) at the left side of the FEEDER ASSY can scrape against the printer body housing as it is being removed, so it is better to also remove the other 3 long screws and hold the body parts to the side while removing the FEEDER ASSY. When performing the following step, the Washer (PL4.1.14) can easily fall out, so this may be prevented by using a punch or other tool to hold the washer while removing the part or by using a screwdriver with a strong magnetic tip.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_008FE
Figure 4-20. FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3) Removal
12. Remove the 4 screws (L85) with a washer securing the FEEDER ASSY to the printer body.
4-334
Revision D
W A R N IN G
Lifting the upper unit of the printer body should be done by 2 people.
C A U T IO N
When removing the FEEDER ASSY from the printer body upper unit, be careful not to drop the upper unit or damage the components. When lifting the printer body, remove it by allowing the left side HARNESS ASSY TEMP B (PL15.2.12) and right side HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN (PL15.2.8) and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER (PL4.3.28) to come free of the square holes in the printers main frame.
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. When the FEEDER ASSY is placed on the upper unit of the printer body, do not constrict the left side HARNESS ASSY TEMP B and right side HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER.
4-335
Revision D
4.2.5.2 STRAP (PL2.1.8) Removal

1. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 2. Release the hook securing the STRAP lower section from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, then slide the STRAP lower section to the right and remove it. 3. Let the STRAP upper section securing the upper right section of the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) rotate, align the keyhole of the CHUTE ASSY IN with the convex surface, remove the STRAP upper section, then remove the STRAP.
4.2.6 PAPER CASSETTE

4.2.6.1 ROLL ASSY (PL3.1.6) Removal
1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Release the 1 hook securing the CHUTE RETARD (PL3.1.5) to the CASSETTE and open the CHUTE RETARD. 3. Release the 1 hook securing the ROLL ASSY to the SHAFT RETARD from the CASSETTE. 4. Pull out the ROLL ASSY from the SHAFT RETARD.
I
2 1
Figure 4-22. ROLL ASSY (PL3.1.6) Removal
Figure 4-21. STRAP (PL2.1.8) Removal
4-336
Revision D
4.2.6.2 HOLDER RETARD (PL3.1.9) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.6.3.) 3. Remove the ROLL ASSY. (See Section 4.2.6.1.) 4. Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION 400 (PL3.1.7) on the SHAFT RETARD from the CASSETTE. 5. Release the hook of the SPRING RETARD (PL3.1.10) hanging from the channel of the lower portion of the HOLDER RETARD from the CASSETTE. 6. Release the 1 hook securing the upper portion of the HOLDER RETARD to the CASSETTE, and let the HOLDER RETARD shift to the left. 7. After moving the right end of the HOLDER RETARD away from the CASSETTE toward the front, remove the HOLDER RETARD by pulling it out.
4.2.6.3 CASSETTE ASSY FRONT (REFERENCE ONLY) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. From the right side of the CASSETTE, release the upper and lower section hooks securing the CHUTE CASSETTE (PL3.1.2) with a tool like a small screwdriver. 3. From the left side of the CASSETTE, release the upper and lower section hooks securing the CHUTE CASSETTE with a tool like a small screwdriver. 4. Pull out the CHUTE CASSETTE along with the HANDLE CASSETTE (PL3.1.1) from the CASSETTE.
Figure 4-23. HOLDER RETARD (PL3.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-24. CASSETTE ASSY FRONT Removal
4-337
Revision D
4.2.7 PAPER FEEDER

4.2.7.1 CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL4.1.6) Removal
1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Release the 2 hooks securing the CHUTE ASSY TURN to the printer body FEEDER. 3. Let the rear axle of the CHUTE ASSY TURN rotate 90 degrees upward. 4. Release the hooks securing the left and right shaft sections of the CHUTE ASSY TURN to the printer body FEEDER. 5. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY TURN toward the front and remove it from the printer body FEEDER.
4.2.7.2 COVER CASSETTE REAR (PL4.1.3) Removal

1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY REAR from the back of the printer body by letting it revolve upward as it is pulled in this direction.
Figure 4-26. COVER CASSETTE REAR (PL4.1.3) Removal
Figure 4-25. CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL4.1.6) Removal
4-338
Revision D
4.2.7.3 HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-27. HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-339
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY.
C H E C K P O IN T
In case of removing the HOUSING FDR L as a unit, removing the SENSOR HUM TEMP is not necessary.
14. Remove the SENSOR HUM TEMP. (See Section 4.2.7.5.) 15. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.7.1.) 16. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 17. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HOUSING FDR L to the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM (PL4.1.5). 18. Move the HOUSING FDR L toward the interior, and remove the 3 hooks from the holes in the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM. 19. Remove the HOUSING FDR L upward from the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM.
4-340
Revision D
4.2.7.4 HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-28. HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-341
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY.
C H E C K P O IN T
In case of removing the HOUSING FDR R as a unit, removing the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 is not necessary.
14. Remove the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1. (See Section 4.2.7.5.) 15. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.7.1.) 16. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 17. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HOUSING FDR R from the base of the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM (PL4.1.5). 18. Move the HOUSING FDR R toward the interior, and remove the 3 hooks from the holes in the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM. 19. Remove the HOUSING FDR R upward from the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM.
4-342
Revision D
4.2.7.5 SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) Removal

W A R N IN G
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SENSOR HUM TEMP to the HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) and remove the SENOR HUM TEMP along with the HARNESS ASSY TMPA (PL4.2.3). 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J231) on the SENSOR HUM TEMP and remove the HARNESS ASSY TMPA.
Figure 4-29. SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-343
Revision D
4.2.7.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (PL4.2.9) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-30. HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (PL4.2.9) Removal
4-344
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC from the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3). 15. Release the 2 hooks securing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC to the HOUSING FDR R. 16. Remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC by pulling it downward from the HOUSING FDR R.
4-345
Revision D
4.2.7.7 SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) Removal

Figure 4-31. SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) Removal

C A U T IO N
4-346
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 from the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3) and remove the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 from the HOUSING FDR R. 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J471) on the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1.
4-347
Revision D
4.2.7.8 LEVER LOW PAPER (PL4.2.10)

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-32. LEVER LOW PAPER (PL4.2.10) Removal
4-348
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the INDICATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.9.) 15. Remove the GUIDE INDICATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.10.) 16. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 17. Remove the HOUSING FDR R. (See Section 4.2.7.4.) 18. Shift the shaft socket of the HOUSING FDR R secured to right side shafts of the LEVER LOW PAPER away from lower surface of the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2), then release the right side shafts. 19. From the left side of the HOUSING FDR R, insert the actuator of the LEVER LOW PAPER into the HOUSING FDR R. 20. From the upper surface of the HOUSING FDR R, position the LEVER LOW PAPER so that it is perpendicular, then remove it in an upward direction.
4-349
Revision D
4.2.7.9 INDICATOR (PL4.2.11) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-33. INDICATOR (PL4.2.11) Removal
4-350
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. From the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3), grab the front end of the INDICATOR with needle nose pliers and pull out the INDICATOR. When installing the INDICATOR, do so while pressing on the GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13).
4-351
Revision D
4.2.7.10 GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-34. GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13) Removal
4-352
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the INDUCATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.9.) 15. Release the 2 hooks securing the HOLDER L-PAPER (PL4.2.12) to the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3). 16. Pull out the GUIDE INDICATOR along with the SPRING INDICATOR (PL4.2.14) and the SHAFT INDICATOR (PL4.2.15) from the HOUSING FDR R. 17. Pull out the GUIDE INDICATOR from the SHAFT INDICATOR. When ready to install the GUIDE INDICATOR, let the front end of the LEVER LOW PAPER ride on the convex portion on the left side of the GUIDE INDICATOR. Install the HOLDER L PAPER in the direction from which the corner drops down.
4-353
Revision D
4.2.7.11 PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-35. PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1) Removal
4-354
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Disconnect the connector (P/J471) for the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8). 15. Release the PICKUP ASSY harness from the hook at the right side of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3). 16. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PICKUP ASSY from the FEEDER ASSY. 17. Lift the PICKUP ASSY upward and remove it from the FEEDER ASSY.
4-355
Revision D
4.2.7.12 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. From the FEEDER, let the SHAFT FEED 1 (PL4.3.2) rotate so that the rubber part of the ROLL ASSY FEED faces downward. 3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward and remove it from SHAFT FEED 1. Install the ROLL ASSY FEED from either side.
Figure 4-36. ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3) Removal
4-356
Revision D
4.2.7.13 SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P) (PL4.3.4) Removal

C A U T IO N
RIGHT
LEFT
TOP
Figure 4-37. SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P) (PL4.3.4) Removal
4-357
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. (See Section 4.2.7.15.) 16. Disconnect the connector (P/J472) on the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P). 17. Release the hooks securing the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P) from the PICKUP ASSY, and remove the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER.
4-358
Revision D
4.2.7.14 SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P) (PL4.3.4) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-38. SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P) (PL4.3.3) Removal
4-359
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J473) on the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P). 16. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P) to the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), and remove the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER(Tray1 L/P) from the PICKUP ASSY.
4-360
Revision D
4.2.7.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.5) Removal

C A U T IO N
RIGHT
TOP LEFT HANABI_BE_CHAP03_139FA
Figure 4-39. ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.5) Removal
4-361
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Place the PICKUP ASSY on the workbench with its bottom surface facing upward. 16. Open toward the front and release the 1 hook securing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), then remove the shaft part at the left side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. 17. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the PICKUP ASSY by pulling it the upper left direction.
4-362
Revision D
4.2.7.16 LINK ACTUATOR (PL4.3.6) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Open the front section of the LINK ACTUATOR to the left and right, and release the LINK ACTUATOR bracket from shaft of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.5). 3. Shift the LINK ACTUATOR to the front and pull out it of the holes on the printer body, then remove the LINK ACTUATOR.
Figure 4-40. LINK ACTUATOR (PL4.3.6) Removal
4-363
Revision D
4.2.7.17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-41. SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17) Removal
4-364
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J474) of SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 from the PICKUP ASSY, and free the SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 harness from the PICKUP ASSY. 16. Remove the 1 screw (gold, 4mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 from the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1).
4-365
Revision D
4.2.7.18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-42. CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18) Removal
4-366
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Disconnect the intermadiate connector (P/J475) of CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 from the PICKUP ASSY. 16. Release the 1 hook securing the STOPPER CLUTCH (PL4.3.16) to the shaft at the left side of the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), then shift it to the left and remove it. 17. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 from the shaft at the left side of the PICKUP ASSY.
4-367
Revision D
4.2.7.19 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21) Removal

C A U T IO N
Figure 4-43. ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21) Removal
4-368
Revision D
W A R N IN G
C A U T IO N
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY. 14. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.) 15. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1. (See Section 4.2.7.18.) 16. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR FEED 2 (PL4.3.13) to the shaft of the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), the remove GEAR FEED 2. 17. Remove the GEAR IDLER (PL4.3.15) from the shaft of the PICKUP ASSY. 18. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN (PL4.3.19) from the shaft of the PICKUP ASSY. 19. Remove the left and right E-rings securing the shaft of the ROLL ASSY TURN to the PICKUP ASSY. 20. Remove the BEARING (PL4.3.7) securing the shaft at the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the PICKUP ASSY. 21. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE (PL4.3.22) securing the shaft at the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the PICKUP ASSY. 22. From the PICKUP ASSY, let the ROLL ASSY TURN slide to the left, remove the left end of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the shaft socket hole, then remove the ROLL ASSY TURN by pulling it up and to the left.
4-369
Revision D

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2. Release the 1 hook securing the ROLL ASSY to SHAFT FEED 2 (PL4.3.23) from the FEEDER. 3. Remove the ROLL ASSY to the left side, away from SHAFT FEED 2.
4-370
Revision D
4.2.8 HOUSING ASSY RETARD

4.2.8.1 HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) Removal
1. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Disconnect the connector (P/J19 ) of CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) from the upper part of PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2), then free the harness from clamp of CHASSIS MAIN (PL2.1.9).
C A U T IO N
When operating the following procedures, operate holding the FRONT COVER by hand.
FRONT
LINK L
3. Release the hooks of the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL1.7, 1.8) side of the LINK (PL1.2.5). 4. Remove the 3 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the HOUSING ASSY RETARD to the printer body. 5. Lift the HOUSING ASSY RETARD to the left, and remove the CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) by shifting it to the left and pulling it from the CHASSIS MAIN. If the HOUSING ASSY RETARD will not go in easily, pull it to the left side a little and let it fall in.
LINK R
Figure 4-45. HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) Removal
4-371
Revision D
4.2.8.2 ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) Removal

1. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.) 3. Remove the CLUTCH TURN MSI. (See Section 4.2.8.4.) 4. Remove the E-ring securing the left side of the ROLL TURN to the HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1). 5. Remove the BEARING EARTH (PL5.1.13) securing the shaft at the left side of the ROLL TURN from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. 6. Remove the BEARING RUBBER R (PL5.1.13) set on the shaft at the right side of the ROLL TURN from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. 7. From the HOUSING ASSY RETARD, let the ROLL TURN slide to the right, remove the shaft on the left side of the ROLL TURN from the shaft socket hole, then remove the ROLL TURN upward and to the left.
Figure 4-46. ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) Removal
4-372
Revision D
4.2.8.3 ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal

1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL5.1.1). 2. Hold the front end of the HOLDER RETARD (PL5.1.6) of the upper part of the HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1), and let the HOLDER RETARD rotate toward the rear. 3. Let the HOLDER RETARD slide to the right, then remove the shaft at the left side of the HOLDER RETARD from the shaft socket hole of the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. 4. Pull the HOLDER RETARD upward to the left, out of the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. 5. Release the 1 hook securing the right side of SHAFT RTD (PL5.1.3) to the HOLDER RETARD. 6. While holding the SHAFT RTD upward to the right side, remove the SHAFT RTD along with the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION (PL5.1.4). 7. Pull the SHAFT RTD from the ROLL ASSY RETARD.
Figure 4-47. ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal (1)
Figure 4-48. ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal (2)
4-373
Revision D
4.2.8.4 CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) Removal

1. Remove out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.) 3. Remove the E-ring securing the CLUTCH TURN MSI to the shaft of the ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). 4. Remove out the CLUTCH TURN MSI from the shaft of the ROLL TURN.
4.2.8.5 STUD RETARD (PL5.1.10) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.) 3. Release the 2 hooks securing the CAP RETARD (PL5.1.12) to the convex part of the lower section of the HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1). 4. Remove the CAP RETARD along with the STAD RETARD and the SPRING RETARD 390 (PL5.1.11) from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. 5. Remove the STAD RETARD from the CAP RETARD.
Figure 4-49. CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-50. STUD RETARD (PL5.1.10) Removal
4-374
Revision D
4.2.9 CHUTE ASSY IN

4.2.9.1 CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 5. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 6. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 8. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 9. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 10. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT. (See Section 4.2.10.1.)
C A U T IO N
J138 J5020 J1361 J141 J5030
Before performing the following step, lock the printer body with latch A in order to prevent the CHUTE ASSY IN from falling.
J52
12. Disconnect the connector (P/J5030) and the connector (P/J5020) on the HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) from the printer body left side. 13. Disconnect the connector (P/J141), connector (P/J1361) and connector (P/ J138) from the connector bracket of the printer body left side. 14. Free the connector harness that was removed by the instructions above from the lower part of the HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) of the printer body left side. 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J52) on the HWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the printer body right side. 16. Disconnect the connector (P/J162) on the LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the printer body right side.
J162
Figure 4-51. CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal (1) Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-375

17. Remove the 1 screw securing the WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH to the printer body right side. 18. Free the harness (J52) of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) from the upper clamp of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). 19. Free the HARNESS ASSY FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) from the hook on the housing at the printer body right side. 20. Release latch A of the printer body, then remove the CHUTE ASSY IN by pulling it up and out.
Revision D
Figure 4-52. CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal (2)
4-376
Revision D
4.2.9.2 SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) Removal

1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.) 3. Lift the SENSOR ASSY ADC a little way from the CHUTE ASSY IN, and disconnect the connector (P/J136). 4. Release the 4 hooks securing the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the CHUTE ASSY IN of the printer body. 5. Remove the SENSOR ASSY ADC along with the SPRING ADC (PL6.1.12) from the CHUTE ASSY IN. 6. Remove the SPRING ADC from the SENSOR ASSY ADC.
4.2.9.3 SENSOR TONER FULL (PL6.1.13) Removal

1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.)
C H E C K P O IN T
In the next step, it may help to insert a screwdriver into the upper part of the connector when removing the hook from the right side. (See illustration.)
3. Release the 2 hooks securing the left and right sides of the SENSOR TONER FULL to the CHUTE ASSY IN by using a tool such as a small screwdriver. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J142) on the SENSOR TONER FULL. 5. Remove the SENSOR TONER FULL from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
Figure 4-53. SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) Removal
Figure 4-54. SENSOR TONER FULL (PL6.1.13) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-377
Revision D
4.2.9.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 4. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 5. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 6. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 6mm) securing the WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH (PL6.1.20) to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER. 8. Remove the 1 screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 6mm) securing the wire to the upper part of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). 9. Free the harness (J52) between the DRIVE ASSY DEVE and CHUTE ASSY IN from clamps and the housing. 10. Remove the LATCH R. (See Section 4.2.9.5.) 11. Remove the 3 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY IN. 12. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FUSER from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
Figure 4-55. DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) Removal
4-378
Revision D
4.2.9.5 LATCH R (PL6.1.21) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 3. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 4. Release the hook of the lower SPRING LATCH 1.2 kgf (PL6.1.22) secured to the hole in the right side of the CHUTE ASSY IN. 5. Release the 1 hook attaching the LATCH R to the CHUTE ASSY IN by pressing downward on it with a screwdriver. 6. Pull out the LATCH R along with the SHAFT LATCH (PL6.1.23) and the SPRING LATCH 1.2kgf from the CHUTE ASSY IN. 7. Remove the SPRING LATCH 1.2kgf from the LATCH R. 8. Pull out the SHAFT LATCH from the LATCH R.
4.2.9.6 LATCH L (PL6.1.30) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL6.1.1). 3. Release LATCH A, open CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1), release 1 hook of LATCH L so it avoids LINK:L (PL1.2.5), then remove LATCH L to the left.
C H E C K P O IN T
If LATCH L is hard to remove from the SHAFT LATCH (PL6.1.23), remove the SHAFT LATCH then separate the parts.
Figure 4-56. LUTCH R (PL6.1.21) Removal
Figure 4-57. LATCH L (PL6.1.30) Removal
4-379
Revision D
4.2.10 CHUTE ASSY OUT

4.2.10.1 CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 4. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 5. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 8. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 9. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 10. Remove the STRAP. (See Section 4.2.5.2.)
C A U T IO N
J221 J139
When performing the following step, prevent parts from falling by locking CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) and CHUTE ASSY OUT to the printer body with latches A and B.
11. Disconnect the connector (P/J221) from the connector bracket of the printer body left side. 12. Disconnect the connector (P/J139) from the connector bracket of the printer body left side. 13. Remove the TCRU ASSY earth screw (gold, tapped, 10mm), then release the harness from the printer body left side. 14. From the bottom of the HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) at the printer body left side, release the HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS (PL7.1.3) removed at Step 11 and the HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2 (PL7.1.2) removed at Step 12. 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J50) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the printer body right side. 16. Free the HARNESS ASSY DUP (PL7.1.23) from the printer body right side.
J50
Figure 4-58. CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal-1
4-380

17. Remove the upper E-rings at the left and right of the SHAFT PIVOT (PL6.1.1) securing the lower portion of the CHUTE ASSY OUT to the printer body.
W A R N IN G
Revision D
When performing the following step, be careful not to cut your hands on sharp edges of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42).
18. Release LATCH B, open CHUTE ASSY OUT, use a finger to rotate the rubber surface of the ROLL ASSY FEED rearward, then use needle-nosed pliers to remove the left side SHAFT PIVOT from the CHUTE ASSY OUT toward the interior. 19. Use needle nose pliers to pull the right side of the SHAFT PIVOT toward the interior from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 20. Release latch B of the printer body, then remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT by pulling it up and out.
Figure 4-59. CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal-2
4-381
Revision D
4.2.10.2 SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. (See Section 4.2.10.3.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 4. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J134) of the SENSOR PAPER (FULL STACK) from the upper part of the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) on the printer body.
4.2.10.3 ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Move the shaft of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK away from the upper part of the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) on the printer body,then pull out the shaft of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK of the shaft socket hole on the left side of the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 3. Free the actuator of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK from the hole in the center of the CHUTE ASSY OUT, then remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK from the CHUTE ASSY OUT by pulling it upward.
Figure 4-61. ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) Removal Figure 4-60. SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4) Removal
4-382
Revision D
4.2.10.4 SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the ACTUATOR DUP. (See Section 4.2.10.8.) 7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 8. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT and disconnect the connector (P/J133).
4.2.10.5 SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) (PL7.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the ACTUATOR MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.11.) 7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 8. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 9. Disconnect the connector (P/J135) on the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P).
Figure 4-62. SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4) Removal
Figure 4-63. SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) (PL7.1.4) Removal
4-383
Revision D
4.2.10.6 ELIMINATOR ASSY (PL7.1.9) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Remove the 1 screw securing the ELIMINATOR ASSY to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 3. After lifting the left end of the ELIMINATOR ASSY rearwards away from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, remove the ELIMINATOR ASSY by pulling it out to the left.
4.2.10.7 ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Release the 1 hook of GEAR 30 (PL7.1.10) secured to upper shaft of the ROLL DUP from the CHUTE ASSY OUT of the printer body. 7. Remove the GEAR 30 from the shaft of ROLL DUP. 8. Remove the BEARING EARTH (PL7.1.11) securing the left side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 9. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 10. Remove the BEARING (PL7.1.16) securing the right side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 11. Lift the right side of the ROLL DUP shaft upward and away from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, free it from the shaft socket, then remove the ROLL DUP.
Figure 4-64. ELIMINATOR ASSY (PL7.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-65. ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12) Removal
4-384
Revision D
4.2.10.8 ACTUATOR DUP (PL7.1.13) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Release the 2 hooks securing the COVER ACTUATOR (PL7.1.14) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) of the printer body.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to interfer with SPRING DUP.
7. Remove the COVER ACTUATOR from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 8. While pushing the actuator of the ACTUATOR DUP down into the interior and away from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, let the ACTUATOR DUP slide to the left, then pull out the ACTUATOR DUP right side shaft of the right side shaft socket. 9. Pull out the ACTUATOR DUP along with the SPRING SNR DUP (PL7.1.15) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 10. Remove the SPRING SNR DUP from the ACTUATOR DUP.
Figure 4-66. ACTUATOR DUP (PL7.1.13) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-385
Revision D
4.2.10.9 LATCH OUT (PL7.1.18) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the SPRING LATCH OUT (PL7.1.20) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) of the printer body. 7. Release the 2 back side hooks securing the HOLDER LATCH (PL7.1.19) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 8. Remove the HOLDER LATCH along with the LATCH OUT from the CHUTE ASSY OUT by pulling it to the right side. 9. Remove the LATCH OUT from the HOULDER LATCH.
Figure 4-67. LATCH OUT (PL7.1.18) Removal
4-386
Revision D

1. Release the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 2. While watching from slit of the CHUTE ASSY OUT, release the 1 hook securing the ROLL CORE MSI: RIGHT (PL7.1.26) to the SHAFT MSI (PL7.1.28) above the CHUTE ASSY OUT from the printer body. 3. Push the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) above the CHUTE ASSY OUT downward from the printer body, and then release the nipple of the ROLL ASSY FEED. 4. Let the ROLL ASSY FEED slide to the right away from the SHAFT MSI, then remove the ROLL ASSY FEED outward.
REAR
C A U T IO N
Be careful of the installation direction of the ROLL ASSY FEED during assembly. Installation in the wrong direction can cause problems with functions such as paper feeding. See Figure 4-69.
REAR
FRONT
Figure 4-69. ROLL ASSY FEED Assemble
4-387
Revision D
4.2.10.11 ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. While pressing the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) above the CHUTE ASSY OUT downward, push the actuator of the ACTUATOR MSI toward the interior. Then release the actuator of the ACTUATOR MSI from the hole in the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. 7. Let the ACTUATOR MSI slide to the left away from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, then remove the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR MSI. 8. Let the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR MSI shift outward from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, then pull out the ACTUATOR MSI with the SPRING SENSOR MSI (PL7.1.36). 9. Remove the SPRING SENSOR MSI from the ACTUATOR MSI.
Figure 4-70. ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) Removal
4-388
Revision D
4.2.10.12 SOLENID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 4. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 5. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 8. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 9. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 10. Remove the STRAP. (See Section 4.2.5.2.) 11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT. (See Section 4.2.10.1.) 12. Release the hook of the SPRING SOL 0.5 (PL7.1.39) hanging from the convex part above the STOPPER SOL (PL7.1.38) from the right side of the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 13. Disconnect the connector (P/J132) of the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED MSI to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 15. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
Figure 4-71. SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40) Removal
4-389
Revision D
.
4.2.10.13 SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED (REFERENCE ONLY) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 4. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 5. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 8. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 9. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 10. Remove the STRAP. (See Section 4.2.5.2.) 11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT. (See Section 4.2.10.1.) 12. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.12.) 13. Release each single hook of the CAM MSI (PL7.1.25) secured to the SHAFT MSI (PL7.1.28), then shift the CAM MSI toward the interior. 14. Release the hook of the SPRING SOL 0.5 (PL7.1.39) hanging from the convex part above the STOPPER SOL (PL7.1.38). 15. Release the 1 hook securing the STOPPER SOL to the left side shaft of the SHAFT MSI, then remove the STOPPER SOL from the shaft. 16. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR MSI (PL7.1.22) to the right side shaft of the SHAFT MSI, then remove the GEAR MSI from the shaft. 17. Release the SPRING N/F MSI hooks from the right and left sides shaft of the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED. 18. Remove the BEARING MSI (PL7.1.24) above the SHAFT MSI toward the interior and out of the CHUTE ASSY OUT shaft socket. 19. Lift the right end of the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED, then pull out the SHAFT ASSY FEED of the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
Figure 4-72. SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED (REFERENCE ONLY) Removal
4-390
Revision D
4.2.10.14 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 4. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 5. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 8. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 9. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 10. Remove the STRAP. (See Section 4.2.5.2.) 11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT. (See Section 4.2.10.1.) 12. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.12.) 13. Remove the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED. (See Section 4.2.10.13.) 14. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE OUT MSI (PL7.1.35) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, release the actuator of the ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) from the hole in the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42).
Figure 4-73. PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) Removal
15. Remove the PLATE OUT MSI along with the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI from the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 16. Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI from the PLATE OUT MSI.
4-391
Revision D
4.2.11 CHUTE ASSY EXIT

4.2.11.1 CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J131) of the MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) from above the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 7. From the CHUTE ASSY OUT, release the harness of the MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) in the direction of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 8. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CHUTE ASSY EXIT to the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 9. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT from the left side surface of the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
When installing the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, do not jam the ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) above the CHUTE ASSY OUT in the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4).
Figure 4-74. CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) Removal
4-392
Revision D
4.2.11.2 ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. (See Section 4.2.11.1.) 7. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL (PL8.1.2) to the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT. 8. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT. 9. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL8.1.3) from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 10. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 11. Pull out the BEARING (PL8.1.7) from the right side shaft of the ROLL EXIT. 12. From the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, lift the right side shaft of the ROLL EXIT upward, then remove the ROLL EXIT to the right and upward.
Figure 4-75. ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4) Removal
4-393
Revision D
4.2.11.3 ROLL MID (PL8.1.5) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. (See Section 4.2.11.1.) 7. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL (PL8.1.2) to the left side shaft of the ROLL MID. 8. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL MID. 9. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL8.1.3) from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 10. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL MID to the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 11. Pull out the BEARING (PL8.1.7) from the right side shaft of the ROLL MID. 12. From the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, lift the right side shaft of the ROLL MID upward, then remove the ROLL MID to the right and upward.
Figure 4-76. ROLL MID (PL8.1.5) Removal
4-394
Revision D
4.2.11.4 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. (See Section 4.2.11.1.) 7. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL (PL8.1.2) to the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4). 8. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT. 9. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL to the left side shaft of the ROLL MID (PL8.1.5). 10. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT. 11. Remove the GEAR 40/42 (PL8.1.12) from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT left side. 12. Remove the GEAR 48 (PL8.1.13) from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT left side. 13. Remove the 2 screws securing the MOTOR ASSY DUP to the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. 14. Remove the MOTOR ASSY DUP from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
Figure 4-77. MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) Removal
4-395
Revision D
4.2.12 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY

4.2.12.1 FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) Removal
W A R N IN G
The FUSER is very hot, so to avoid burns use great caution when it is operating.
1. Release the latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL7.1.1). 2. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) from the printer body. 3. Close the CHUTE ASSY IN. 4. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 5. Release the 2 lock of right and left side on the FUSER ASSY upper side. 6. Remove the FUSER ASSY from the printer body.
Figure 4-78. FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) Removal
4-396
Revision D
4.2.12.2 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Removal

1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 2. Release the lock by pinching the left and right side latches that secure the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) to the CHUTE ASSY IN of the printer body, then let the BTR ASSY rotate rearward. 3. Pull out the BTR ASSY toward the front and remove it from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
Figure 4-79. BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-397
Revision D
4.2.13 REGISTRATION
4.2.13.1 CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) Removal
1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1). 2. Release the 2 hooks securing the HOUSING ASSY ELEC (PL10.1.23), then remove the HOUSING ASSY ELEC upward. 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J18) of the CHUTE ASSY REGI from the printer body. 4. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CHUTE ASSY REGI to the printer body. 5. After lifting the left end of the CHUTE ASSY REGI upward, remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI from the printer body by pulling it to the left. While carefully watching the MYLAR insertion, install the CHUTE ASSY REGI by lowering it straight down. (See Figure 4-80)
Figure 4-80. CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) Removal
4-398
Revision D
4.2.13.2 SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the ACTUATOR REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.3.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J181) on the SENSOR REGI. 4. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 5. Remove the SENSOR REGI from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
4.2.13.3 ACTUATOR REGI (PL10.1.21) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Grasp the screen of the ACTUATOR REGI, let the ACTUATOR REGI shift to the left side, then remove the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI from the shaft socket on the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 3. Pull out the ACTUATOR REGI along with the SPRING SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.22) from the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 4. Remove the SPRING SENSOR REGI from the ACTUATOR REGI.
Figure 4-82. ACTUATOR REGI (PL10.1.21) Removal
Figure 4-81. SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-399
Revision D
4.2.13.4 SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the E-ring securing the GEAR REGI METAL (PL10.1.3), then pull out the GEAR REGI METAL from the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL (PL10.1.9). 3. Remove the E-ring securing the GEAR REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.2), then pull out the GEAR REGI RUBBER from the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER. 4. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL10.1.4) securing the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.10) on the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful that the SPRING REGI:R and SPRING REGI:L do not jump away and become lost.
5. Using a tool like a screwdriver, remove the SPRING REGI: R (PL10.1.8) from the left side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 6. Using a tool like a screwdriver, remove the SPRING REGI: L (PL10.1.8) from the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 7. Remove the 1 screw securing the PLATE SIDE REGI (PL10.1.6) from the left side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 8. Pull out the BEARING METAL L (PL10.1.7) (black) securing the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL (PL10.1.9) on the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
Figure 4-83. SENSOR OHP REGI (PL10.1.16) Removal (1)
4-400

9. Lift up the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL from the CHUTE ASSY REGI, and pull out the ROLL REGI METAL along with the right side shaft of the BEARING METAL R (PL10.1.11) (white). 10. Release the 2 hooks of the lower CHUTE ASSY REGI securing the SENSOR OHP from the CHUTE ASSY REGI. 11. Remove the SENSOR OHP from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
Revision D
Figure 4-84. SENSOR OHP REGI (PL10.1.16) Removal (2)
4-401
Revision D
4.2.14 XEROGRAPHICS
4.2.14.1 ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J151) on the ROS ASSY. 6. Release the SPRING ROS (PL11.1.2) hooks securing the left and right sides shaft of the ROS ASSY from the printer body. 7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the ROS ASSY to the printer body. 8. Remove the ROS ASSY from the printer body. When installing the ROSS ASSY, carry out the following pocedure.
1. Align the ROS ASSY in the position for installation on the printer body. 2. Secure the left and right sides shaft of the ROS ASSY to the printer body by using the hooks on the upper part of the SPRING ROS. 3. Secure the ROSS ASSY with the 1 screw to the printer. 4. Connect the connector (P/J151) to the ROS ASSY. 5. Install the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 6. Install the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 7. Install the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 8. Install the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.)
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-85. ROSS ASSY (PL11.1.1) Removal
When removing the ROS ASSY, perform color registration adjustment without fail. (Refer to Section 6.5)
4-402
Revision D
4.2.14.2 HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the LINK: L. (See Section 4.2.4.7.) 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020, P/J5030) on the HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9), and remove the WIRE ASSY BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and WIRE ASSY DTSK (PL6.1.5) from the 4 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS. 5. Disconnect the connectors (P/J141, P/J1361, P/J71, P/J221, P/J139) on the BRACKET CONNECTOR (PL15.1.16), and remove the HARNESS ASSY TFLSNS (PL6.1.14), the HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1 (PL15.2.7), the HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (PL15.2.10) and the HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE A (PL15.2.9) from the 5 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS. 6. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the grounding wire, then remove the grounding wire from the 6 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS. 7. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HGS ASSY BIAS to the left side of the printer body. 8. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS from the printer body.
P/J5030
J141 P/J5020 J1361 J138 J139 J221
Figure 4-86. HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) Removal
4-403
Revision D
4.2.15 TCRU ASSSY

4.2.15.1 HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (REFERENCE ONLY)
C A U T IO N
J51
When disassembling the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use as vacuum or other cleaning device to remove the residual toner left on the HOLDER TONER ASSY before proceeding. When using a cleaning device like a vacuum cleaner to remove residual toner from around the HOLDER TONER ASSY, prevent static electrical discharge from the tip of the cleaning device by attaching a grounding wire to the tip of the device. When using a cleaning device like a vacuum cleaner to remove residual toner from around the HOLDER TONER ASSY, be careful that toner is not propelled by static electricity onto the sensors on the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
J166
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.) 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) of the FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) on the LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the right side surface of the printer body. 6. Free the FAN REAR harness (J166) from the hook on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, 2, 3, 4) at the right side surface of the printer body.
P/J5011 P/J5020 P/J5030
C H E C K P O IN T
Instead of releasing the FAN REAR harness, remove the FAN REAR and set in on the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, then remove the 2 parts together.
P/J144
P/J71
Figure 4-87. HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (1)
4-404

7. Disconnect the connector (P/J51) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the right side surface of the printer body. 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J144) on the PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) from the left side surface of the printer body. 9. Disconnect the connectors (P/J5020, P/J5030, P/J5011) on the HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) from the left side surface of the printer body. 10. Disconnect the P/J71 connector on the BRACKET CONNECTOR (PL15.1.16) of the HARNESS ASSY FRONT1 (PL15.2.7), and release from the clamp. 11. Release the 2 hooks securing the GEAR SLIDE (PL12.3.14) to the left side surface of the printer body, and remove the GEAR SLIDE. 12. Remove the RACK V (PL12.3.13) from the printer body. 13. Remove the 8 screws securing the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT to the printer body (4 right side screws: gold, 6mm; 1 upper side screw: gold, tapped, 10mm; 1 left side screw: gold, 6mm; 2 left side screws: gold, tapped, 10 mm Earth wire is attached with lower screw.). 14. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT from the printer body. When installing the GEAR SLIDE, do so while maintaining the aligned positions of the sharp leading end of the left side gear rail with the leading end of the RACK V triangular mark.
Revision D
Figure 4-88. HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (3)
4-405
Revision D
4.2.15.2 HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). (See Section 4.2.15.5.) 6. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). (See Section 4.2.15.4.) 7. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M). (See Section 4.2.15.3.) 8. From the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use a small screwdriver to release the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1). 9. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the right from the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER. 10. Pull out the connector (P/J511) of the motor from the right side of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y). 11. Pull out the connectors (P/J441, P/J431) from the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y). 12. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) and then remove it. 13. Release the hook securing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER. 14. Slide the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the right to remove it.
Figure 4-89. HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.1) Removal
4-406
Revision D
4.2.15.3 HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) (PL12.2.2) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). (See Section 4.2.15.5.) 6. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). (See Section 4.2.15.4.) 7. From the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use a small screwdriver to release the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1). 8. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to the right from the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER. 9. Pull out the connector (P/J512) of the motor from the right side of the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
C A U T IO N
Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.
In the following step, the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) are kept connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, does not move too far.
10. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER, slide it to the right side and release the motor side hook, shift the motor side toward the rear and open a gap between it and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y). 11. Pull out the connectors (P/J442, P/J432) from the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M). 12. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) and remove HOLDER TONER ASSY (M).
Figure 4-90. HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) (PL12.2.2) Removal
4-407
Revision D
4.2.15.4 HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) (PL12.2.3) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). (See Section 4.2.15.5.) 6. From the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use a small screwdriver to release the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1). 7. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to the right from the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER. 8. Pull out the connector (P/J513) of the motor from the right side of the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
C A U T IO N
In the following step, the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) are kept connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, does not move too far.
9. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER, slide it to the right side and release the motor side hook, shift the motor side toward the rear and open a gap between it and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M). 10. Pull out the connectors (P/J443, P/J433) from the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). 11. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) and remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.
Figure 4-91. HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) (PL12.2.3) Removal
4-408
Revision D
4.2.15.5 HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) (PL12.2.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. From the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use a small screwdriver to release the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1). 6. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to the right from the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER. 7. Pull out the connector (P/J513) of the motor from the right side of the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
C A U T IO N
In the following step, the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) are kept connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, does not move too far.
8. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER, slide it to the right side and release the motor side hook, shift the motor side toward the rear and open a gap between it and the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). 9. Pull out the connectors (P/J444, P/J434) from the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). 10. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) and remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.
Figure 4-92. HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) (PL12.2.4) Removal
4-409
Revision D
4.2.15.6 SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL12.2.10) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.15.2.), (See Section 4.2.15.3.), (See Section 4.2.15.4.), (See Section 4.2.15.5.) 6. Use a small screwdriver to release the 2 hooks securing the SWITCH TCRU ASSY to the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, 2, 3, 4). 7. Remove the SWITCH TCRU ASSY from the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
4.2.15.7 SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.15.2.), (See Section 4.2.15.3.), (See Section 4.2.15.4.), (See Section 4.2.15.5.) 6. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SENSOR TONER LOW to the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, PL12.2.2, PL12.2.3, PL12.2.4). 7. Remove the SENSOR TONER LOW from the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
Figure 4-93. SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL12.2.10) Removal
Figure 4-94. SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9) Removal
4-410
Revision D
4.2.15.8 PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J144) on the PWB EEPROM from the left side of the printer body. 4. Remove the 1 screw (gold, 10mm) securing the PWB EEPROM. 5. Remove the PWB EEPROM from the printer body. Be careful about threading the harness when installing the connector. If the HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (PL15.2.10) and HARNESS ASSY CRUM (PL12.3.8) are crossed, the connector on the PWB EEPROM can come out when the COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) is closed.
4.2.15.9 HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J5011) on the HVPS SUB from the left side of the printer body. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J5030) on the HVPS SUB. 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020) on the HVPS SUB. 6. Remove the 4 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the HVPS SUB. 7. Remove the HVPS SUB from the printer body.
PWB EEPROM
J5030
HARNESS ASSY EEPROM HARNESS ASSY CRUM
J5011
J5020
Figure 4-96. HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-95. PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) Removal
4-411
Revision D
4.2.16 FRAME
4.2.16.1 LEVER DRUM: L (PL13.1.4) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the LINK: L. (See Section 4.2.4.7.) 4. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS. (See Section 4.2.14.2.) 5. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE LEVER L (PL13.1.1) from the left side of the printer body. 6. Remove the PLATE LEVER L from the printer body. 7. From the left side surface of the printer body, release the 4 hooks of the SPRING LEVER 30N (PL13.1.5) hanging from the convex part of the LEVER DRUM. 8. Remove the LINK LEVER: L (PL13.1.3) along with the SPRING LEVER 30N from the printer body. 9. Remove the LEVER DRUM: L from the printer body.
Figure 4-97. LEVER DRUM:L (PL13.1.4) Removal (1)
4-412
Revision D
When installing the LINK LEVER L, do so after aligning the GEAR IDL PRL (PL13.1.18) and lower part of the LINK LEVER L to the positions shown in the drawing.
4-413
Revision D
4.2.16.2 LEVER DRUM:R (PL13.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.) 4. Remove the LINK: R. (See Section 4.2.4.8.) 5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (See Section 4.2.17.2.) 6. Remove the ACTUATOR I/L. (See Section 4.2.16.3.) 7. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE ASSY LEVER R (PL13.1.7) from the right side of the printer body. 8. Remove the PLATE ASSY LEVER R from the printer body. 9. From the right side surface of the printer body, release the 4 hooks of the SPRING LEVER 30N (PL13.1.5) hanging from the convex part of the LEVER DRUM: R. 10. Remove the LINK LEVER:R (PL13.1.6) along with the SPRING LEVER 30N from the printer body. 11. Remove the LEVER DRUM:R from the printer body.
Figure 4-99. LEVER DRUM:R (PL13.1.4) Removal (1) Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-414
Revision D
When installing the LINK LEVER R (PL13.1.6), do so after aligning the GEAR IDL PRR (PL13.1.11) and lower part of the LINK LEVER R to the positions shown in the drawing.
4-415
Revision D
4.2.16.3 ACTUATOR I/L (PL13.1.8) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.) 4. From the right side surface of the printer body, release the hooks of the SPRING I/L (PL13.1.9) hanging from the convex part of the PLATE ASSY LEVER R (PL13.1.9) 5. Release the 1 hook securing the ACTUATOR I/L to the part of the shaft on the PLATE ASSY LEVER R from the printer body. 6. Remove the ACTUATOR I/L along with the SPRING I/L from the PLATE ASSY LEVER R. 7. Remove the SPRING I/L from the ACTUATOR I/L.
Figure 4-101. ACTUATOR I/L (PL13.1.8) Removal
4-416
Revision D
4.2.16.4 PWB ASSY EARTH (PL13.1.17) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.) 3. Remove the 2 screws (gold, 10mm and gold, tapped, 10mm) and remove the PLATE EARTH FRONT (PL13. 1. 16). 4. Remove 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PWB ASSY EARTH and the PLATE EARTH DIODE (PL13. 1.15) and remove the PWB ASSY EARTH by floating the PLATE EARTH DIODE. If the HOUSING ASSY RETARD will not go in easily, pull it to the left side a little and let it fall in.
Figure 4-102. PWB ASSY EARTH (PL13.1.17) Removal
4-417
Revision D
4.2.17 DRIVE
4.2.17.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.) 4. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE from the right side of the printer body. 5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE from the printer body.
4.2.17.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the LINK: R. (See Section 4.2.4.8.) 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J48, P/J52) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the right side of the printer body. 5. Release the harness (J52) of the FUSER ASSY from the clamp on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN of the right side of the printer body. 6. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, with outside toothed lock washer, 6mm) securing the ground wire of the lower section of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. 7. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the printer body. 8. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the printer body.
J52 J48
Figure 4-103. DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) Removal
Figure 4-104. DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) Removal
4-418
Revision D
4.2.18 ELECTRICAL
4.2.18.1 PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal
1. Remove the PWB Controller (PWB ESS). (See Section 4.2.19.1.) 2. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
C A U T IO N
Be sure that the CHUTE ASSY REGI is removed when performing the following step. If the step is performed with the CHUTE ASSY REGI installed, it may cause deformation of the SPRING DRUM EARTH.
3. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 4. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 5. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS. (See Section 4.2.14.2.)
C A U T IO N
Be sure that the HSG ASSY BIAS is removed when performing the following step. If the step is performed with the HSG ASSY BIAS installed, it may cause deformation of the HSG ASSY BIAS.
6. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 7. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.) 8. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 9. Remove the BOX ASSY ELEC. (See Section 4.2.18.6.) 10. Remove the HOUSING ASSY CONTACT. (See Section 4.2.18.7.) 11. Remove the 4 screws securing the COVER MCU (PL15.1.1) to the BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6). 12. Remove the COVER MCU from the BOX ASSY ELEC.
Figure 4-105. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal (1)
4-419

13. Disconnect all the connectors on the PWBA MCU & HVPS from the BOX ASSY ELEC. 14. Remove the 6 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the PWBA MCU & HVPS to the BOX ASSY ELEC. 15. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS from the BOX ASSY ELEC.
Revision D
Figure 4-106. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal (2)
4-420
Revision D
4.2.18.2 FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 4. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.) 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) on the LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the right side of the printer body. 6. Free the harness (J166) of the FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) from the 5 hooks of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, PL12.2.2, PL12.2.3, PL12.2.4). 7. Remove the 2 SCREW FAN LVs (PL15.1.4) securing the FAN REAR to the printer body, and remove the FAN REAR. Install the FAN REAR so that its attached label faces toward the rear (toward the outside).
Figure 4-107. SENSOR TONER LOW ASSY (PL12.2.9) Removal
4-421
Revision D
4.2.18.3 LVPS (PL15.1.10) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the 2 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS (PL15. 1. 5) on the GUIDE HARNESS SW (PL15. 1. 13). 4. Free the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS SW. 5. Release the 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the switch bracket part. 6. Remove the GUIDE HARNESS ASSY from the LVPS. 7. Disconnect the connectors (P/J161, P/J162, P/J163, P/J164, P/J165, P/ J166, P/J167) on the LVPS. 8. Remove the 6 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the LVPS to the printer body. 9. Remove the LVPS from the printer body.
P/J165 P/J164
P/J166
P/J163
P/J167
P/J161
P/J162
Figure 4-108. LVPS (PL15.1.10) Removal
4-422
Revision D
4.2.18.4 HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the 1screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 10mm) securing the grounding wire of the HARNESS ASSY AC SW to the printer body. 4. Release the 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW (PL15.1.13) to the switch bracket part, and free the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the upwards direction. 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J161) on the LVPS. 6. While releasing the 2 hooks securing the socket of the HARNESS ASSY AC SW to the rear part of the LVPS, remove the socket to the rear. 7. Remove the HARNESS ASSY AC SW from the printer body. When installing the GUIDE HARNESS SW, it is easier to do if the left side hook is set in the printer body frame hole before the right side hook is set.
Figure 4-109. HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11) Removal
4-423
Revision D
4.2.18.5 PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Disconnect all the connectors on the PWB DRIVE from the right side surface of the printer body. 4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PWB DRIVE to the printer body. 5. Remove the PWB DRIVE from the printer body.
Figure 4-110. PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) Removal
4-424
Revision D
4.2.18.6 BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal

C A U T IO N
C A U T IO N
6. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 7. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.) 8. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) connecting the printer body and the FEEDER from the right side surface of the printer body. 10. Disconnect the connector (P/J151) on the ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) from the right side surface of the printer body. 11. Disconnect the connector (P/J2361) connecting the printer body and the FEEDER from the left side surface of the printer body. 12. Disconnect the connectors (P/J141, P/J1361, P/J138, P/J221, P/J139) on the BRACKET CONNECTOR (PL15.1.16) from the left side surface of the printer body. 13. Disconnect the connectors (P/J19) on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) from the inside of the printer body. 14. Remove the 1 screw securing the earth cable from the left side surface of the printer body.
Figure 4-111. BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal (1)
4-425

15. Remove the COVER CASSETTE REAR. (See Section 4.2.7.2.) 16. Remove the 5 screws (gold, 6mm, 2 positions from upper front, 1 position from LVPS side, 2 positions from rear side) securing the BOX ASSY ELEC to the printer body. 17. Free the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS SW. 18. Release 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the switch bracket part. 19. Remove the GUIDE HARNESS SW from the LVPS. 20. Pull out the BOX ASSY ELEC to the rear from the printer body, and remove the BOX ASSY ELEC.
Revision D
Figure 4-112. BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal (2)
4-426
Revision D
4.2.18.7 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT (PL15.1.8) Removal

C A U T IO N
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-113. HOUSING ASSY CONTACT (PL15.1.8) Removal
6. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 7. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.) 8. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 9. Remove the COVER CASSETTE REAR. (See Section 4.2.7.2.) 10. Remove the BOX ASSY ELEC. (See Section 4.2.18.6.) 11. Remove the 2 screws securing the HOUSING ASSY CONTACT to the BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6). 12. Pull out the HOUSING ASSY CCONTACT from the BOX ASSY ELEC, and remove HOUSING ASSY CCONTACT.
4-427
Revision D
4.2.19 CONTROLLER BOARD

4.2.19.1 PWB CONTROLLER (PL16.1.5) Removal
1. Loosen the 2 SCREW KNURLING (PL16.1.6) securing the PLATE REAR ESS (PL16.1.7) at the back of the printer body. 2. Hold the knobs of the GUIDE L ESS (PL16.2.12) and the GUIDE R ESS (PL16.1.13), and remove the PWB CONTROLLER from the printer body.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, eliminate static electricity from your body by using a grounding wristband or other static eliminator. A discharge of static electricity can damage the PWB CONTROLLER or the OPTION BOARDS.
3. When OPTION BOARDS are installed in the slots on the PWB CONTROLLER, remove them. 4. Remove the 1 screw securing the USB connector to the PLATE REAR ESS. 5. Remove the 2 screws securing the parallel connector to the PLATE REAR ESS. 6. Remove the 5 screws securing the PLATE REAR ESS to the BASE PLATE. 7. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 8mm) securing the rear of the PWB Controller (PWB ESS) to the GUIDE L ESS, GUIDE R ESS (PL16.1.12), (PL16.1.13). 8. Shift the PLATE REAR ESS to the rear to remove it. 9. Open the GUIDE L ESS and the GUIDE R ESS to the left and right, and then remove it. 10. Remove the 12 screws securing the PWB Controller to the BASE PLATE. 11. Remove the 3 prop screws for HDD to the BASE PLATE, and then remove the PWB Controller. USB Connector Parallel Connector
Figure 4-114. PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Removal 1

Step 6
4-428
Revision D
C A U T IO N
When removing the PWB Controller, perform USB ID input without fail. (Refer to Section 5.1)
Step 7
When installing the PWB CONTROLLER into the printer body, be sure the PWB CONTROLLER front edge connectors are properly connected to the connectors of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
Step 11
4-429
Revision D
4.2.20 Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option FEEDER UNIT)

4.2.20.1 COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal
1. Remove CASSETTE TRAY 2 and 3, and any others of the type that can be withdrawn, by pulling them straight out then tilting them up to take them all the way out. 2. Release the 3 hooks securing the COVER FRONT to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the COVER FRONT.
C A U T IO N
When removing the lower COVER FRONT, release the 3 hooks with a tool like a screwdriver.
Figure 4-117. COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal (1)

When putting the cover back on, be careful of which side is the top and which is the bottom. Also, be sure to align the slot of the COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) with the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
4-430
Revision D
4.2.20.2 COVER R (PL17.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with the brim, 8mm) securing the COVER R to the TWO TRAY MODULE. 3. Use two hands to grasp both sides of COVER R, and while pulling front part wider to the left and right, release the 3 bosses of front part COVER R from the holes of FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 4. Lift the COVER R a little, release 4 hooks from the hooking holes of FRAME ASSY OPF. 5. Move COVER R toward the front, then use a little power to slowly remove the INDICATOR (PL17.1.8). (This must be done at 2 places, upper and lower.) 6. Remove the COVER R from the TWO TRAY MODULE.
Figure 4-118. COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal (2)
Figure 4-119. COVER R (PL17.1.4) Removal 4-431
Revision D
4.2.20.3 COVER L (PL17.1.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with the brim, 8mm) securing the COVER L to the TWO TRAY MODULE. 3. Use two hands to grasp both sides of COVER L, and while pulling front part wider to the left and right, release the 3 bosses of front part COVER L from the holes of FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 4. Lift the COVER L a little, release 4 hooks from the hooking holes of FRAME ASSY OPF, remove the COVER L from the TWO TRAY MODULE.
REAR
Figure 4-120. COVER L (PL17.1.1) Removal
4-432
Revision D
4.2.20.4 CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL17.2.8) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the TRAY 3.

3
1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY (PL2.1.3). (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Press in on both ends of the CHUTE ASSY TURN at the handhold spots, then by adding a little power in the downward direction release the 2 hooks of the CHUTE ASSY TURN from the holes in the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 3. Release the hooks on GUIDE CASSETTE L (PL17.2.3) and GUIDE CASSETTE R (PL17.2.6) that are securing the cassettes to the CHUTE ASSY TURN, then remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN.
1 4 2 1 4 4
Figure 4-121. CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL17.2.8) Removal
4-433
Revision D
4.2.20.5 HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R (PL17.1.4). (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J821) of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) (TRAY 2).
C A U T IO N
Disconnect the connector (J82) on the PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) while holding the circuit board with your hand.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J82) on the PWBA FEEDER. 5. Disconnect the relay connector (P/J8220) between the HARNESS ASSY FDR2T and the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.4.11). 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J824) of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) (TRAY 2). 7. Disconnect the connector (P/J825) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2). 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J823) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) (TRAY 2). 9. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T from the 6 CLAMPs. See the illustration for details on the installation of the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray) connector and routing of the harness.
Figure 4-122. HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) Removal
4-434
Revision D
4.2.20.6 HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R (PL17.1.4). (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J821) of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) (TRAY 3).
C A U T IO N
Disconnect the connector (J83) on the PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) while holding the circuit board with your hand.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J83) on the PWBA FEEDER. 5. Disconnect the relay connector (P/J8220) between the HARNESS ASSY FDR2T and the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.4.11). 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J834) of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) (TRAY 3). 7. Disconnect the connector (P/J835) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2). 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J833) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) (TRAY 2). 9. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T from the 4 CLAMPs. See the illustration for details on the installation of the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (blue) connector and routing of the harness.
Figure 4-123. HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) Removal
4-435
Revision D
4.2.20.7 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Free the harness of DRIVE ASSY FEEDER from 4 CLAMPs. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J84) on the PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1). 5. From the 2 CLAMPs on the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER, free the harness of the HARNESS ASSY FDR2T (PL17.4.3) and the CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2). 6. Remove the 3 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 7. Free the HARNESS ASSY FDR2T and the harness of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN , and remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER.
4.2.20.8 INDICATOR ASSY (PL17.4.10) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Release the hook on the bottom of the STOPPER INDICATOR securing the INDICATOR ASSY to the SHAFT INDICATOR, shift the STOPPER INDICATOR downward and remove it from the holes in the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 4. Shift the whole of the INDICATOR ASSY upward, and remove the lower INDICATOR ASSY from the hole of the FRAME ASSY OPF. 5. Pull the INDICATOR ASSY upper section from the holes in the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF, then remove the INDICATOR ASSY. When assembling, position the GUIDE INDICATOR under the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9).
Figure 4-124. DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5) Removal
Figure 4-125. INDICATOR ASSY (PL17.4.10) Removal
4-436
Revision D
4.2.20.9 HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) Removal

1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body. 2. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 3. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 4. Remove the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG from the connector (P81) on the PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1). 5. Free the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG from the CLAMP on the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 6. Disconnect the harness from the drawer connector part of the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG. 7. Cut off 2 hooks securing the drawer connector part of theHARNESS ASSY OPF PLG by using like a nipper, remove it from the hole of the FRAME ASSY OPF. When installing the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG, be careful of the direction of the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG.
Figure 4-126. HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) Removal
4-437
Revision D
4.2.20.10 PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Disconnect the harness (P/J81, 82, 83, 84) on the PWBA FEEDER. 4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PWBA FEEDER to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the PWBA FEEDER. When installing, combine the BOARD to the hole of the PWBA FEEDER and the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF. (2 places)
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_009FC
Figure 4-127. PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) Removal
4-438
Revision D
4.2.20.11 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal

TRAY 2 Disassembly 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 5. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 6. Disconnect the harness (P/J821). 7. Remove the 1 screw securing the BRACKET LOW PAPER (PL17.4.8) to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the BRACKET LOW PAPER. 8. Remove the 5 screws securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 9. Release the 8 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 10. While pulling the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9) from the slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R, remove it to forward. 11. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while leaning top of that to left. Reassembly 1. Keep the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R near the installation position, with the upper part leaning to the left. 2. Pass the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER to the slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while twisting it. 3. Pass the front end of the LEVER LOW PAPER through the opening in the FRAME ASSY OPF, then move the upper part of the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R to the right and keep it in the installation position. 4. Pushing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to right side, fix the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to FRAME ASSY OPF by 8 hooks. 5. Fix the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE to the FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-128. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal (1)
4-439

6. Insert the LEVER LOW PAPER axle into the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R recess and the BRACKET LOW PAPER hole, then align the position alignment hole of the BRACKET ASSY LOW PAPER with the position alignment punch of the FRAME ASSY OPF and keep it in place. 7. Fix 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing BACKET LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 8. Install the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 9. Install the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 10. Install the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 11. Install the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 12. Install the COVER FRONT.(See Section 4.2.20.1.)
Revision D
TRAY 3 Disassembly 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Disconnect the harness (P/J831). 5. Remove the 1 screw securing the BRACKET LOW PAPER (PL17.4.8) to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the BRACKET LOW PAPER. 6. Remove the 5 screws securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 7. Release the 8 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 8. While pulling the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9) from the slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R, remove it to forward. 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while leaning top of that to left.
Figure 4-129. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal (2) Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-440

Reassembly 1. Keep the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R near the installation position, with the upper part leaning to the left. 2. Pass the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER to the slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while twisting it. 3. Pass the front end of the LEVER LOW PAPER through the opening in the FRAME ASSY OPF, then move the upper part of the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R to the right and keep it in the installation position. 4. Pushing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to right side, fix the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to FRAME ASSY OPF by 8 hooks. 5. Fix the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 6. Insert the LEVER LOW PAPER axle into the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R recess and the BRACKET LOW PAPER hole, then align the position alignment hole of the BRACKET ASSY LOW PAPER with the position alignment punch of the FRAME ASSY OPF and keep it in place. 7. Fix 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing BACKET LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 8. Install the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 9. Install the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 10. Install the COVER FRONT.(See Section 4.2.20.1.)
Revision D
4-441
Revision D
4.2.20.12 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L (PL17.1.5) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 5. Release the 6 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L to the FRAME ASSY OPF. 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L while leaning it to right. When assembling, do not overtighten the screws.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_136FA
Figure 4-130. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L (PL17.1.5) Removal) Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-442
Revision D
4.2.20.13 LINK ACTUATOR (PL17.3.6) Removal

1. Remove the CASSETTE of the TRAY 2,3. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR from the protrusions of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5) by making it wider, then pull it from the holes in the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). When assembling, bring large components to the machine from the right side (as seen when facing the front of the unit). Installing the LINK ACTUATOR, do it after passing front end of the LINK ACTUATOR to the hole of the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-131. LINK ACTUATOR (PL17.3.6) Removal
4-443
Revision D
4.2.20.14 PICK UP ASSY TR2 (PL17.3.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
C A U T IO N
When assembling the screws, be careful not to damage the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver. Also, be careful not the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
When disassembling the screws, be careful not to damage the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver.
11. Remove the 2 screws securing the PICK UP ASSY TR2 to the right side of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 12. Shift the PICK UP ASSY TR2 to right, remove the 2 hooks of the PICK UP ASSY TR2 and the leading edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) from the 2 slots in the left side of the FRAME ASSY OPF and the window.
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-132. PICK UP ASSY TR2 (PL17.3.1) Removal
Be careful not the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
13. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2 from the right side window part while being careful to avoid interference with the FRAME ASSY OPF.
4-444
Revision D
4.2.20.15 PICK UP ASSY TR3 (PL17.3.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 3. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
C A U T IO N
When assembling the screws, be careful not to damage the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver. Also, be careful not the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP ASSY TR3 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
When disassembling the screws, be careful not to damage the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver.
9. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 to the right side of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 10. Shift the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 to right, remove the 2 hooks of the PICK UP ASSY TR2 and the leading edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) from the 2 slots in the left side of the FRAME ASSY OPF and the window.
C A U T IO N
Be careful not the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-133. PICK UP ASSY TR3 (PL17.3.1) Removal
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 from the right side window part while being careful to avoid interference with the FRAME ASSY OPF.
4-445
Revision D
4.2.20.16 GEAR IDLER (PL17.4.6) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 3. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 3. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 3. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 9. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 3. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 10. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.) 11. Remove the GEAR IDLER. When assembling, face the big GEAR to the side of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
Figure 4-134. GEAR IDLER (PL17.4.6) Removal
4-446
Revision D
4.2.20.17 SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 5. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER. 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J 823) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 5. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER. 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J 833) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER. When installing the SENSOR LOW PAPER, install the right hook after you secure the left hook.
Figure 4-135. SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) Removal
4-447
Revision D
4.2.20.18 CASTER ASSY S (PL17.1.6) Removal

1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body.
C A U T IO N
4.2.20.19 CASTER ASSY (PL17.1.7) Removal

1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body.
C A U T IO N
When performing the next step, be careful not to damage the position alignment pin of the TOW TRAY MODULE. In addition, the module may be scratched by the surface of the workbench, so spread out some cardboard before setting down the module. Be sure that 2 people work together to handle TWO TRAY MODULE.
When performing the next step, be careful not to damage the position alignment pin of the TOW TRAY MODULE. In addition, the module may be scratched by the surface of the workbench, so spread out some cardboard before setting down the module. Be sure that 2 people work together to handle TWO TRAY MODULE.
2. Put the TWO TRAY MODULE upside-down on the work table. 3. Remove the 3 screws (black, with a brim, 8mm) securing the CASTER ASSY S to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 4. Remove the CASTER ASSY S from the FRAME ASSY OPF.
2. Put the TWO TRAY MODULE upside-down on the work table. 3. Remove the 3 screws (black, with a brim, 8mm) securing the CASTER ASSY to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). 4. Remove the CASTER ASSY from the FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-136. CASTER ASSY S (PL17.1.6) Removal
Figure 4-137. CASTER ASSY (PL17.1.7) Removal
4-448
Revision D
4.2.20.20 SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 5. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE fram upside to the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2), and remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 4. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 5. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE fram upside to the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2), and remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
4.2.20.21 STOPPER CST (PL17.2.4) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
1. Remove CASSETTE TRAY, and any others of the type that can be withdrawn, by pulling them straight out then tilting them up to take them all the way out. 2. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the STOPPER CST to the GUIDE CASSETTE L (PL17.2.3), and remove the STOPPER CST.
Figure 4-139. STOPPER CST (PL17.2.4) Removal
Figure 4-138. SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-449
Revision D
4.2.20.22 SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J 824) of the SOLENOID FEED. 4. Remove the 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J 834) of the SOLENOID FEED. 4. Remove the 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. Hook the armature of the SOLENOID FEED to the bump of the GEAR FEED H2.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_023FD
Figure 4-140. SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) Removal
4-450
Revision D
4.2.20.23 SPRING FEED H (PL17.3.10) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.20.24 SPRING FEED 1 (PL17.3.9) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED H.
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED 1.
Figure 4-141. SPRING FEED H (PL17.3.10) Removal
Figure 4-142. SPRING FEED 1 (PL17.3.9) Removal
4-451
Revision D
4.2.20.25 GEAR FEED H2 (PL17.3.11) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 4. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 5. Free the armature of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) while releasing the hook, and then remove the GEAR FEED H2 downward.
TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 4. Free the armature of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) while releasing the hook, and then remove the GEAR FEED H2 downward.
Figure 4-143. GEAR FEED H2 (PL17.3.11) Removal
4-452
Revision D
4.2.20.26 GEAR FEED 1 (PL17.3.8) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 4. Remove the GEAR FEED 1 while releasing the hook.
Figure 4-144. GEAR FEED 1 (PL17.3.8) Removal
4-453
Revision D
4.2.20.27 GEAR FEED H1 (PL17.3.12) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 4. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 6. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 7. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 8. Remove the GEAR FEED H1.
TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 4. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 5. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 6. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 7. Remove the GEAR FEED H1.
Figure 4-145. GEAR FEED H1 (PL17.3.12) Removal
4-454
Revision D
4.2.20.28 GEAR FEED 2 (PL17.3.13) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.20.29 STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Release the hook securing the GEAR FEED 2 to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1), and remove the GEAR FEED 2.
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH while releasing the hook. When installing the STOPPER CLUTCH, combine the top of the STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) to the hook of CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) to secure the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
Figure 4-146. GEAR FEED 2 (PL17.3.13) Removal Figure 4-147. STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-455
Revision D
4.2.20.30 CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 13. Disconnect the connector (P/J825) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. 14. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J835) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. 5. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. When assembling, do so in such a way that the hooks of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN are to the right and the harness is to the left.
Figure 4-148. CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) Removal Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-456
Revision D
4.2.20.31 GEAR IDLER (PL17.3.15) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 13. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 14. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 15. Remove the GEAR IDLER.
TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 4. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 5. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 6. Remove the GEAR IDLER.
Figure 4-149. GEAR IDLER (PL17.3.15) Removal
4-457
Revision D
4.2.20.32 GEAR IDLER FEED (PL17.3.14) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 13. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 14. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 15. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED.
TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 4. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 5. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 6. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED.
Figure 4-150. GEAR IDLER FEED (PL17.3.14) Removal
4-458
Revision D
4.2.20.33 GEAR IDLER IN (PL17.3.19) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 13. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 14. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 15. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN.
TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 4. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 5. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 6. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN.
Figure 4-151. GEAR IDLER IN (PL17.3.19) Removal
4-459
Revision D

TRAY 2 1. Pull out the CASSETTE of the TRAY 2. 2. Rotate SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) away from the FEEDER of TRAY 2 so that the rubber part of ROLL ASSY FEED is facing downward. 3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward, and remove it from SHAFT FEED 1.
TRAY 3 1. Pull out the CASSETTE of the TRAY 3. 2. Rotate SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) away from the FEEDER of TRAY 3 so that the rubber part of ROLL ASSY FEED is facing downward. 3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward, and remove it from SHAFT FEED 1. When assembling, do so from the side of SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) that has the large holes. The ROLL ASSY FEED may be done in the way you prefer.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_135FA
4-460
Revision D
4.2.20.35 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 bottom faced up on the work table. 13. While releasing the hooks of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, remove the opposite side front end from the holes of the frame opening on the PICK UP ASSY by moving it in the direction of the arrow and pulling it out. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.) 10. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 bottom faced up on the work table. 11. While releasing the hooks of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, remove the opposite side front end from the holes of the frame opening on the PICK UP ASSY by moving it in the direction of the arrow and pulling it out.
Figure 4-153. ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5) Removal
4-461
Revision D
9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 3. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 10. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 bottom faced up on the work table. 11. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5). (See Section 4.2.20.35.) 12. Release the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.3.5) from the clamps (2 places). 13. Disconnect the connector (P/J832) of the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ. 14. Release the 3 hooks of the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER. When installing the SENSOR NO PAPER, install the right hook after you secure the left hook.
4.2.20.36 SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 bottom faced up on the work table. 13. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5). (See Section 4.2.20.35.) 14. Release the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.3.5) from the clamps (2 places). 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J822) of the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ. 16. Release the 3 hooks of the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
Figure 4-154. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal 4-462
Revision D

1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY (PL2.1.4). 2. Pull out the ROLL ASSY to left side while releasing the hook, and remove the ROLL ASSY. When installing the ROLL ASSY, secure the gap of the lower ROLL ASSY to the shaft of the SHAFT FEED 2 (PL17.3.22).
4-463
Revision D
4.2.20.38 BEARING (PL17.3.7) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2.(See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 13. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 14. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 16. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 17. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 18. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 19. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 20. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 21. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 22. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 23. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN. (See Section 4.2.20.33.) 24. Remove the 3 E-rings securing the BEARING (3 places) to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 25. Remove the BEARING (3 places).
Figure 4-156. BEARING (PL17.3.7) Removal
4-464

TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 4. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 5. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 6. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 7. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 8. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 9. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 10. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 11. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 12. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 13. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 14. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN. (See Section 4.2.20.33.) 15. Remove the 3 E-rings securing the BEARING (3 places) to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 16. Remove the BEARING (3 places).
Revision D
4-465
Revision D
4.2.20.39 BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) Removal

C H E C K P O IN T
See Section 4.2.20.42 about the procedure to remove the BEARING SLEEVE securing the SHAFT FEED 2.
TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the E-ring securing the BEARING SLEEVE to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 13. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE. TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the E-ring securing the BEARING SLEEVE to the PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1). 4. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE.
Figure 4-157. BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) Removal
4-466
Revision D
4.2.20.40 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 13. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 14. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 16. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 17. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 18. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 19. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 20. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 21. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 22. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 23. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN. (See Section 4.2.20.33.) 24. Remove the BEARING of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 25. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.39.)
Figure 4-158. ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) Removal
4-467

26. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal 27. Shift the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right and left side, remove the ROLL ASSY TURN from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25). TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.) 10. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 13. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 14. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 16. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 17. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 18. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 19. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 20. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 21. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN. (See Section 4.2.20.33.) 22. Remove the BEARING of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 23. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.39.) 24. Shift the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right and left side, remove the ROLL ASSY TURN from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).
Revision D
4-468
Revision D
6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.) 10. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 13. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 14. Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.34.) 15. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 16. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.39.) 17. Shift the SHAFT FEED 1 to the right and left side, remove the SHAFT FEED 1 from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).
4.2.20.41 SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 13. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 14. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 16. Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.34.) 17. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 18. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.39.) 19. Shift the SHAFT FEED 1 to the right and left side, remove the SHAFT FEED 1 from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25). TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.)
Figure 4-159. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal
4-469
Revision D
4.2.20.42 SHAFT FEED 2 (PL17.3.22) Removal

TRAY 2 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 13. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 14. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 16. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 17. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 18. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 19. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 20. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 21. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 22. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 23. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 24. Shift the SHAFT FEED 2 to the left, pull out it from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.21). 25. Pull out the BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) to the right from the SHAFT FEED 2. 26. Remove the E-ring secured in the middle of the SHAFT FEED 2.
Figure 4-160. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal
4-470

TRAY 3 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.) 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.) 10. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.) 11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.) 13. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) 14. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.) 15. Remove the GEAR FEED H1. (See Section 4.2.20.27.) 16. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) 17. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.) 18. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) 19. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.) 20. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.) 21. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.38.) 22. Shift the SHAFT FEED 2 to the left, pull out it from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.21). 23. Pull out the BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) to the right from the SHAFT FEED 2. 24. Remove the E-ring secured in the middle of the SHAFT FEED 2.
Revision D
4-471
CHAPTER
ADJUSTMENT
Revision D
5.1 USB ID Input

AcuLaser-C4000 comes with the USB inter face as standard, and the PC connected to the AcuLaser-C4000 via the USB interface identifies the printer by referring to the USB ID information specific to each printer.
5.1.1 Installation Procedure for Program

Copy the adjustment program file (EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe) onto the desk top or into a folder.
5.1.2 Procedure for program operation

C A U T IO N
Since this USB ID information is stored on EEPROM on the MAIN Board of the printer, you have to re-define the ID information by the procedure described below when you have replaced the MAIN Board for repair.
C A U T IO N
When you repair the printer and re-define the USB ID information, you have to tell the user to uninstall the previously installed printer driver as it is referring to the old USB ID information.
DO not start the adjustment program before connecting the parallel cable to the printer. This program can not be executed together with EPW (EPSON Printer Window) on Windows 95/98. Be sure to terminate the EPW before starting the adjustment program. If the power to the printer is turned off or the parallel cable is disconnected during running of the adjustment program, be sure to restart the program. On the Details of Display tab of Property of Screen, do not change font size.
1. When you execute the program EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe, the menu window shown Figure 5-1 will apper. 2. Select the model name AL-C4000, then click OK button.
The program for USB ID input and the supported operating environment are as follows: Program EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe Operating environment OS: Windows95 OSR 2.0 or later or Windows98 Port used: LPT1 - LPT3 (Windows95/98)
Figure 5-1. Program start up window
Adjustment
USB ID Input
5-473
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 3. When the window as shown in Figure 5-2 is displayed, check USB ID Input and click OK button.
Revision D 4. When the window as shown Figure 5-3 appears, input the serial nember (10 digits) of the printer and click OK button to store the USB ID information (18 digits in total) in EEPOM on the Main Board of the printer. The USB ID value will be displayed in the status window in the bottom area of the program for your later check of the inputted USB ID.
Figure 5-2. USB ID Input window 1
Figure 5-3. USB ID Input window 2
Adjustment
USB ID Input
5-474
Revision D 3. The window as shown Figure 5-5 appears and a status sheet will be printed automatically.
5.1.3 USB ID Confirmation

C A U T IO N
Once you have input a new USB ID, never forget to confirm it on the status sheet.
1. Execute the program EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe which was used to write the USB ID, and select the model name. 2. When the window as shown Figure 5-4 appears, check USB ID Verify and click OK button.
Figure 5-5. USB ID Verify window 2
Figure 5-4. USB ID Verify window 1
Adjustment
USB ID Input
5-475
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 4. Check that the USB ID printed on the status sheet is identical with that shown on the window. After completion of confirmation, press button.
Revision D
USB ID
IC0 0 0 011P210202072024460MC010303
Figure 5-6. USB ID Confirmation
Adjustment
USB ID Input
5-476
CHAPTER
MAINTENANCE
Revision D
6.1 Maintenance
This chapter explains the maintenance of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000. The maintenance of this product is designed for users to do maintenance. No lubrication or adhesion is repuired for this product.
6.1.2 Consumable components and components that require regular replacement

The following table shows the list and lifetime of the consumable components and components that require regular replacement.
6.1.1 Preparatory Maintenance

When visiting the customer, carry out preparatory maintenance in order to prevent any problems other than the ones being concentrated on from occurring. Preparatory maintenance procedure 1. Check the conditions under which the customer is using the equipment. 2. Record the cumulative number of pages printed. NOTE: The number of pages printed is a guide for the replacement of consumable parts. Replace any consumable parts if required. 3. Print several pages and check that there are no problems with printing. 4. Remove any foreign particles from parts such as the Transfer Unit (BTR Assy), Photoconductor Unit (PHD Assy), Fuser Unit (Fuser Assy) and paper feed rollers, and use a brush or a soft cloth to remove any contamination. NOTE: If any parts are particularly dirty, clean them with a damp cloth an then wipe dry with another cloth. Be careful not to damage any parts that are being cleaned. 5. Clean the FAN air outlets. Remove the FRONT HEAD COVER, and use a brush to remove any dust or other particles adhering to the Fan Fuser. Furthermore, remove the REAR COVER and use a brush to remove any dust or other particles adhering to the FAN. NOTE: If the fan air outlet is blocked, the temperature inside the unit will rise and cause operating problems. 6. Print a few more test pages and check that there are no problems.
Table 6-1. List of the replacement parts

Category Consumable Components Parts Name Black toner cartridge Yellow toner cartridge Lifetime 9,000 sheets 6,000 sheets Note User replacement User replacement User replacement User replacement User replacement Code S050091 S050088 S050089 S050090 S051081 S053007 S053006
Magenta toner cartridge 6,000 sheets Cyan toner cartridge Photoconductor unit Fuser unit Transfer unit Components that require regular replacement 6,000 sheets 30,000 sheets
100,000 sheets User replacement 25,000 sheets User replacement
Roll assy
100,000 sheets Service replacement 1110099
NOTE: Lifetime of the replacement parts is calculated in consideration for the product reliability and thereby it does not force the replacement at the described timing which is recommended for the product quality maintenance.
Maintenance
Maintenance
6-478
Revision D
Figure 6-3. Fuser Unit Figure 6-1. Toner Cartridge
Figure 6-4. Transfer Unit Figure 6-2. Photoconductor Unit
Figure 6-5. Roll Assy
Maintenance
Maintenance
6-479
Revision D
6.1.3 Cleaning
1. Clean the outer dirt using a dry and soft clean cloth. If the dirt is not easy to remove, use the neutral detergent. 2. Remove the paper dust, the spilt toner and so on inside the printer, and clean the dirt using a brush or dry soft cloth. NOTE: To remove severe dirt, remove it with a moistened cloth then wipe with a dry cloth. Be sure not to mar the dirty part during cleaning. 3. Clean the fan ducts. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD and COVER REAR, and remove the dust adhered to the FAN FUSER and FAN REAR with a brush. NOTE: Clogged dust around the fan ducts and fans can heat up the air inside of the printer, which may cause a printer malfunction. 4. Clean the window of the ROS ASSY, SENSOR ASSY ADC and ROLL ASSY. Remove the paper dust and so on with a dry soft cloth or cotton swab. Cleaning point
Cleaning point
Figure 6-7. SENSOR ASSY ADC

Cleaning point
Figure 6-8. ROLL ASSY

C A U T IO N
Do not use thinner or benzine since it may deteriorate the plastic and rubber parts.
Figure 6-6. Window of the ROS ASSY Maintenance Maintenance 6-480
Revision D
6.2 Maintenance Menu

The AcuLaser C4000 is equipped with the maintenance menu for maintenance. The maintenance menu is added to panel menu by special operation. The maintenance menu has following functions. 1. Engine Status Sheet 2. Clear Error Log
6.2.2 Engine Status Sheet

The following explains each item of a status sheet. 1. Total Counts Total Pages Total Planes Color Pages : Same value as the Total Pages in the Information Menu. It is not dependent on the paper size. : Number of the paper size. : Same value as the Color Pages in the Information Menu. It is not dependent on the paper size. : The number of jam occurrence. : The amount of C Toner used (Dispense Time). Installing a new toner cartridge will reset it. : Counted up by detecting a new C Toner cartridge. : The amount of M Toner used. : Counted up by detecting a new M Toner cartridge. : The amount of Y Toner used. : Counted up by detecting a new Y Toner cartridge. : The amount of K Toner used. : Counted up by detecting a new K Toner cartridge. : Number of printed copies of the Photoconductor. Installing a new Photoconductor Unit will reset it.
C H E C K P O IN T
All replacement parts of the AcuLaser C4000 (except the ROLL ASSY) can be replaced by user. Therefore, it is unnecessity for resetting the counter value which shows progress of the operation time, and which is automatically reset at the time of replacement.
2. Jam Counts 3. ET Cartridge C Toner C Toner Change M Toner M Toner Change Y Toner Y Toner Change K Toner K Toner Change 4. Photoconductor
6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu

The following explains how to enter the maintenance menu. 1. While pressing the BACK, UP, DOWN and ENTER buttons, turn on the printer. 2. The following messages are displayed on a LCD panel. RAM CHECK ** MB NOTE: Dont release the buttons until the next message appears. MAINTENANCE MENU 3. The above message is displayed and the maintenance menu is added to the menu.
5. Photoconductor Change : Counted up by detecting a new Photoconductor Unit. 6. Fuser 7. Fuser Change 8. Transfer Unit : The life cycle of the Fuser ends. : Counted up by detecting a new Fuser unit. : Number of printed copies of the Transfer Unit. Installing a new Transfer Unit will reset it.
9. Transfer Unit Change : Counted up by detecting a new Transfer Unit.
Maintenance
Maintenance Menu
6-481

10. MCU 11. Error Log : This is the printer units mechanical control and is the value read from the engine. : This is a history of the latest 20 errors which have occurred in the panel messages, EJL status codes and Total Pages. The latest error is displayed first, and rest of errors is shown in order of occurrence. Target errors are the service call errors occurred after Ready and paper jams. If an error occurs while, if another error that occurred at the same and the Total Pages count has already been stored, the current error is not stored.
Revision D
6.2.3 Clear Error Log

This function clears the Error Log List stored to display the Engine Status Sheet.
Maintenance
Maintenance Menu
6-482

The following List explains the control information and control methods.
Revision D
Table 6-2. List of control information and control methods

Information Name Total Pages Total Planes Color Pages Jam Counter C Toner Counter C Toner Change M Toner Counter M Toner Change Y Toner Counter Y Toner Change K Toner Counter K Toner Change Photoconductor Photoconductor Change Fuser Fuser Change Transfer Unit Transfer Unit Change MCU Error Code 1 Error Page 1 : Error Code 20 Error Page 20 Controller Controller --------When an error occurs When an error occurs Select Type, (EEPROM initialization) Select Type, (EEPROM initialization) Count Processing and Storage Location Controller Controller Controller Controller Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Controller Controller Range ~ 99,999,999 ~ 99,999,999 ~ 99,999,999 ~100,000 ~99,999 ~255 ~99,999 ~255 ~99,999 ~255 ~99,999 ~255 ~99,999 ~255 100,000 ~255 ~99,999 ~255 ------------Pages Pages Pages 100msec 100msec 100msec Units Pages Planes Pages Counts 100msec Counting Conditions When printing When transcribing When printing When a jam occurs When providing toner to the development Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge Same as the above Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge Same as the above Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge Same as the above Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge When printing Detecting a new Photoconductor When printing Detecting a new Fuser When printing Detecting a new Transfer Unit --When an error occurs When an error occurs --Select Type, (EEPROM initialization) Select Type, (EEPROM initialization) Detecting a new Transfer Unit Detecting a new Fuser Detecting a new Photoconductor Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge Clear Conditions (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge
NOTE 1: The values in parentheses of the Clear Conditions indicate that the values are cleared as the result. NOTE 2: When exceeding the ranges, the items controlled by the controller are not guaranteed beyond the maximum limit. NOTE 3: When counting value which storage in engine over the range, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.
Maintenance
Maintenance Menu
6-483
Revision D
1. Confirm the color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced by checking the LCD panel or EPSON Status Monitor 3. 2. Remove the top cover. 3. Turn the toner cartridge knobs to the unlocked position.
6.3 Consumable components replacement

This section describes consumable components of the AcuLaser C4000. Refer to 6.1.2 about consumable parts.
6.3.1 Toner Cartridge replacement

C A U T IO N
Do not install used toner cartridges. Do not remove toner cartridges except when replacing them; otherwise, toner may spill. Wait for at least one hour before installing a toner cartridge after moving it from a cool to a warm environment to prevent damage from condensation. Do not touch the toner and avoid getting toner in your eyes. If toner gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off with soap and water immediately. Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in fire, as they may explode and cause injury. Dispose of them according to local regulations.
W A R N IN G
4. Lift the toner cartridge out of the slot.
C A U T IO N
Be careful not to spill the toner remaining in the cartridge. Put the used cartridge on a flat surface with the toner spout facing up to avoid spilling the toner. Dispose of the used toner cartridge by putting it into its disposal bag.
Maintenance
Consumable components replacement
6-484

5. Take the new toner cartridge out of its package, and gently shake it from side to side and front to back to distribute the toner evenly. 7. Turn the toner cartridge knobs to the locked position.
Revision D
Do not remove the protective tape yet.
Be sure to turn the knob all the way to the locked position. Otherwise, you may have toner problems or leakage.
8. Remove the protective tape from the toner cartridge. 6. Hold the toner cartridge as shown below, and lower it into the slot.
9. Replace the top cover.
Maintenance
6-485
Revision D
3. Raise cover D.
6.3.2 Photoconductor Unit replacement

C A U T IO N
The photoconductor unit weighs 4.5 kg (9.9 lb). Be sure to hold it firmly by the handle when carrying it. When replacing the photoconductor unit, avoid exposing it to room light any longer than necessary. Be careful not to scratch the surface of the drum. Also, avoid touching the drum, since oil from your skin may permanently damage its surface and affect print quality. To get the best print quality, do not store the photoconductor unit in an area subject to direct sunlight, dust, salty air, or corrosive gases (such as ammonia). Avoid locations subject to extreme or rapid changes in temperature or humidity.
W A R N IN G
Do not dispose of the used photoconductor unit in fire, as it may explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to local regulations.
4. Hold the photoconductor unit by the handle, and slowly lift it straight out of the printer.
1. Turn off the printer. 2. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover.
Maintenance
6-486

5. Take the new photoconductor unit and tear away the top portion of the bag along the dotted line to expose the handle. Then, grab the handle and remove the styrofoam insert and tear open the bag along the dotted line.
Revision D
C A U T IO N
Be careful not to touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Avoid touching the drum, since oil from your skin may permanently damage its surface and affect print quality.
C A U T IO N
Always keep the cartridge positioned as shown in the illustration.
7. Remove the protective tapes.
8. Holding the handle firmly, lower the photoconductor unit into the printer, making sure the posts on the sides of the unit slide into the slots. 6. Unwrap the protective sheet and material while holding the handle as shown below.
Maintenance
6-487

9. Close covers D and A.
Revision D
6.3.3 Fuser Unit replacement

C A U T IO N
Do not touch the surface of the fuser unit. Doing so may impair print quality.
W A R N IN G
The fuser unit can be very hot if the printer has been in use. Turn the printer off and wait for 30 minutes until the temperature has returned to normal before replacing the fuser unit. Do not dispose of the used fuser unit in fire, as it may explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to local regulations.
NOTE: For replacing the Fuser Unit (Fuser Assy), refer to Chapter 4 "Fuser Assy Removal".
Figure 6-9. Fuser Unit replacement Maintenance Consumable components replacement 6-488
Revision D
6.3.4 Transfer Unit replacement

C A U T IO N
6.4 Components that require regular replacement

The components of this printer that require regular replacement are only ROLL ASSY. NOTE: For replacing the ROLL ASSY, refer to chapter 4.
Do not touch the surface of the transfer unit. Doing so may impair the print quality.
W A R N IN G
Do not dispose of the used transfer unit in fire, as it may explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to local regulations.
NOTE: For replacing the Transfer Unit (BTA ASSY), refer to Chapter 4 "Transfer Unit (BTR Assy) Removal".
Maintenance
Components that require regular replacement
6-489
Revision D
6.5 Color Registration Adjustment

This printer can adjust the color registration position of each color by control panel operation. To confirm the amount of differences between Black and Yellow / Magenta / Cyan in the laser scanning direction, the color registration sheet is printed. Differential amount of each color with Black is quantitatively measured according to overlap ratio of the cyclic Black pattern and the cyclic Yellow / Magenta / Cyan pattern where the cycle is different from that of Black.
Straightest lines
C H E C K P O IN T
The Color Registration Adjustment explained in this section makes adjustments to avoid color gaps in the primary scan direction. Related color gaps in the secondary scan direction are dependent on the printer's internal conditions, so these adjustments cannot be made from the control panel. (Refer to Chapter 2. 2.8.5 "Color Registration Control")
6. Select the Set Up Menu. 7. Select the Yellow Regist = xx, Cyan Regist = xx and Magenta Regist = xx in the Set Up Menu, and set up the values which are found in step 5. 8. Exit the menu on the control panel.
The following explains the method of the color registration adjustment. Follow the procedure below to adjust the color registration, when first installing the printer or after moving it to a new location. 1. Turn on the printer. 2. Select the Information Menu. 3. Select the Color Regist Sheet in the Information Menu, and press the ENTER button. 4. The color registration sheet is printed. The arrow indicates the current setting values of each color. 5. Find the values of the straightest lines by comparing the lines of each color with the black line on the both sides.
Figure 6-10. Color Registration Sheet Sample Maintenance Color Registration Adjustment 6-490
CHAPTER
AcuLaser C4100
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 This chapter describes information that is unique to the EPSON AcuLaser C4100. The chapter structures information by following section. Product Descriptions Panel Message For Troubleshooting Maintenance
Revision D
AcuLaser C4100
7-492
Revision D Font Unification to AGFA font
7.1 Product Descriptions

7.1.1 Features
ENGINE FEATURES Printing Speed: Resolution: 24ppm for both color and monochrome printing (when printing A4/LT) 600dpi
Symbol set additional ESC/Page Color Mode: 84 Scalable Fonts + 7 Bitmap Fonts PCL5e Mode: ESC/P2 Mode: FX Mode: I239X Mode: 93 Scalable Fonts + 7 Bitmap Fonts 10 Typefaces 8 Typefaces 8 Typefaces
Paper Feeding: By adding the optional cassette unit, a maximum of 1600 sheets can be fed from 4-bin in total.
Standard Option MP Tray Lower Cassette 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit 1000-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit 100 Sheets/A4, LT 500 Sheets/A4, LT 500 Sheets/A4, LT 1000 Sheets/A4, LT
Display remaining amount of C, M, Y, K toner on the panel (when Ready, Offline and Sleep display) Corresponding Job Monitoring MIB A part of functions is restricted before WebManager 3.1a version Restrictions EpsonNet WebManager JOB items are disappeared EpsonNet Direct Print 2 A JOB in HDD can not be canceled Network DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) Rendezvous SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Link Speed Corresponding ENES (EpsonNet Event Sender) Corresponding EpsonNet ASP
CONTROLLER FEATURES A large capacity HDD (20GB) can be installed. SOFTWARE FEATURES Function of update the engine controller ROM (only with flash memory version). WebAssist Renewal design Reserve Job and Form Overlay is displayed by thumbnail. Information Sheet, Job View and Form Overlay is located on left index as another menu.
AcuLaser C4100
7-493
Revision D Table 7-1. Printing mode by paper type

Mode Special Paper Thick paper 1 Video I/F Mode name Heavier Paper-L Mode Heavier Paper-L Back Face Heavier Paper-L Super High Gloss Heavier Paper-L Super High Gloss Back Face Thick paper 2 Heavier Paper-H Mode Heavier Paper-H Back Face Heavier Paper-H Super High Gloss Speed Mode Full Heavier Paper-H Super High Gloss Back Face Label (Low Temperature) Label-L Mode Label-L Super High Gloss Label Low1 Low2 Low1 Low2 Transparency Low1 Low2 Envelope Low1 Low2 Thick Paper 163~216 g/m2 Low1 Paper Type and Thickness Thick Paper 106~162 g/m2 Speed Mode Low1
7.1.2 Printer Basic Specification

RESOLUTION 600dpi PRINT MODE 600dpi Mode (Standard paper): Full speed 600dpi Mode (High-Gross Mode):Low speed1 Super High-Gross Mode: PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE Table 7-1. Printing mode by paper type
Mode Standard Paper Standard Paper (Low Temperature) Video I/F Mode name Plain Paper-L Mode Plain Paper-L Back Face Plain Paper-L High Gloss Back Face Paper Type and Thickness Standard Paper 60~105 g/m2
Low2
Low speed2
Low2
Low1
Label Label-H Mode (High Temperature) Label-H Super High Gloss OHP Transparency Mode Transparency Super High Gloss Envelope Envelope Mode Envelope Back Face Envelope Super High Gloss Envelope Super High Gloss Back Face
AcuLaser C4100
7-494
Revision D
PRINTING SPEED Table 7-2. First Printing Time

Speed Mode A4 Simplex Printing Duplex Printing Full Low1 Low2 Full Low1 Low2 Standard MP Tray 13.2 19.4 25.6 18.7 29.4 40.1 13.5 20.0 26.5 19.0 30.0 41.0 Option Cassette Unit 14.4 21.8 29.2 19.9 31.8 43.7 15.3 23.5 31.8 20.8 33.5 31.8 Unit: Second Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3
PAPER FEED Table 7-4. Paper Feed

Paper Source MP Tray Sheets Containing Capacity 100 Sheets*2 (10mm) Paper Size Applicable paper Type
A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, Standard Paper LGL, GLT*4, HLT, F4*4 Normal Paper Unspecified sizes Min size: 88.9 x 139.7 mm Max size: 215.9 x 355.6 mm 900 mm in length 64~105 g/m2 Standard Paper Normal Paper Special Applications (Labels, Transparencies) Envelopes
1 Sheet
Table 7-3. Continuous Printing Speed

Paper Size A4 Speed Mode Full Low1 Low2 Simplex Printing 24.0 12.0 8.0 Duplex Printing 7.7 5.1 Unit: ppm Standard 15.1
TBD Sheets
A4, LT
TBD Sheets (10 mm)
NOTE 1:Speeds shown are for plain paper (Low Temperature) mode. NOTE 2:Cleaning cycle occurs during printing.
Cassette 500 Sheets*2*3 (58 mm) 350 Sheets*2*3 (58 mm) 100 Sheets Option 500 Sheets*2*3 (58 mm) 1000 Sheets Unit 500 Sheets Unit
Envelopes (Monarch, C10, DL, C5, C6*4, ISO-B5*4) Unspecified size Min size: 88.9mm (width) x 139.7mm (length) (with flap opened) A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL A5 A4, LT A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL
Standard Paper Normal Paper Standard Paper Normal Paper Labels, Transparencies Standard Paper Normal Paper
*1: The value in () is capable containing height *2: Standard Paper: at RX-80 (80 g/m2) *3: Refer to 1.4. "Paper Specifications" Refer to 1.4. "Paper Specifications" *4: Paper size supported by the firmware (unsupported by the video I/F)
AcuLaser C4100
7-495
Revision D
COMPONENTS THAT REQUIRE REGULAR REPLACEMENT Table 7-5. List of components

Name Pickup Roll Feed Roll Assy (for MP Tray) Pickup Roll Assy Regi Roll Assy Feed Roll Assy (for cassette unit) Life 100K pages 300K pages 300K pages 300K pages 300K pages
NOISE Table 7-7. Main Unit

Print Mode Full Speed Mode Low Speed 1 Mode Low Speed Mode 2 Standby Mode*1*2 Sleep Mode Sound pressure 55.0dB (A) 52.0dB (A) 52.0dB (A) 36.5dB (A) Sound power level 6.7 (B) 6.45 (B) 6.45 (B) 4.95 (B)
Background Noise
POWER CONSUMPTION Table 7-6. Power Consumption

120V Maximum current rated Power consumption maximum at continuous printing Average at continuous printing Average during standby with heating on Average during power save mode with heating off Power-Source off 8A 900W 600Wh 180Wh 45Wh 0Wh 240V 4A 900W 600Wh 180Wh 45Wh 0Wh Full Speed Mode Low Speed 1 Mode Low Speed Mode 2 Standby Mode*1*2 Sleep Mode Print Mode
Table 7-8. With Options Installed

500 Sheets Unit Sound pressure 55.0dB (A) 53.0dB (A) 53.0dB (A) 36.5dB (A) Sound power level 6.8 (B) 6.7 (B) 6.7 (B) 4.95 (B) 1000 Sheets Unit Sound pressure 55.0dB (A) 51.0dB (A) 52.0dB (A) 36.5dB (A) Sound power level 6.9 (B) 6.6 (B) 6.6 (B) 4.95 (B)
Background Noise
PRODUCT LIFETIME (MAIN UNIT) 600K printed pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
NOTE 1:values measured by ISO7779 9-point method NOTE 2:measured with MP Tray closed NOTE 3:both simplex printing and duplex printing have the same values
*1: The fan is rotating at a half velocity. *2: In standby mode, a fan may stop according to the condition of a fuser. When the fan stops, noise becomes background only.
AcuLaser C4100
7-496
Revision D
7.1.3 Various Sensors

Table 7-9. Various Sensors
Unit Toner Cartridge (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) Detectable Matter Cartridge presence/ absence New cartridge Cartridge type Detectable Device Automatic detection by Micro switch and CSIC Automatic detection by CSIC Irregular shape of cartridge Remarks Prioritize micro switch
7.1.5 Consumable Components

Table 7-10. Specifications
Unit Toner Cartridge Black Toner Cartridge Cyan Toner Cartridge Magenta Toner Cartridge Yellow Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit 30~50K sheets*2 25K sheets 100K sheets 359 (W) x 146 (D) x 179 (H) 309 (W) x 85 (D) x 60 (H) 389 (W) x 94 (D) x 86 (H) 4.5 0.5 1.5 Lifetime Average of 10,000 printed sheets*1 Average of 8,000 printed sheets*1 Dimensions (mm) 355 (W) x 51 (D) x 55 (H) Weight (kg) 0.4
--The shape of cartridge housing is unique to each color, and this prevents it from installing on the wrong cartridge holder. -----
Near life end Work life end
Automatic detection Softcounter
7.1.4 Paper Specifications

STANDARD PAPER TYPE RX-80 (80 g/m2): A4
*1: The number of sheets is the approximate number of printable images using A4 landscape continuous printing at 5% image occupation rate. The first cartridge will Near End for TBD page count. (In order to fill the developer with toner.) *2: Work life will differ with usage conditions.
XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75g/m2): LT
AcuLaser C4100
7-497
Revision D
7.1.6 Control Panel

7.1.6.1 Special Operations
Table 7-11. List of Operating Functions
Function ROM Module Copy Operating Method Refer to the description in right column.
ROM MODULE COPY 1. Make sure that the printer is turned off. Insert a blank ROM module into the slot A on the main controller and this is a destination module. (The source module is the one inserted in the slot P.) 2. Turn the printer on while holding down the buttons; [Start/Stop], [Job Cancel], [Down]. 3. As soon as the message Program Device is appeared on a LCD panel, release all other buttons and press the [Up] button and holding it untill Complex Exe is displayed. 4. Press [Up] button until the message Copy MENU is displayed.
C A U T IO N
Ignore EpsonNet ASP in HDD Turn the power on pressing the Back, Enter and Job Cancel buttons. Hex Dump Support Mode Initialization of EEPROM Panel Setting Value Initialization Forced Deleting of the Flash ROM A Module Program ROM Update Maintenance Mode CPU reset in a Service Call occurrence. Detailed Information Display in a Service Call occurrence Printing of the Error Sheet
Refer to 1.14.4. "Special Operations"
The special menu items; other than Copy MENU, are only for development purpose and not intend to be operated for field service & support purpose. Never attempt to use other menu items unless specifically instructed to do so.
5. Press [Enter] button to enter Copy MENU. 6. Press [Up] buttons until the message Copy FONT + CODE] is displayed. 7. Press [Enter] button to start copying the ROM module. When the message Copy END is displayed, the copy operation is completed. 8. Turn the printer off and remove the ROM module from the slot A.
AcuLaser C4100
7-498
Revision D
*3: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Network I/F = On. *4: This is displayed and can be executed only when the printer is equipped with Level 3 compatible Type-B host interface and AUX I/F = On is set at startup. *5: This is displayed and can be executed only when the PostScript 3 module is installed. *6: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be executed in EJL. It is not open to users.
7.1.6.2 Panel Setting Item

NOTE: The factory defaults values are shown in Bold style. INFORMATION MENU List
Item Status Sheet Reserve Job List *1 Form Overlay List *2 NetworkStatus Sheet *3 ColorRegist Sheet AUX Status Sheet *4 PS3 Status Sheet *5 PS3 Font Sample *5 ESC/Page Font Sample *6 LJ4 Font Sample ESCP2 Font Sample FX Font Sample I239X Font Sample C Toner *7 M Toner *7 Y Toner *7 K Toner *7 Photocon *7 Total Pages *7 Color Pages *7 B/W Pages *7 E* E* E* E* E* Value
*7: This item is only displayed, and cannot be changed in the setting.
Explanation C, M, Y, K Toner The remaining toner (C, M, Y, K) level is displayed in 7 steps (display only, exclusive readout).
E******F E***** F E**** F E*** E** E* E F F F F : 100% Remaining Toner > 83% : : : : : : 83% Remaining Toner > 66% 66% Remaining Toner > 50% 50% Remaining Toner > 33% 33% Remaining Toner > 16% 16% Remaining Toner > Remaining Toner = 0% 0%
Photocon
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
*F ~ E *F ~ E *F ~ E *F ~ E *F ~ E
F F F F F
The Photoconductor Unit Life level is displayed in 7 steps (display only, exclusive readout).
E******F E***** F E**** F E*** E** E* E F F F F : 100% Remaining Toner > 83% : : : : : : 83% Remaining Toner > 66% 66% Remaining Toner > 50% 50% Remaining Toner > 33% 33% Remaining Toner > 16% 16% Remaining Toner > Remaining Toner = 0% 0%
0 ~ 99999999 0 ~ 99999999 0 ~ 99999999
*1: This is displayed only when a Job is registered in the Quick Print Job. *2: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Form Overlay is implemented.
AcuLaser C4100
7-499
Revision D
STATUS MENU When a warning message occurs, all warnings occurred at the entering SelecType is displayed.
PRINTING MENU List

Item Page Size Wide A4 Orientation Resolution RITech Toner Save Image Optimum Top Offset Left Offset T Offset B L Offset B Value A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM *2 Off, On Port, Land 600, 300 On, Off Off, On Auto, Off, On -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default value of the A4 type controller. *2: Paper sizes (width x length) for CTM (Custom) are min: 88.9 x 139.7 mm and max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm.
AcuLaser C4100
7-500

Item Magenta_Regist Yellow_Regist Item Lang English (Lang, Sprache, LINGUA, LENG, Franais SPRK, Sprog, Taal, KIELI, Lng.) Deutsch ITALIANO ESPAOL SVENSKA Dansk Nederl. SUOMI Portugus Time Out Paper Source MP Mode *1 Manual Feed Copies Quantity Duplex Binding Start Page Paper Type Paper Side Skip Blank Page Auto Eject Page Size lgnore Auto Cont Page Protect LCD Contrast Cyan_Regist *5 *3 *4 0, 5 ~ 60 ~ 300 step1 Auto, MP, LC1, LC2 *1*2, LC3 *1 Normal, Last Off, 1st Page, Eachpage 1 ~ 999 1 ~ 999 Off, On Long Edge, Short Edge Front, Back Normal, Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated Front, Back Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Auto, On
0 ~ 8~ 15
Revision D
Value -7 0 7 -7 0 7 Off, On
SETUP MENU List

Value
Panel
Lock*6
*1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional 500-sheets lower paper cassette is installed. *2: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional 1000-sheets lower paper cassette is installed. *3: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be set in EJL or PJL. It is not stored in NVRAM. *4: Duplex printing is available only for A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, EXE and GLG paper sizes. Use single-side printing for other sizes. *5: This is valid for PCL5e, ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX and I239X. *6: This is not displayed, and not printed on the Status Sheet. It can be set by EJL, EpsonNet WebAssist,etc.
-7 ~ 0 ~ 7
AcuLaser C4100
7-501
Revision D
RESET MENU List

Item Clear Warning Clear All Warning Reset Reset All SelecType Init Value
NETWORK MENU List

Item Network I/F Network Config Get IPAddress*2 IP*2*3 SM*2 GW*2 NetWare*2 AppleTalk*2 MS Network*2 Rendezvous*2 Link Speed*2 Buffer Size On, off No, Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Full, 10 Half Normal, Maximum, Minimum Value
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer. *2: This is displayed and can be selected only when Network Config = Yes. *3: This is displayed current values and can not be changed when Get IPAddress = Auto is set. When the setting Get IPAddress = Auto is changed to Panel or PING, the value set up at the time of Panel or PING set before Panel is displayed.
AcuLaser C4100
7-502
Revision D
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or restarting the printer. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer. Value *2: This is displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed. *3: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when Level 3 compatible TypeB host interface is installed. This automatically returns to "AUX Config = No" when the printer status changed to Online. *4: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when "AUX Config = Yes" is selected. The setting value switches to the Online status, and becomes valid when the network card restarts. Therefore, when changing the setting value, executing AUX Status Sheet of the Test print menu before recovering from the Panel setting mode prints the previous setting value. *5: This is displayed current values and can not be changed when Get IPAddress = Auto is set. When the setting Get IPAddress = Auto is changed to Panel or PING, the value set up at the time of Panel or PING set before Panel is displayed. *6: This is displayed and can be set only when Rendezvous compatible Type-B host interface is installed.
AUX MENU*1*2 List

Item AUX I/F AUX Config*3 Get IPAddress*2 IP*2*3 SM*2 GW*2 NetWare*3*4 AppleTalk*3*4 MS Network*3*4 Rendezvous*3*4*5 AUX Init*3*4 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum On, Off No, Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off
AcuLaser C4100
7-503
Revision D
ESC/PAGE MENU*1 List

Item Auto CR Auto FF CR Function LF Function FF Function Error Code Avoid Error PGI TriColorSpace CM Media Type Process Mode On, Off On, Off CR, CR+LF CR+LF, LF CR+FF, FF Ignore, Space Off, On On, Off Normal, sRGB Off, Opt1, Opt2 1, 2 Value
*1: This is not displayed on the panel or the Status Sheet. It can be specified in EJL.
AcuLaser C4100
7-504

Item Form Source SymSet Item Font Source Font Number Pitch *3 Height *3 SymSet Value Resident, Download *1, ROM A *2 0 ~ available (Max 65535) 0.44 ~ 10.00 ~ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi 4.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt IBM-US, ECM94-1, 8859-10ISO, IBM-DN, PcTk437, WiAnsi, WiBALT, VeInternati, Math-8, PiFont, ANSI ASCII, Spanish, French2, PcIcelandic, PcPortugues, PcCanFrench, 8859-3 ISO, WiEstonian, CodeMJK, PcGk437, 8859-7 ISO, PcCy855, PcUkr866, WiCyrillic, 8859-8 ISO, Arabic8, OCR A, Pc866Cyr, ISOCyr, WinGrk, Pc862Heb, Roman-8, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcMultiling, PcEur858, WiE.Europe, DeskTop, VeUS, PsMath, Legal, Swedis2, German, Windows, PcLt774, PcEt850, PcSl437, 8859-4 ISO, WiLatvian, BpBRASCII, PcGk851, WiGreek, PcCy866, PcLit771, Bulgarian, Hebrew8, PcAr864, OCR B Pc866Ukr, Pc8Grk, ISOGrk, Pc864Ara, Roman-9, 8859-9 ISO, PcBlt775, PcE.Europe, Pc1004, WiTurkish, PsText, MsPublishin, VeMath, UK, Italian, Norweg1, McText, PcTurk1, PcTurk2, PcNordic, WiBaltic, Mazowia BpAbicomp, PcGk869, Europe3, PcLt866, 8859-5 ISO, Hebrew7, PcHe862, 8859-6 ISO, WinCyr, Pc851Grk, Greek8, HPWARA Dest SymSet CR Function LF Function Tray Assign *5 5~ 60 *4
~ 64
Revision D
Value *4
~ 128 Lines
LJ4 MENU List
0 ~ 277 ~ 3199 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199 CR, CR+LF LF, CR+LF 4, 4K, 5S
*1: This is displayed only when some download fonts exist. *2: This is displayed only when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket. *3: Either of these is displayed depending on the selected font type. In the case of a fixed pitch font, Pitch is displayed and in the case of a proportional pitch font, Height is displayed. Neither of these is displayed in the case of a bitmap font. Both Pitch and Height appears in some cases (such as changing Font Source or Font Number when PCL5 is not run internally). *4: 60 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 64 if it is set to A4. *5: When changing the Value of SymSet, and the font specified by Font Number does not include the Symbol Set, the settings are coupled to be Font Source = Resident and Font Number = 0, therefore when printing with this Symbol Set, set the Value of Font Source and Font Number to a font that supports this Symbol Set.
AcuLaser C4100
7-505
Revision D
ESCP2 MENU List

Item Font Pitch Condensed T.Margin Text CGTable Value Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max: 67) Lines PcUSA, PcCanFrenc, PcE.Europe, PcEur858, PcTurkish1, PcGk437, PcCy855, Bulgarian, PcHe864, PcAr864Ara, ISO Latin2, Italic, PcNordic, BpBRASCII, ISO Latin 1, 8859-9 ISO, PcGK851, PcCy866, Hebrew7, PcAr720, PcLat866 PcMultilin, PcTurkish2, BpAbicomp, 8859-15ISO, Mazowia, PcGk869, PcUkr866, Hebrew8, PcLit774, PcPortugue, Pclcelandic, Roman 8, PcSl437, CodeMJK, 8859-7 ISO, PcLit 771, PcAr862, Estonia,
SUPPORT MENU*1 List

Item HDD Format*3 PS3 HDD Init*4 Sleep Mode*2 Enable, Disable Value
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. *2: STANDBYTIME command (nondisclosure) of EJL is also supported. When Disable is selected, Fuser is in the status where printing is immediately possible, except when any engine errors occur. *3: This is displayed and can be executed only when HDD is installed. *4: This is displayed and can be executed only when both of PS3 and HDD are installed.
Country
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, Barcode 0,
AcuLaser C4100
7-506
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Explanation Feed Offset

Item Normal Thick ExtraThk Trnsprnc Coated Envelope Thick Back ExtraThk Back Cleaning Cycle Feed Offset Scan Offset Feed Offset 2 Scan Offset 2 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 0 ~ -5 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm Value A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *2 A step is one level *3
Revision D
PRINTER ADJUST MENU*1 List
Fine adjust printing misalignment of paper feeding direction in simplex printing of front side of duplex printing. Scan Offset Fine adjust printing misalignment of laser scan direction in simplex printing or front side of duplex printing. Feed Offset 2 Fine adjust printing misalignment of paper feeding direction in back side of duplex printing. Scan Offset 2 Fine adjust printing misalignment of laser scan direction in back side of duplex printing.
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. The contents of this menu are not localized. When this menu is active, cover open/closed errors do not occur and printer data is not sent. When the value of this menu is changed and it escapes to a menu, the printer is rebooted automatically. *2: The current changes 5% for each step. *3: This menu sets the shortening proportion of cleaning cycle. (0: 100%, -1: 90%, -2: 80%, -3: 70%, -4: 60%, -5: 50%) The cleaning cycle is regulated by total print volume of Photoconductor Unit. This setting will work after restoring the printer.
AcuLaser C4100
7-507
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Explanation E Mode
Revision D
MAINTENANCE MODE*1 This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Then restarting the printer deletes the Maintenance Menu from the Menu (the Maintenance Mode is deleted = the printer has switched to the normal mode). Basically, this setting is for maintenance by service personnel. Do not open to an user this mode. Engine trouble error (include Calibrating printer) will not occur if entering the maintenance mode with opening Cover A or Cover B.
For customization purpose only. (Yellow, Magenta and Cyan toner consumption (except Black) is economized to less than 80% by this setting for special customer. The printer is rebooted after setting.)
C A U T IO N
Do not change this setting by service engineer.
C A U T IO N
List
Item Engine Status Sheet E Mode Clear Error Log *1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Always displayed in English regardless of the Lang setting in the Setup Menu. 0, 1 Value
AcuLaser C4100
7-508
Revision D
7.1.7 Status Sheet

NETWORK MENU The current setting of NetWare, AppleTalk, Rendzvous and Link Speed are printed. INFORMATION Describes Name (English only, 36-digit), Remaining Amount (10-digit), Warning (20-digit) and Number (30-digit) of consumables that can be replaced by users. Needed soon is added when the amount reaches the level where a warning occurs.
Name Toner Cartridge Cyan Toner Cartridge Magenta Toner Cartridge Yellow Toner Cartridge Black Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit 120(110-120V)/220(220-240V) Parts Number S050146 S050147 S050148 S050149 S051093 S053006 S053011/S053012
THE LOWEST DESCRIPTION SECTION OF THE STATUS SHEET ICxxx xxx xxx yyy yyy yyy: xxx xxx xxx indicates that number of Toner Cartridge replacements for each color. yyy yyy yyy indicates that number of clearing toner error for each color. MCU version (Upper 5-digit shows MCU version and lower 5-digit shows NVRAM version in the engine.) USB version (F: USB1.1)
MCxxxxxxxxxx:
22PNNYYMMDDhhmmssX: USB serial number F:
SLEEP MODE = DISABLE This is printed to inform user that the setting is Disable only when the setting is Sleep Mode = Disable.
Figure 7-1. Status Sheet
AcuLaser C4100
7-509
Revision D Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages

LED Message Replace Photocondctr Replace TransferUnit Printer Open Install LC1 Install LC2 Manual Feed sss*3 Cant Print Duplex Paper Out ttt*2 sss*4 Paper Set ttt*2 sss*4 Print Overrun Mem Overflow Duplex Mem Overflow Invalid HDD Invalid PS3 Invalid AUX I/F Card Invalid ROM A Write Error ROM A Write Error ROM P Reset to Save Writing ROM A Writing ROM P Menus Locked (Panel setting display) Reserve JobCanceled Hard Disk full Form Data Canceled PS3 Hard Disk full Cant Print Collate was disabled Check Paper Size Image Optimum Check Paper Type Need Memory Format Error ROM A Form Feed Category Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Status Status Status Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Status Error Light*6 Status code ON ON ON ON ON Flash2 Flash1 ON Flash1 Flash1 Flash1 Flash1 ON ON ON ON ON ON --------------------------------4236 4236 4002 4007 4007 1013 3005 4010 3003 3000 3001 3004 4202 4201 4014 4003 4006 4006 1005 1005 1001 2565 2569 2570 2561 2072 2013 2004 2002 2008 2003 2000 1008
7.2 Panel Message For Troubleshooting

7.2.1 List of Printer Messages
The table below shows the list of printer message of AcuLaser C4100. Each message is the one when Lang = English is set. Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages
Category Error Light*6 Status code Status (Display when Power is Turned On) Service call error Service Req Cffff*1 ON 6000 Service call error*1 ON 6001 ~ 6999 Service Req Eggg*1 Status Formatting HDD --Error Optional RAM Error ON Status ROM CHECK --Status RAM CHECK --Status HDD CHECK --Status Unable Clear Error ON Status Self Test --Status Reset All All Flash 1004 Status Reset --1004 Status Cancel All Print Job --1003 Status Cancel Print Job --1003 Error Check Transparency ON 4021 Error Jam xxxx ON 4234 Error Face-down Full Flash2 4090 Error Wrong Toner uuuu ON 4237 Error NonGenuinetoner uuuu Flash2 4241~4255 Error TonerCart Error uuuu ON 4238 Error Install uuuu TnrCart ON 4235 Error Install Photocondctr ON 4235 Error Install Fuser ON 4235 Error Install TransferUnit ON 4235 Error Clear Sensor ON 4228 Error Wrong Photoconductor ON 4237 Error Replace Toner uuuu ON 4236 LED Message
AcuLaser C4100
Panel Message For Troubleshooting
7-510
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages

LED Message (Display in test printing) Calibrating Printer Offline*5 Cancel Print Job (by host) uuuu Toner Low Worn Photoconductor Worn Fuser Worn Transfer Unit Sleep*5 NonGenuine Toner Ready*5 (Printing) (Communication to non-active I/F) (executing of Job (possible to print)) Category Status Status Status Warning Warning Warning Warning Status Warning Status Status Status Status Error Light*6 Status code 1010 1014 1001 1003 2571 2571 2571 2571 1007 2571 1000 1009 1012 1002
Revision D
7.2.2 Details of Error Message and Treatment

Install uuuu TnrCart Description One of the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges is not installed. The uuuu display corresponds to the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges, and indicates the cartridge that is not installed. When protect tape is removed with installing bran-new toner cartridge, this error occurs. Treatment By opening the top cover and installing the displayed toner cartridge, the error is released. When equipped a protect tape in the toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge from the printer, reinstall the toner cartridge and remove the protect tape. Install Fuser Description
---------------------------
C H E C K P O IN T
The Printer Message list is described in the order or descending priorities (the top item is the highest on the list or priorities).
*1: Refer to 3.3.3. "Service Call Error Messages". *2: The relevant values among the Values of Paper Source in the panel setting except for Auto are displayed. *3: The relevant values among the Values for Paper Size in the panel setting are displayed. *4: The relevant values among the Values for each paper feed Size in the Tray Menu in the panel setting are displayed. *5: The remaining amount of toner is displayed on the right side of panel in order of C, M, Y and K from the left. *6: Refer to 1.14.2. "Display Elements Description"
The Fuser Unit is not installed, or is not set correctry.Or the Fuser Unit is broken. Treatment Turn the printer off, leave the printer for 30 minutes or more, open the Cover B, push the left lever of the Cover D, open the Cover D and install the Fuser Unit correctly. Close the Cover D and close the Cover B at the end. When install Fuser message is displayed in spite of above operation, the Fuser Unit is broken or is not adaptable to this product.
AcuLaser C4100
7-511
Revision D
Replace Toner uuuu Description The printer detects that a toner is empty according to the Toner End sensor and the toner's Dispense Time of each color of the engine, and printing stops. Printing in the Toner End status cannot provide proper color expression, therefore the error cannot be released by pressing the Start/Stop button. The uuuu shows CMYK corresponding to the each C, M, Y, K toner cartridge, indicating only the toner cartridge detected that it contains no remaining toner. Treatment Replace toner Cartridge. Wrong Toner uuuu Description An improper toner cartridge is installed. Treatment Install appropriate toner cartridge. NonGenuineToner uuuu Description One of a toner cartridges is not genuine one. Treatment Install appropriate toner cartridge or press the Start/Stop button to clear this error. In case of clearing this error by pressing Start/Stop button, the warning message Non Genuine Toner appears.1
TonerCart Error uuuu Description One of the toner cartridges is broken. Treatment Reinstall the toner cartridge or install new toner cartridge to clear this error. When this error is not cleared by above operation, turn the printer off and then turn the printer on again.
7.2.3 Details of Warning Message and Treatment

NonGenuine Toner Description One of the toner cartridges is not genuine. Treatment This warning message is released by following operations. Replace the toner cartridge to genuine one. Execute Clear All Warning. Execute Reset of Reset Menu. When restore the printer, this warning message appears again.
AcuLaser C4100
7-512
Revision D
7.3 Maintenance
7.3.1 Consumable components and regularly replaced parts
LIST OF COMPONENTS
FUSER UNIT
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY
ROLL ASSY FEED

ROLL ASSY FEED
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y, M, C, K) CHUTE ASSY REGI PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
TRANSFER UNIT
Figure 7-2.
AcuLaser C4100
Maintenance
7-513
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 9-2. List of components

Category Name Code S050146 S050147 S050148 S050149 S051093 Life (page) 8,000 8,000 8,000 10,000 30,000~50,000 Consumable components Cyan Toner Cartridge Magenta Toner Cartridge Yellow Toner Cartridge Black Toner Cartridge Photoconductor Unit Replacement Time Replace Toner uuuu Note
Revision D
--Worn Photocondctor The Photoconductor Unit can be Replace Photocondctr used until the Replace Photocondctr error appears, however the printing quality after that the Worn Photoconductor message appears is not guaranteed. Replace TransferUnit Same as ALC4000s one Worn Fuser The printing quality after that the Worn Fuser message appears is not guaranteed. Therefore replace the Fuser Unit immediately. Judge the replacement The life values are reference intervals depending on values. both the printing volume and wear status.
Transfer Unit Fuser Unit 120/220
S053006 S053011/S053012
25,000 100,000
Regularly replaced parts
Roll Assy Roll Assy Feed Chute Assy Regi Roll Assy Feed
1110099 1111869 2085209 1110119
100,000 300,000 300,000 300,000
AcuLaser C4100
Maintenance
7-514
Revision D
COMPATIBILITY
Components Toner Cartridge Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit ALC4100 => ALC4000 Compatible Compatible Not compatible. Install Fuser error occurs. ALC4100 <= ALC4000 Not compatible. Wrong Photoconductor error occurs.
COVER ASSY TOP PHD FUSER ASSY
Not compatible. It can not install due to the shape difference.
REPLACEMENT METHOD Fuser Unit 1. Release the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT. 2. Press the Lever down and raise the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from the printer body. 3. Release the 2 locks of the right and left side on the FUSER UNIT upper side. 4. Remove the FUSER UNIT from the printer body. 5. Install the new FUSER UNIT to printer body. 6. Lock the FUSER UNIT. 7. Close covers. Figure 7-3. Fuser Unit Replacement
AcuLaser C4100
Maintenance
7-515
Revision D Paper Type (Type) Paper type is shown by decimal number. Table 9-4. Paper Type
Code 00 08 04 14 05 15 09 06 Paper Type Normal Transparency Thick Thick Back ExtraThk ExtraThk Back Labels Envelopw
7.3.2 Engine Status Sheet

Transfer Unit Number of printed copies of the Transfer Unit. Installing a new Transfer Unit will reset it when a waste toner box is full or warning message appears. Power On Number of power on operation Sleep Number of times which the printer resumed form sleep mode MCU MCU version and NVRAM version (the value read from the engine) Error Log This is the history of the latest 20 errors which have occurred in the penal messages, EJL status codes, Total Pages and Jam Code, Paper Size and Paper Type when error occurs. Jam Code (Jam) Shows a jammed location as a bit information Table 9-3. Jam Code
bit 4 3 2 1 Jammed Location Duplex Jam Fuser Jam Reg Jam Feed Jam
Paper Size (Size) Paper size is shown by character sequence displayed on a panel (A4, A3, etc.). Figure 7-4. Engine Status Sheet
AcuLaser C4100
Maintenance
7-516
Revision D
7.3.3 List of control information and control methods

Table 7-12. List of control information and control methods
Information Name C Toner Counter Dispense time Total Dot C Toner Change M Toner Counter Dispense time Total Dot M Toner Change Y Toner Counter Dispense time Total Dot Y Toner Change K Toner Counter Dispense time Total Dot K Toner Change Power On Sleep Jam Code 1 Page Size 1 Paper Type 1 Engine Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller ~99,999 0~2147483647*1 ~255 0~99999999 0~99999999 ------100msec --Times Times Times ------When providing toner to the development Using toner Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge When power on When back from sleep mode When an error occurs When an error occurs When an error occurs Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge (EEPROM initialization) --(EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) Engine Controller Controller ~99,999 0~2147483647*1 ~255 100msec --Times When providing toner to the development Using toner Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge (EEPROM initialization) --Engine Controller Controller ~99,999 0~2147483647*1 ~255 100msec --Times When providing toner to the development Using toner Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge (EEPROM initialization) --Engine Controller Controller ~99,999 0~2147483647*1 ~255 100msec --Times When providing toner to the development Using toner Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge (EEPROM initialization) --Count Processing and Storage Location Range Units Counting Conditions Clear Conditions
*1: When the Total dots overs the ranges, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.
NOTE 1:The values in parentheses of the Clear Conditions indicate that the values are cleared as the result. NOTE 2:When exceeding the ranges, the items controlled by the controller are not guaranteed beyond the maximum limit. NOTE 3:When counting value which storage in engine over the range, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.
AcuLaser C4100
Maintenance
7-517
Revision D Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100

RefNo. 16-1-200 RAM DIMM GUIDE RAIL "GROUNDING SPRING,TYPE-B" "BOARD ASSY., MAIN" "BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY" CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ASIC MICROCONTROLLER ASIC HYBRID IC ASIC ASIC PERIPHERAL IC PERIPHERAL/INTERFACE CONTROLLER IC STRAP CHUTE RETADE ROLL ASSY GUIDE END SPRING N/F ACTUATOR SIZE COVER FDR FRONT COVER CASSETTE REAR BLOCK CHUTE ASSY TURN HOUSING FDR L 16-1-202 16-1-203 16-1-50 16-1-51 CN402 CN408 CN600 CN701 IC101 IC102 IC402 IC501 IC600 IC601 IC702 IC704 02-1-08 03-1-05 03-1-06 03-2-01 03-2-07 03-2-21 04-1-01 04-1-03 04-1-04 04-1-06 04-2-01 Part Name
7.4 Parts List for AL-C4100

Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
RefNo. NONFIG 01-1-01 01-1-02 01-1-03 01-1-09 01-1-10 01-1-11 01-1-12 01-1-19 01-1-23 01-1-28 01-1-50 01-1-52 01-2-01 01-2-02 01-2-04 01-2-05 01-2-06 01-2-10 01-2-12 01-2-19 NONFIG 16-1-10 16-1-12 16-1-13 CONTROL PANEL COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD COVER FRONT HEAD FAN FUSER CVR TOP STOPPER COVER TOP COVER ASSY TOP MAIN LATCH TOP R LATCH TOP L COVER REAR KIT COVER ASSY TOP KIT COVER ASSY TOP PHD COVER SIDE L COVER SIDE R SPRING LINK LINK COVER ASSY FRONT IN COVER ASSY FRONT TRAY ASSY MSI TRAY ASSY LOW "LOGO PLATE 10X40;C,2COLOR SEIKEI" PANEL REAR ESS GUIDE L ESS GUIDE R ESS Part Name DC TOOL WO ADAPTER
AcuLaser C4100
Parts List for AL-C4100
7-518
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
RefNo. 04-2-02 04-2-03 04-2-04 04-2-05 04-2-06 04-2-08 04-2-09 04-2-10 04-2-11 04-3-01 04-3-03 04-3-04 04-3-06 04-3-17 04-3-18 04-3-21 04-3-25 04-3-28 05-1-01 05-1-02 05-1-05 05-1-09 06-1-01 06-1-02 06-1-05 06-1-09 06-1-10 06-1-11 HOUSING FDR R HARNESS ASSY TMPA ENVIRONMENT SENSOR FOOT STOPPER CST SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC LEVER LOW PAPER INDICATOR PICK UP ASSY ROLL ASSY FEED EXIT SENSOR ACTUATOR LINK SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 ROLL ASSY TURN ROLL ASSY HARNESS ASSY FEEDER HOUSING ASSY RETARD ROLL TURN ROLL ASSY RETARD CLUTCH TURN MSI CHUTE ASSY IN WIRE ASSY BTR 2 WIRE ASSY DTSK HARNESS ASSY FSR3C HARNESS ASSY CTD SENSOR ASSY ADC Part Name RefNo. 06-1-13 06-1-14 06-1-18 06-1-20 06-1-21 06-1-30 06-1-50 06-1-51 07-1-01 07-1-02 07-1-03 07-1-04 07-1-05 07-1-12 07-1-13 07-1-23 07-1-27 07-1-37 07-1-40 07-1-43 07-1-50 07-1-51 08-1-01 08-1-04 08-1-05 08-1-79 09-1-01 10-1-01

Part Name WASTE TONER SENSOR HARNESS ASSY TFLSNS DRIVE ASSY FUSER WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH LATCH R LATCH L KIT ROLL PINCH TURN KIT ROLL PINCH DUP CHUTE ASSY OUT HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS E.R.M. SENSOR ACTUATOR FULL STACK ROLL DUP ACTUATOR DUP HARNESS ASSY DUP 2 ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR MSI SOLENOID FEED MSI WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT KIT ROLL PINCH CHUTE ASSY EXIT ROLL EXIT ROLL MID KIT GLOMET FUSER ASSY (220V) CHUTE ASSY REGI
AcuLaser C4100
7-519
RefNo. 10-1-12 10-1-20 10-1-21 10-1-23 11-1-01 11-1-04 11-1-05 11-1-50 12-1-06 12-1-08 12-1-09 12-2-01 12-2-02 12-2-03 12-2-04 12-2-09 12-3-01 12-3-03 12-3-08 12-3-13 12-3-14 12-3-15 13-1-02 13-1-04 13-1-05 13-1-08 13-1-10 13-1-11 CLUTCH REGI E.R.M. SENSOR ACTUATOR REGI HOUSING ASSY ROS ASSY HSG ASSY BIAS STUD PLUNGER KIT HSG ASSY BIAS HRANESS ASSY TNR4SE PWB EEPROM HVPS SUB KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(Y) KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(M) KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(C) KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(K) SENSOR TONER LOW PLATE ASSY DISPENSER BOX ASSY CRUM READER HARNESS ASSY CRUM RACK V GEAR SLIDE RACK H BRACKET LEVER LEVER DRUM SPRING LEVER 30N ACTUATOR I/L GEAR IDL PRESS GEAR ASSY PR R Part Name RefNo. 13-1-14 13-1-17 13-1-18 13-1-20 14-1-01 14-1-02 15-1-02 15-1-03 15-1-05 15-1-10 15-1-11 15-1-15 15-2-01 15-2-02 15-2-03 15-2-04 15-2-05 15-2-06 15-2-07 15-2-08 15-2-09 15-2-10 15-2-12 NONFIG NONFIG NONFIG FILM REGI PWBA ASSY EARTH GEAR ASSY PR L CHASSIS MAIN DRIVE ASSY DEVE DRIVE ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU CPU HBN STD FAN REAR CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS LVPS HARNESS ASSY AC SW PWBA DRV HBN HARNESS ASSY LVNC3 HARNESS ASSY DRV 1 HARNESS ASSY DRV 2.2 HARNESS ASSY LVRPG HARNESS ASSY ROS KA2 HARNESS ASSY 24V HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1 HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN HARNESS ASSY OPSEA HARNESS ASSY EEPROM HARNESS ASSY TMPNCS REPACK KIT TRAY BOTTOM REPACK KIT JOINT REPACK KIT SHEET TOP

Part Name
AcuLaser C4100
7-520
RefNo. NONFIG NONFIG NONFIG REPACK KIT PAD REPACK KIT BAG "INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,220V" Part Name
Revision D
AcuLaser C4100
7-521
Revision D
7.5 Exploded Diagram

The following pages shows the exploded diagram for the AcuLaser C4100. ( Total : 23 pages )
AcuLaser C4100
Exploded Diagram
7-522
C538-CASE-001
The parts to which no reference number is assigned will not be available as after-sale service parts.
50
10 11
1 2 3
9
(P137)
12
23
28 19
52
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4100(1.1) Rev.01 C538
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_001Fa
C538-CASE-002
4 5
10
4 5
6 12
19
C538-ELEC-001
10 12
203
202
200
51
13
50
C538-MECH-001
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_003Fb
C538-MECH-002
PL3.2
C538-MECH-003
7 7
21 21 21
C538-MECH-004
PL4. 3
3
6
PL4. 2
4 4 4
PL4. 2
C538-MECH-005
3
(P2361)
(J231)
(J471)
2 5
(J210)
11 5 5
(P810)
10
C538-MECH-006
3 1 3
6 4
(P472)
21
(P473)
18
(J474)
17
25
(J471) (J472) (J473) (P474) (P475)
(J475)
28
(J47)
C538-MECH-007
1(All this page) 2
(J19)
C538-MECH-008
1 (All except a)
(J5030)
2
(J5020)
5
(J232) (J141) (J1361) (J145) (J136) (J162)
11
(J233)
10
(J138) (J2362)
14 13
(J142)
30
(J52)
a
51
51
18
(J235)
50 50
20
21
C538-MECH-009
(J134)
1 (all this page,PL8.1) b

(J2211)
2 3
5 4
(J135) (J221) (J133) (P134)
PL8.1.a
50
(J139)
50 51
12
(P133)
51
(J1322)
(P132)
(J1321)
13
43
4
(J132)
40
(J131)
(P135)
4 37 23
(J137) (J50)
27
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_011Fc
C538-MECH-010
1 (All this page) 4 PL7.1.b
5 79
8 a
(P131)
C538-MECH-011
PL7. 1. 1
C538-MECH-012
1 (All except 23)
(J321)
(J32)
(J18)
12
20
21
(J181)
23
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4100(10.1)
Rev.01 C538
C538-MECH-013
50
4 5 5 5 5 5
C538-MECH-014
PL12. 2
(P5011)
PL12. 3
(P144)
(J342) (J703) (J702)
(J704)
(P145)
(J514)
8 6
(J51)
(J701) (J512) (J511)
(J513)
C538-MECH-015
(P514) (K)
9
(P704) (K)
(P513) (C)
9
(P703) (C)
(P512) (M)
9
(P702) (M)
(P511) (Y)
9
(P701) (Y)
HIBANAI_BE_CHAP05_017Fa
C538-MECH-016
3
(P341) (P342)
(J341)
(J3411)
15
14
13
(J710)
8
(J71)
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_018Fd
C538-MECH-017
2 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 5 20 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 8
10
18
10 11
17
14
C538-MECH-018
1
(J49) (J48)
2
C538-MECH-019
(J166)
2 5 5 5 5
10
(J161)
11 5
15
C538-MECH-020
(P34) (P35) (P140) (P15)
PL15. 1. 10
(P311) (P14) (P31) (P22) (P11) (P23)
(P13) (P32) (P24)
PL15. 1. 15
(P163) (P51) (P60) (P42) (P61) (P47) (P41) (P50) (P52) (P166) (P165) (P167) (P164) (P162) (P139) (P1361) (J5011)
(P18)
(P12) (P19) (P21) (P30) (P49) (P48)
PL15. 1. 2
(P138)
(J61)
1
(J165) (J41) (J13)
7
(P210)
2
(J11) (J42) (J21)
8
(P221)
3
(J12) (J164) (J22)
(P71)
(J144) (J141)
4
(J311) (P151) (J140)
10
(J167)
5
(J15) (J60) (J23) (P2361) (P2362)
6
(J163) (J24)
12
(P3411)
(J34)
Revision D
7.6 Circuit Schematic

The following pages shows the circuit schematic of the C538MAIN board for the AcuLaser C4100.
( Total : 7 pages )
AcuLaser C4100
Circuit Schematic
7-546
CHAPTER
APPENDIX
Revision D
8.1 Parts List and Explodede Diagram for Main Unit of The AcuLaser C4000
8.1.1 Attention on handling the parts list
Followings are the points to note when using the part list and exploded diagrams.
The numbers in each illustration correspond to the parts list number for that illustration. The capital letters shown in the illustrations stand for the following: S: screw E: E ring KL: KL clip C: C ring N: nut The arrowheads in the illustrations indicate assemblies made up of lower parts with their numbers.
Appendix
Parts List and Explodede Diagram for Main Unit of The AcuLaser C4000
8-555
Revision D Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)
No. 03-1-06 ROLL ASSY GUIDE END SPRING N/F ACTUATOR SIZE COVER FDR FRONT COVER CASSETTE REAR BLOCK CHUTE ASSY TURN HOUSING FDR L HOUSING FDR R HARNESS ASSY TMPA ENVIRONMENT SENSOR FOOT STOPPER CST SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC LEVER LOW PAPER INDICATOR PICK UP ASSY ROLL ASSY FEED EXIT SENSOR ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR LINK SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 Part Name
8.1.2 Parts List Tables

The following tables show the part list of the AcuLaser C4000.
Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)

No. 01-1-01 01-1-02 01-1-03 01-1-09 01-1-10 01-1-11 01-1-12 01-1-19 01-1-23 01-1-28 01-1-50 01-1-52 01-2-01 01-2-02 01-2-04 01-2-05 01-2-06 01-2-10 01-2-12 01-2-19 02-1-08 03-1-05 CONTROL PANEL COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD COVER FRONT HEAD FAN FUSER CVR TOP STOPPER COVER TOP COVER ASSY TOP MAIN LATCH TOP R LATCH TOP L COVER REAR KIT COVER ASSY TOP KIT COVER ASSY TOP PHD COVER SIDE L COVER SIDE R SPRING LINK LINK COVER ASSY FRONT COVER ASSY FRONT IN TRAY ASSY MSI TRAY ASSY LOW STRAP CHUTE RETADE Part Name
03-2-01 03-2-07 03-2-21 04-1-01 04-1-03 04-1-04 04-1-06 04-2-01 04-2-02 04-2-03 04-2-04 04-2-05 04-2-06 04-2-08 04-2-09 04-2-10 04-2-11 04-3-01 04-3-03 04-3-04 04-3-05 04-3-06 04-3-17 04-3-18
Appendix
8-556
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)
No. 04-3-21 04-3-25 04-3-28 05-1-01 05-1-02 05-1-05 05-1-09 06-1-01 06-1-02 06-1-05 06-1-09 06-1-10 06-1-11 06-1-13 06-1-14 06-1-18 06-1-20 06-1-21 06-1-30 06-1-50 06-1-51 07-1-01 07-1-02 07-1-03 07-1-04 ROLL ASSY TURN ROLL ASSY HARNESS ASSY FEEDER HOUSING ASSY RETARD ROLL TURN ROLL ASSY RETARD CLTCH TURN MSI CHUTE ASSY IN WIRE ASSY BTR 2 WIRE ASSY DTSK HARNESS ASSY FSR 2 HARNESS ASSY CTD SENSOR ASSY ADC WASTE TONER SENSOR HARNESS ASSY TFLSNS DRIVE ASSY FUSER WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH LATCH R LATCH L KIT ROLL PINCH TURN KIT ROLL PINCH DUP CHUTE ASSY OUT HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS E.R.M. SENSOR Part Name
No. 07-1-05 07-1-12 07-1-13 07-1-23 07-1-27 07-1-37 07-1-40 07-1-43 07-1-50 07-1-51 08-1-01 08-1-04 08-1-05 08-1-08 09-1-01 10-1-01 10-1-12 10-1-20 10-1-21 10-1-23 10-1-30 11-1-01 11-1-04 11-1-05 11-1-50 Part Name ACTUATOR FULL STACK ROLL DUP ACTUATOR DUP HARNESS ASSY DUP ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR MSI SOLENOID FEED MSI WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT KIT ROLL PINCH CHUTE ASSY EXIT ROLL EXIT ROLL MID MOTOR ASSY DUP FUSER ASSY CHUTE ASSY REGI CLUTCH REGI E.R.M. SENSOR ACTUATOR REGI HOUSING ASSY KIT SENSOR OHP ROS ASSY HSG ASSY BIAS STUD PLUNGER KIT HSG ASSY BIAS
Appendix
8-557
No. 12-1-06 12-1-08 12-1-09 12-2-01 12-2-02 12-2-03 12-2-04 12-2-09 12-2-10 12-3-01 12-3-08 12-3-13 12-3-14 12-3-15 13-1-02 13-1-04 13-1-05 13-1-08 13-1-10 13-1-11 13-1-14 13-1-17 13-1-18 13-1-20 14-1-01 Part Name HARNESS ASSY TNR PWB EEPROM HVPS SUB HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) SENSOR TONER LOW SWITCH TCRU ASSY PLATE ASSY DISPENSER HARNESS ASSY CRUM RACK V GEAR SLIDE RACK H BRACKET LEVER LEVER DRUM SPRING LEVER 30N ACTUATOR I/L GEAR IDL PRESS GEAR ASSY PR R FILM REGI PWBA ASSY EARTH GEAR ASSY PR L CHASSIS MAIN DRIVE ASSY MAIN
No. 14-1-02 15-1-02 15-1-03 15-1-05 15-1-09 15-1-10 15-1-11 15-1-15 15-2-01 15-2-02 15-2-03 15-2-04 15-2-05 15-2-06 15-2-07 15-2-08 15-2-09 15-2-10 15-2-12 16-1-05 16-1-10 16-1-12 16-1-13 DRIVE ASSY DEVE PWBA ASSY MCU&LVPS FAN REAR CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS POWER CORD LVPS HARNESS ASSY AC SW PWBA DRV HARNESS ASSY LVNC HARNESS ASSY DRV 1 HARNESS ASSY DRV 2 HARNESS ASSY LVRPG HARNESS ASSY ROS HARNESS ASSY 24V HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1 HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE A HARNESS ASSY EEPROM HARNESS ASSY TMPB "BOARD ASSY., MAIN" PANEL REAR ESS GUIDE L ESS GUIDE R ESS Part Name
Appendix
8-558
No. 16-1-200 16-1-202 16-1-203 RAM DIMM GUIDE RAIL "GROUNDING SPRING,TYPE-B" Part Name
Revision D
Appendix
8-559
Revision D
8.1.3 Exploded Diagrams

The following pages show exploded diagrams of the AcuLaser C4000.
Appendix
8-560
C470-CASE-001 The parts to which no reference number is assigned will not be available as after-sale service parts. 01-1-02 01-1-01 01-1-03
01-1-50
01-1-10
01-1-11
01-1-09 01-1-12 (J137)
01-1-23
01-1-52 01-1-19
01-1-28
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_001Fb
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4000 (1.1)
Rev.01 C470
C470-CASE-002
The parts to which no reference numb is assigned will not be available as after-sale service parts.
01-2-01
01-2-02
01-2-04
01-2-05 01-2-10
01-2-04 01-2-05
01-2-06 01-2-12
01-2-19 HANABI_BE_CHAP05_002Fb
FOR EPSON AcuLaser C4000 (1.2)
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-001
The parts to which no reference numbe is assigned will not be available as after-sale service parts.
02-1-08
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-002
03-1-05
03-1-06
PL3. 2
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_004Fa
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-003
03-2-01
03-2-07 03-2-07
03-2-21 03-2-21 03-2-21

Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-004
04-1-01 PL4. 3
04-1-03
04-1-06
PL4. 2
PL4. 2 04-1-04 04-1-04 04-1-04
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-005
04-2-03 (P2361)
(J237)
04-2-04 04-2-08
(J471) 04-2-01 04-2-02
04-2-05 04-2-06
04-2-05 (J210) 04-2-11 04-2-09 04-2-05 04-2-05
(P810) 04-2-10
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-006
04-3-01
04-3-03 04-3-03
04-3-05 04-3-06 04-3-04 (P472)
04-3-21 (P473) (J474) 04-3-18 04-3-04 04-3-17
04-3-25 (J471) (J472) (J473) (P474) (P475)
(J475)
04-3-28
(J47)
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-007
05-1-01 05-1-02
05-1-05
(J19)
05-1-09
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-008
06-1-01 (J5030)
06-1-02 (J5020)
06-1-05 (J232) (J141) (J1361) (J136) 06-1-11 (J138) (J145) 06-1-10 06-1-14 06-1-13 (J142) (J233) (J162) 06-1-09
06-1-30 06-1-18
(J52)
06-1-51
06-1-51 (J234) 06-1-50 06-1-50 (J235)
06-1-20 06-1-21
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-009 07-1-01 (J134) 07-1-02 07-1-03 (J220) 07-1-05 (P134)
07-1-04 (J133) (J135) 07-1-50 (J221) (J139) 07-1-51
07-1-50
07-1-51 (P132) 07-1-43 07-1-12 07-1-13 (P133) 07-1-04 (J132)
07-1-40
(J131) 07-1-45 (P135) 07-1-04 07-1-23 (J137) (J50) 07-1-37
07-1-27
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_011Fe
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-010
08-1-01 08-1-04
08-1-05
08-1-08
(P131)
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-011
09-1-01
PL7. 1. 1
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-012
10-1-01
10-1-12
10-1-20
10-1-21 10-1-23
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-013
11-1-01
11-1-50 11-1-04 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05 11-1-05
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-014
12-1-09
(P5011)
PL12. 3 PL12. 2
(P144) (P145) 12-1-08 (J434) (J433) (J442) (J432) (J443) (J431)
(J444)
(J441) 12-1-06 (J51)
(J514) (J513) (J512) (J511)
FOR EPSON
AcuLaserC4000 (12.1)
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-015
12-2-04 12-2-10 (P514) (K) (P434) (K) 12-2-09 (P444) (K)
12-2-10
(P433) (C) 12-2-10 12-2-09 (P443) (C) (P513) (C) 12-2-03
(P432) (M) 12-2-09 (P442) (M) 12-2-10 12-2-02 (P512) (M)
(P431) (Y) 12-2-09 (P441) (Y) (P511) (Y)
12-2-01
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-016
12-3-01
12-3-15
12-3-14 12-3-13
(J710)
12-3-08
(J71)
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-017
13-1-02
13-1-02 13-1-05 13-1-05 13-1-05
13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-04 13-1-20 13-1-05 13-1-05 13-1-05 13-1-08
13-1-19
13-1-05
13-1-10
13-1-05
13-1-18
13-1-10
13-1-11
13-1-17
13-1-14
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-018
(J49) (J48)
14-1-01
14-1-02
Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-019
(J166)
15-1-05 15-1-16
15-1-02 15-1-05 15-1-05 15-1-05 15-1-05 15-1-05
15-1-03
15-1-10
15-1-09
(J161) 15-1-11 15-1-05 15-1-05
15-1-15
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_021Fc
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4000 (15.1) Rev.01 C470
C470-MECH-020
(P13) (P140) (P15) (P311) (P26) (P32) (P14) (P31) (P24) (P22) (P18) (P19) PL15-1-02 (P48) (P11) (P23) (P30) (P12) (P21) (P49)
PL15-1-10 PL15-1-15 (P163) (P51) (P60) (P42) (P41) (P61) (P47) (P50) (P52) (P166) (P165) (P167) (P164) (P162) (P139) (P1361) (P138) (J5011)
(J61) 15-2-01 (J165) 15-2-02 (J11) (J42) (J21) 15-2-03 (J12) (J164) (J22) 15-2-04 (J311) (J151) (J140) (J41) (J13)
15-2-07 (P210)
15-2-08 (P221)
15-2-09
(P71) (J144) (J141)
15-2-10
(J2361) 15-2-05 (J15) (J60) 15-2-06 (J163)

15-2-12 (J24)
Rev.01 C470
C470-ELEC-001
16-1-10
16-1-12
16-1-203
16-1-202
16-1-200
16-1-201
16-1-13
16-1-05
Rev.01 C470
Revision D
8.2 Wiring Diagrams

This section describes the connector locations. P and J stand for Plug and Jack, respectively.
8.2.1 P/J Locations

See the following figures for the P/J locations.
Figure 8-1. P/J Location 1
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-584
Revision D
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-585
Revision D
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-586
Revision D
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-587
Revision D
8.2.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables

See the following table for the plug and jack (P/J) location.
P/J 1 10 11 12 13 14 14 15 18 19 21 22 23 24 26 Coordinates H-32 l-32 J-43 I-43 H-43 J-43 J-32 H-43 H-44 H-44 I-43 J-43 I-43 H-43 H-43 Description Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) memory Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) parallel interface Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.15 PWB Drive Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.15 PWB Drive Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 Connector for PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS to PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) font card Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL11.1.1 ROS Assy Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL10.1.1 Chute Assy Regi (Clutch Regi, Sensor Regi) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL5.1.1 Housing Assy Retard (Clutch Turn MSI) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.8 Harness Assy OPF Main Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.9 Harness Assy Opepane A Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.11 Harness Assy LVRMT Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.12 Harness Assy TMPB --
P/J 27 30 31 32 32 33 34 41 42 45 47 48 49 50 50 51 52
Coordinates I-33 H-43 J-43 H-43 J-33 I-32 J-32 I-18 J-18 K-32 J-18 I-18 I-17 J-18 I-32 J-16 I-18
Description Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) to PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS Flash-write Test-print Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL10.1.17 Harness Assy OHP Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper surface Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) hard disk Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) network card Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.2 Harness Assy DRV 1 Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.3 Harness Assy DRV 2 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) Ethernet Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL14.1.2 Drive Assy Main Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL14.1.1 Drive Assy Deve Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL7.1.23 Harness Assy Dup Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper surface Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL6.1.18 Drive Assy Fuser
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-588

P/J 60 61 64 66 71 80 120 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 Coordinates I-17 J-18 I-32 I-32 B-32 J-32 H-32 B-7 B-9 D-8 D-6 C-9 C-23 F-8 B-32 B-33 H-43 Description Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.6 Harness Assy 24V Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.1 Harness Assy LVNC Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper surface Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) EEPROM Relay Connector for PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM to PL12.3.8 Harness Assy CRUM Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper surface Jumper pin for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) Connects PL8.1.8 Motor Assy DUP and PL7.1.23 Harness Assy Dup Connects PL7.1.40 Solenoid Feed MSI and PL7.1.2 Harness Assy Front 2 Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (DUP JAM) and PL7.1.2 Harness Assy Front 2 Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (Full Stack) and PL7.1.2 Harness Assy Front 2 Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (MSI No Paper) and PL7.1.2 Harness Assy Front 2 Connects PL6.1.11 Sensor Assy ADC and PL6.1.10 Harness Assy CTD Connects PL1.1.9 Fan Fuser and PL7.1.23 Harness Assy Dup Connects PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 and PL9.1.1 Fuser Assy Relay Connector for PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM 232 F-23 164 165 166 167 181 210 220 221 231 H-28 H-28 H-27 H-28 E-38 H-23 E-7 B-33 C-49 P/J 141 142 144 151 161 162 163 Coordinates B-32 D-23 E-35 F-22 H-29 H-29 H-27 Description
Revision D
Relay Connector for PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM to PL6.1.14 Harness Assy TFLSNS Connects PL6.1.13 Sensor Toner Full and PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM Connects PL12.1.8 PWB EEPROM and PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM Connects PL11.1.1 ROS Assy and PL15.2.5 Harness Assy SOS Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.1.11 Harness Assy AC SW Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL6.1.9 Harness Assy FSR2 Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.6 Harness Assy 24V Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.4 Harness Assy LVRPG Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.1 Harness Assy LVNC Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.1.3 Fan Rear Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.11 Harness Assy LVRMT Connection for PL10.1.20 Sensor Regi and PL10.1.12 Clutch Regi harness (to PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS) Connects PL15.2.8 Harness Assy OPF Main and PL4.2.9 Harness Assy OPFREC Connects Console Panel Hanabi and PL7.1.3 Harness Assy OPEPANE BS Relay Connector for PL7.1.3 Harness Assy OPEPANE BS to PL15.2.9 Harness Assy OPEPANE A Connects PL4.2.4 Sensor HUM Temp and PL4.2.3 Harness Assy TMPA Connects PL9.1.1 Fuser Assy and PL6.1.9 Harness Assy FSR2
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-589

P/J 311 321 431 432 433 434 441 442 443 444 471 472 473 474 475 511 Coordinates I-42 E-37 E-6 E-6 E-5 F-5 G-7 G-6 H-6 H-6 J-49 E-49 H-57 G-49 H-49 I-7 Description Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.4 Harness Assy LVRPG Connects PL10.1.17 Harness Assy OHP and PL10.1.16 Sensor OHP Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (Y) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (M) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (C) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (K) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (Y) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (M) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (C) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (K) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL4.2.8 Switch SizeTray 1 and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL4.3.4 Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL4.3.4 Sensor No/Low Paper (L/P) and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL4.3.17 Solenoid Feed Tray 1 and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL4.3.18 Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy Feeder Connects PL12.2.5 Holder Assy (Y) (TNR Motor) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR P/J 512 513 514 601 602 603 604 701 702 710 801 802 804 805 810 960 Coordinates I-6 J-6 J-6 J-72 I-72 I-72 I-72 H-72 H-73 H-72 I-72 H-73 I-72 I-72 J-57 I-33 Description
Revision D
Connects PL12.2.6 Holder Assy (M) (TNR Motor) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.7 Holder Assy (C) (TNR Motor) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL12.2.8 Holder Assy (K) (TNR Motor) and PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE Y) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE M) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE C) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE K) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT1) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT2) Connects PL12.3.1 Plate Assy Dispenser and PL12.3.8 Harness Assy CRUM Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT1 CLEANER) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT2 CLEANER) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(RTC) Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(RFB) Connects Option Feeder and PL4.2.9 Harness Assy OPFREC PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) EEPROM connector
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-590

P/J 1361 2361 5011 5020 5030 Coordinates B-32 E-36 F-35 E-35 E-35 Description Relay Connector for PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 to PL6.1.10 Harness Assy CTD Relay Connector for PL15.2.12 Harness Assy TMPB to PL4.2.3 Harness Assy TMPA Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL6.1.2 Wire Assy BTR2 Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL6.1.5 Wire Assy DTSK
Revision D
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-591
Revision D
highpressure electrode DEVE Y
8.2.3 High-pressure electrode Location Tables

See the following table for the High-pressure electrode location.
highpressure electrode BTR BTR DEVE C DEVE C DEVE C DEVE K DEVE K DEVE K DEVE M DEVE M DEVE M DEVE Y DEVE Y
Coordinates B-73 F-77 I-81 G-78 H-82 B-66 D-70 A-73 D-65 C-70 C-73 D-66 C-70 C-73 E-64 B-69
Description Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.7 STUD BTR Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.7 STUD BTR Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.31 PLATE EARTH BTR Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.31 PLATE EARTH BTR Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
Coordinates E-77 I-81 B-65 D-69 B-73 B-65 D-70 C-73 B-64 D-69 B-73 B-63 D-68
Description Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.4 SHAFT BTR IN Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.4 SHAFT BTR IN Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER
DTS DTS EARTH EARTH RTC RTC RTC IDT 1 IDT 1 IDT 1 IDT 1 CLEANER IDT 1 CLEANER IDT 1 CLEANER IDT 2 IDT 2
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.4 PLATE BIAS IDT2 of HSG ASSY BIAS
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.4 PLATE BIAS IDT2 of HSG ASSY BIAS
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-592

highpressure electrode IDT 2 IDT 2 CLEANER IDT 2 CLEANER IDT 2 CLEANER RFB
Revision D
Coordinates D-73 E-65 C-70 D-73
Description Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connection for PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PLATE OF CONTACT RF of PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connection for PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PLATE OF CONTACT RF of PL15.1.8 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.18 STUD PLUNGER D/EARTH Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.18 STUD PLUNGER D/EARTH Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.23 HOUSING ASSY ELEC Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.23 HOUSING ASSY ELEC
C-66
RFB
D-71
RFB RFB GND GND
H-65 G-68 K-66 K-67
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-593
Revision D
8.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information

8.3.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
The symbols used in the overall wiring connection diagrams on the following pages are as follows:
Symbols Description Indicates connection of parts by HARNESS, wire, etc.
XX XX PWB DRIVE PL X, Y, Z
A box with no part name inside indicates a path by a connector (P/J). A number inside the box indicates connector number. Indicates a connector (P/J) written across several locations. The number inside the box indicates connector number. Boxes with part names inside indicate those parts. The part name shown here indicates item Z of plate (PL) XY in Section 8.1.2 "Parts List Tables". Indicates a section in Section 8.3.2 "Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components". The number inside indicates the section number.
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information
8-594
Revision D
Figure 8-7. Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
Appendix
8-595
Revision D
4. DEVELOPER COMPONENTS 1 Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(Y) (PL12.2.10). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(M) (PL12.2.10). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(C) (PL12.2.10). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(K) (PL12.2.10). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15). 5. DEVELOPER COMPONENTS 2 Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor:Y) (PL12.2.5). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor:M) (PL12.2.6). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor:C) (PL12.2.7). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor:K) (PL12.2.8). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15).
8.3.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components

8.3.2.1 Configuration
Wiring connection diagrams are divided into 11 sections and provide details concerning connections between parts. 1. POWER SUPPLY COMPONENTS Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and LVPS (PL15.1.10). Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and FAN REAR (PL15.1.3). Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11). 2. CASSETTE COMPONENTS Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (N/ P) (PL4.3.4). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (L/P) (PL4.3.4). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 (PL4.3.17). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 (PL4.3.18). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15). 3. DRIVE COMPONENTS Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15).
Appendix
8-596

6. FUSER COMPONENTS Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15). Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11). 7. ROS COMPONENTS Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8). Connection of PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2), PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1) and PHD ASSY (CRUM) (PL11.1.3) 8. XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS 1 Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR TNR FULL (PL6.1.13). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11). 9. XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS 2 Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9). 10. PAPER FEEDER COMPONENTS
Revision D
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER (MSI No Paper) (PL7.1.4). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CLUTCH REGI (PL10.1.12). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16). 11. CONTROLLER COMPONENTS Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB CONTROLLER (PWB ESS) (PL16.1.5). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1).
Appendix
8-597
Revision D
Symbol Description Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High: H) when a function's motion has been activated. The voltage shown is the signal strength at High condition. The arrow shows signal direction. Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High: H) when function's condition has been detected. The voltage shown is the signal strength at High condition. The arrow shows signal direction.
8.3.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components
The symbols used in the wiring connection diagrams for parts on the following pages are as follows. Explanations of commonly used symbols are omitted.
Symbol Description
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC Shows a plug (female connector).
Shows a jack (male connector).
Shows wiring connections.
P/JXX YY
PWB DRIVE PL X.Y.Z
Shows Pin yy and Jack yy for Pxx/Jxx connector. Shows a part. The "PLx.y.z" number refers to Section 8.1.2 "Parts List Tables", Plate (PL) number 'x.y', item number 'z'. Shows a part's internal component, with the name of that component.
I/L +24VDC
Shows DC voltage when the Interlock Switch of the PWBA MCU & HVPS is ON.
+5VDC +3.3VDC
Shows DC voltage.
Heater
SG
Indicates signal ground.
Control
Shows the PWB's internal CONTROLLER, with its outline.
AG
Indicates analog ground.
DEVE_A
Shows harness/wire connections between components, with the signal name/content. The arrow shows signal direction.
RTN
Indicates return.
Appendix
8-598
Revision D
Connection Diagram 1
POWER SUPPLY COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-599

LVPS (PL15.1.10) excess voltage protection circuit
Revision D
All output is shut off when an overvoltage condition occurs for 24VDC/ 5VDC/3.3VDC supply voltage. The operation point at this time is 32VDC or less for 24VDC, 7VDC or less for 5VDC, and 6VDC or less for 3.3VDC. Reset the printer by turning the power OFF for a small period of time and then turning it back ON. FAN Output Circuit Output voltage of the FAN REAR ON (H) signal changes according to the FAN LOW signal/FAN STOP signal.
FAN LOW High Low High Low FAN STOP High High Low Low FAN REAR ON (H) 24V 15V 0V 0V
Output Shut Down by I/L Switch

P/J No. P42-13 P42-12 P166-2 P12-18 P12-19 *1 Signal line FAN LOW FAN STOP FAN REAR FAIL(H)+3.3VDC FAN REAR ON(H) Description Drive Control Signal for FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) Fail detection signal for FAN REAR (PL15.1.3). (High: Abnormal, Low: Normal) ON/OFF Control Signal for FAN REAR (PL15.1.3)
The "I/L +24VDC" circuit will be interrupted if the I/L Switch installed on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) is switched to OFF. This condition will shut off the +24VDC power to the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and the +24VDC power to components connected to the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15).
P166-1
*1
NOTE: *1 Direct attachment to FAN REAR (PL.15.1.3)
LVPS (PL15.1.10) excess current protection circuit All output is shut off when 24VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC supply voltage is shorted. After the short is eliminated, reset the printer by turning the power OFF for a small period of time and then turning it back ON.
Appendix
8-600
Revision D
CASSETTE COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-601

Winding resistance for Solenoid and Clutch
P/L No. PL 4.3.17 PL 4.3.18 Parts Name SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1
Revision D
Winding resistance 96 10% (20 C) 175 10% (20 C)
P/J No. P47-1 P47-2 P47-4 P471-4 P471-3 P471-1
Signal line TRAY1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY1 NO PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TRAY1 LOW PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TRAY1 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC TRAY1 TURN CL ON(L)+24VDC
Description ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch of SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch of SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch of SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). Paper detection signal for fuser issued by SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (N/P) (PL4.3.4). Cassette paper quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (L/ P) (PL4.3.4). ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 (PL4.3.17) ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 (PL4.3.18)
P47-7
P472-1
P47-10 P473-1
P47-12 P474-1 P47-14 P475-1
Appendix
8-602
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 3 DRIVE COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-603
Revision D
P/J No. P12-1 P12-30 P42-1 P50-7 P50-8
Signal line FAN FSR LOW
Description Drive Control Signal for FAN FUSER.
P42-30 FAN FSR STOP
P137-1 FAN FSR ON(H)+24VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for FAN FUSER. P137-2 FAN FSR FAIL(H)+3.3VDC Fail detection signal for FAN FUSER. (High: Abnormal, Low: Normal)
Description of DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1). Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Winding resistance: 2.8 10% / Phase (25C) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Signal line DEVE B, DEVE TDB, DEVE A, DEVE TDA, DA_DEVEMOT DEVE_A, DEVE_B, DEVE_XA, DEVE_XB MAIN B, MAIN TDB, MAIN A, MAIN TDA, DA_MAINMOT MAIN_A, MAIN_B, MAIN_XA, MAIN_XB FSR B, FSR TDB, FSR A, FSR TDA, DA_FSRMOT FSR_A, FSR_B, FSR_XA, FSR_XB DUP B, DUP TDB, DUP A, DUP TDA, DA_DUPMOT DUP_A, DUP_B, DUP_XA, DUP_XB Description Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1). Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1). Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18). Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18). Drive Control Signal for MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8). Excitation signal for MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8). Step (2-phase excitation) 1 2 3 * * * * * * * 4 *
Phase DEVE_A DEVE_B DEVE_XA DEVE_XB
Appendix
8-604

Description of DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Winding resistance: 2.1 10% / Phase (25C) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Step (2-phase excitation) 1 2 3 * * * * * * * 4 *
Revision D
Description of MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8). Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Winding resistance: 5.5 10% / Phase (25C) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Step (2-phase excitation) 1 2 3 4 5 * * * * * * * * * * 6 * 7 * 8
Phase MAIN_A MAIN_B MAIN_XA MAIN_XB
Phase DUP_A DUP_B DUP_XA DUP_XB
Description of DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18). Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Winding resistance: 6.2 10% / Phase (25C) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Phase FSR_A FSR_B FSR_XA FSR_XB
Appendix
8-605
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 4 DEVELOPER1 COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-606

P/J No. Signal line Description
Revision D
P51-34 P443-2 NOTNR_C P51-36 P444-2 NOTNR_K P12-23 P42-8 P12-23 P42-9 P12-21 P42-10 P12-24 P42-7 P12-3
Toner quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9) Toner quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9)
NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9) Selected Y Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check. NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9) Selected M Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check. NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9) Selected C Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check. NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9) Selected K Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check. Detect signal for residual quantity toner.
P42-28 NOTNR
Toner Quantity Check Circuit

P/J No. P51-11 P431-2 Signal line Description
ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY SW TCRU_Y (Y) (PL12.2.10). ON(L)+3.3VDC Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present. ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY SW TCRU_M (M) (PL12.2.10). ON(L)+3.3VDC Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present. ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY SW TCRU_C (C) (PL12.2.10). ON(L)+3.3VDC Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present. ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY SW TCRU_K (K) (PL12.2.10). ON(L)+3.3VDC Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present. Toner quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9) Toner quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9)
Toner Quantity Check cannot be done for all four colors at the same time, so they are done one at a time in order. It is by the NOTNR_CHK_* signal that a certain color is selected for detection of toner quantity, and it is by the selected color's NOTNR_* signal than toner quantity is detected. The result of the NOTNR signal is returned to the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
P51-13 P432-2
P51-29 P433-2
P51-31 P434-2
P51-16 P441-2 NOTNR_Y P51-18 P442-2 NOTNR_M
Appendix
8-607
Revision D
DEVELOPER2 COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-608

Description of TONER MOTOR ASSY. Motor type: PM type stepping motor Step angle: 7.5 0.5 Winding resistance: 80 10% / Phase (20C)
Revision D
Excitation sequence : See the following the table. (*: excitation)

Step (2-phase excitation) 1 * * * * * * * * * 2 3 4 * 5 * * * * * 6 7 8 *
Phase A XA B XB
Signal line TMOT_Y_A, TMOT_Y_B, TMOT_Y_XA, TMOT_Y_XB TMOT_M_A, TMOT_M_B, TMOT_M_XA, TMOT_M_XB TMOT_C_A, TMOT_C_B, TMOT_C_XA, TMOT_C_XB TMOT_K_A, TMOT_K_B, TMOT_K_XA, TMOT_K_XB
Description Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (Y) inside HOLDER ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.5) Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (M) inside HOLDER ASSY (M) (PL12.2.6) Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (C) inside HOLDER ASSY (C) (PL12.2.7) Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (K) inside HOLDER ASSY (K) (PL12.2.8)
Appendix
8-609
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 6
FUSER COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-610
Revision D
P/J No. P13-19 P138-3
Signal line
Description
EXIT PAPER Fuser's Paper Sensing Signal by Exit SENSED(L)+3.3VDC Sensor inside FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp Sensor, for judging Fuser Control Temperature. (Analog data) Control Signal for Heater Lamp ON/Lamp OFF. Power source AC input Neutral Side (heater supply voltage). Power source AC input Line Side (heater supply voltage).
P13-20 P138-4 FUSER_STS
P12-20 P42-11 HEATER ON(L) P162-2 P232-3 AC N P162-1 P232-1 AC L
Heater's rated output : 600W 30W (100V) Thermostat's contact open temperature : 160C 5C
Appendix
8-611
Revision D
ROS COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-612
Revision D
P/J No. P15-20 P15-19 P15-18 P15-17 P15-16 P15-15 P15-14 P15-13 P15-12 P15-11 P15-10 P15-9 P15-6 P151-1 P151-2 P151-3 P151-4 P151-5 P151-6 P151-7 P151-8 P151-9
Signal line XPDATA_A_Y XPDATA_B_M XPDATA_C_C XPDATA_C_K MO_A_Y MO_B_M MO_C_C MO_D_K VL1_A_Y
Description Pixel data signal for ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) internal Quad Beam Laser Diode emission. (4 color separation Laser Diode)
LD light quantity Adjustment Control Signal, for each color.
P151-10 VL1_B_M P151-11 VL1_C_C P151-12 VL1_D_K P151-15 LD +5VDC
LD light quantity Adjustment Voltage, for each color.
LD Power Supply Voltage, for each color.
P15-5
P151-16
Scanning start reference signal based SOS on input of light to SOS SENSOR inside SENSED(L)+3.3VDC laser beam PWBA SOS. SCANNER MOTOR ON(L) +5VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for Polygon Motor inside ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1). Write/Read Data to PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8). Clock Signal to PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8). Write/Read Data to CRUM of PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3). Clock Signal to CRUM of PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3).
P15-2 P15-2 P140-7 P140-2 P140-3
P151-16
P151-19 EEPROM DATA P144-4 P71-2 P71-3 EEPROM CLOCK CRUM DATA CRUM CLOCK
Appendix
8-613
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 8 XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS1
Appendix
8-614
Revision D
P/J No. P140-12 P141-2
Signal line
Description
Waste Toner Bottle full sensing signal TONER FULL sent by SENSOR TNR FULL SENSED(H) +3.3VDC (PL6.1.13). Measurement Data sent by ADC Sensor inside SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11).(Analog data) Monitor Output Signal sent by ADC Sensor inside SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11). LED Control Signal for LED inside SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11). (Analog data) Printer's Environmental Temperature Data measured by SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4). (Analog data) Printer's Environmental Humidity Data measured by SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4). (Analog data)
P13-12
P1361-5 ADC VOUT
P13-15
P1361-2 ADC MONITOR
P13-16
P1361-1 GLED
P24-3
P2361-2 ENV HUMI
P24-1
P2361-4 ENV TEMP
Appendix
8-615
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 9 XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS2
Appendix
8-616

P/J No. P802 *1 Signal line ICT2 CLEANER
Revision D
Description Output to IDT2 Cleaner from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output for Primary Transfer to IDT1 from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output to IDT1 Cleaner from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output from HVPS in PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) to Refresher. Output for Charging to RTC from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output to Developer Y (Magnet Roll) from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output to Developer M (Magnet Roll) from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output to Developer C (Magnet Roll) from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output to Developer K (Magnet Roll) from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Output for Discharging to Detack Saw inside BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) from HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9). Output for 3rd Stage Transfer to BTR inside BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) from HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9).
P701
*1
IDT1
P801 P805 P804
*1 *1 *1
IDT1 CLEANER RFB RTC
P601
*1
DEVE Y
P602 P/J No. P13-26 P13-27 P13-28 P13-29 P13-30 P13-31 P13-32 Signal line Description Current Control Signal for BTR (+) output. (Analog data) Voltage Control Signal for BTR (-) output. (Analog data) Voltage Control Signal for DTS output. (Analog data) ON/OFF Control Signal for BTR (+) output. ON/OFF Control Signal for BTR (-) output. ON/OFF Control Signal for DTS output. Voltage monitor signal for BTR output. (Analogue price) Output for Secondary Transfer to IDT2 from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). P604 P603
*1
DEVE M
P5011-7 HV_REF_BTR_P P5011-6 HV_REF_BTR_M P5011-5 HV_REF_DTS P5011-4 BTR_P ON(L)+24VDC P5011-3 BTR_M ON(L)-24VDC P5011-2 DTS ON(L)+24VDC P5011-1 HV_MONI_BTR_V
*1
DEVE C
*1
DEVE K
P5030
*1
DTS
P5020
*1
BTR
NOTE *1: It contacts with HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4), STUD PLUNGER (PL11.1.5) and STUD PLUNGER D/EARTH (PL10.1.18).
P702
*1
IDT2
Appendix
8-617
Revision D
Connection Diagram -10 PAPER FEEDER COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-618
Revision D
P/J No. P13-3 P139-9
Signal line
Description
DUP JAM SENSED(L) Paper Sensing Signal for Duplex sent by +3.3VDC SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4). FULL STACK SENSED(L) +3.3VDC MSI NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC Full Stack Sensing Signal for Paper Exit Discharge sent by SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4). Paper Sensing Signal for Hand Insertion sent by SENSOR PAPER (MSI No Paper) (PL7.1.4).
P13-6
P139-6
P13-9
P139-3
P13-11 P139-1 P18-3 P18-5 P19-2 P181-1 *1 *1
MSI FEED SOL ON(L) ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID +24VDC FEED MSI (PL7.1.40). REGI PAPER SENSED(L) +3.3VDC Paper Sensing Signal for Regi sent by SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20).
REGI CLUTCH ON(L) ON/OFF Control Signal of Regi Clutch +24VDC inside CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) MSI TURN CLUTCH ON(L) +24VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) Paper Sensing Signal for OHP sent by SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16). (High: plain paper. Low: OHP transparency or no paper.)
P32-2
OHP PAPER P321-2 SENSED(L) +3.3VDC
NOTE *1: Direct attachment to the parts. Winding resistance for Solenoid and Clutch.
P/L No. PL 7.1.40 PL 10.1.12 PL 5.1.9 Parts Name SOLENOID FEED MSI CLUTCH REGI CLUTCH TURN MSI Winding resistance 90 10% (20 C) 172 10% (20 C) 172 10% (20 C)
Appendix
8-619
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 11 CONTROLLER COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-620
Revision D
P/L No. P31-1 *1
Signal line TEST PRINT ON(L) +3.3VDC
Description Printer's internal Test Print can be made by setting to LOW level (connection to SG).
NOTE *1: Direct attachment to circuit board.
Appendix
8-621
Revision D
8.4 Parts List and Exploded Diagram for Large Capacity Paper Unit of The AcuLaser C4000
8.4.1 Attention on handling the part list
Followings are the points to note when using the part list and exploded diagrams.
The numbers in each illustration correspond to the parts list number for that illustration. The capital letters shown in the illustrations stand for the following: S: screw E: E ring KL: KL clip C: C ring N: nut The arrowheads in the illustrations indicate assemblies made up of lower parts with their numbers.
Appendix
Parts List and Exploded Diagram for Large Capacity Paper Unit of The AcuLaser C4000
8-622
Revision D Table 8-2. Parts list of the large capacity paper unit
No. 01-4-4 Part Name HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T DRIVE ASSY FEEDER GEAR IDLER EXIT SENSOR LEVER LOW PAPER HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ
8.4.2 Parts List Tables

The following tables show the part list of the Large capacity paper unit.
Table 8-2. Parts list of the large capacity paper unit

No. 01-1-1 01-1-4 01-1-5 01-1-6 01-1-7 01-1-8 01-2-1 01-2-2 01-2-7 01-2-8 01-3-1 01-3-3 01-3-4 01-3-5 01-3-6 01-3-17 01-3-18 01-3-20 01-3-24 01-4-1 01-4-2 01-4-3 COVER L COVER R COVER FRONT DOUBLE CASTER-F DOUBLE CASTER-R INDICATOR GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 CHUTE ASSY TURN PICK UP ASSY ROLL ASSY FEED EXIT SENSOR ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR LINK SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 ROLL ASSY TURN ROLL ASSY PWBA FEEDER HARNESS ASSY PFLG HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T Part Name
01-4-5 01-4-6 01-4-7 01-4-9 01-4-11
Appendix
8-623
Revision D
8.4.3 Exploded Diagrams

The following pages show exploded diagrams of the Large capacity paper unit.
Appendix
8-624
C813-OPTI-024
01-1-01
01-1-07 01-1-06
01-1-07 01-1-06
01-1-05 01-1-08
01-1-05
01-1-05
01-1-08
01-1-04
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_001Fa
Large Capacity Paper Unit (1.1)
Rev.01
C813-OPTI-025
PL17. 3
A B PL17. 3 C D
01-2-01 01-2-02
01-2-08
(P821) B
01-2-07 01-2-08 C
(P831) D
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_002Fa
Rev.01
C813-OPTI-026
01-3-03 01-3-03 01-3-01 01-3-05 01-3-04
01-3-06
01-3-20
01-3-18 01-3-17
01-3-24
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_003Fb
Rev.01
C813-OPTI-027
(J810)
(P81) (P83) (P82) (P84)
01-4-01 (J81)
01-4-02
(J82) (J8220) (P8220) 01-4-11
01-4-03 (J821) (J83) (J8220) (J831) 01-4-04
(P824) (P8220) (P825) 01-4-11 (J822) (J823) (J832) (J833) 01-4-05 01-4-06 (J84)
(P834) (P835)
(P823) 01-4-07 (P833) 01-4-07 01-4-09
01-4-09
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_004Fb
Large Capacity Paper Unit (1.4) Rev.01
Revision D
8.5 Wiring Diagrams

This section describes the connector locations. P and J stand for Plug and Jack, respectively.
8.5.1 P/J Locations

See the following figures for the P/J locations.
Figure 8-8. P/J Location
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-629
Revision D
8.5.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables

See the following table for the plug and jack (P/J) location.
P/J 81 82 83 84 810 821 822 823 824 825 831 832 833 834 835 8220 8220 Coordinates H-7 H-7 H-7 H-8 H-6 I-7 E-7 E-9 G-8 F-9 H-9 E-8 E-10 G-10 F-10 G-8 G-9 Description Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy OPF PLG Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy FDR2T Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy FDR3T Connects PWBA Feeder and Drive Assy Feeder Connects Harness Assy OPF PLG and PWBA Feeder Connects Switch Assy Size (Tray 2) and Harness Assy FDR2T Connects Sensor No Paper (Tray 2) and Harness Assy NPRSJ Connects Sensor Low Paper (Tray 2) and Harness Assy FDR2T Connects Solenoid Feed (Tray 2) and Harness Assy FDR2T Connects Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 2) and Harness Assy FDR2T Connects Switch Assembly Size (Tray 3) and FDR3T Harness Assembly Connects Sensor No Paper (Tray 3) and Harness Assy NPRSJ Connects Sensor Low Paper (Tray 3) and FDR3T Harness Assembly Connects Solenoid Feed (Tray 3) and PWBA Feeder Connects Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 3) and PWBA Feeder Relay Connector for Harness Assy FDR2T to Harness Assy NPRSJ Relay Connector for Harness Assy FDR3T to Harness Assy NPRSJ
Appendix
Wiring Diagrams
8-630
Revision D
8.6 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information

8.6.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
The symbols used in the overall wiring connection diagrams on the following pages are as follows:
Symbols Description Indicates connection of parts by HARNESS, wire, etc.
XX XX MCU PWB PL X, Y, Z
A box with no part name inside indicates a path by a connector (P/J). A number inside the box indicates connector number. Indicates a connector (P/J) written across several locations. The number inside the box indicates connector number. Boxes with part names inside indicate those parts. The part name shown here indicates item Z of plate (PL) XY in Section 8.4.2 "Parts List Tables". Indicates a section in Section 8.6.2 "Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components". The number inside indicates the section number.
Appendix
8-631
Revision D
Figure 8-9. Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
Appendix
8-632
Revision D
3. CASSETTE3 COMPONENTS Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3) (PL17.2.7). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) (PL17.3.4). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3) (PL17.4.7). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3) (PL17.3.17). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN (Tray 3) (PL17.3.18). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1).
8.6.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components

8.6.2.1 Configuration
Wiring connection diagrams are divided into 3 sections and provide details concerning connections between parts. 1. DRIVE COMPONENTS Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5). 2. CASSETTE2 COMPONENTS Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2) (PL17.2.7). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) (PL17.3.4). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) (PL17.4.7). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2) (PL17.3.17). Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.18). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1).
Appendix
8-633
Revision D
Symbol Description Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High: H) when a function's motion has been activated. The voltage shown is the signal strength at High condition. The arrow shows signal direction. Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High: H) when function's condition has been detected. The voltage shown is the signal strength at High condition. The arrow shows signal direction.
8.6.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components
The symbols used in the wiring connection diagrams for parts on the following pages are as follows. Explanations of commonly used symbols are omitted.
Symbol Description
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC Shows a plug (female connector).
Shows a jack (male connector).
Shows wiring connections.
P/JXX
YY
Shows Pin yy and Jack yy for Pxx/Jxx connector. Shows a part. The "PL x.y.z" number refers to Section 8.4.2 "Parts List Tables", Plate (PL) number 'x.y', item number 'z'. Shows a part's internal component, with the name of that component.
I/L +24VDC
Shows DC voltage when the Interlock Switch of the PWBA MCU & HVPS is ON.
PWB DRIVE PL X.Y.Z
+5VDC +3.3VDC
Shows DC voltage.
Heater
SG
Indicates signal ground.
Control
Shows the PWB's internal CONTROLLER, with its outline.
AG
Indicates analog ground.
DEVE_A
Shows harness/wire connections between components, with the signal name/content. The arrow shows signal direction.
RTN
Indicates return.
Appendix
8-634
Revision D
DRIVE COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-635
Revision D
Signal line FDR A, FDR B, FDR XA, FDR XB, DA_FDRMOT FDR_A, FDR_B, FDR_XA, FDR_XB P/J No.
Description Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5). Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5).
Signal line
Description
Installation Sensing Signal for OPTION P21-24 P210-A3 NO OPF(L)+3.3VDC FEEDER. (High: Installed. Low: Not Installed.)
Description of DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1). Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Winding resistance: TBD 10% / Phase (25C) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Phase DEVE_A DEVE_B DEVE_XA DEVE_XB
Appendix
8-636
Revision D
CASSETTE2 COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-637
Revision D
P/L No. P82-1 P821-4
Signal line TRAY2 SIZE0 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY2 SIZE1 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY2 SIZE2 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC
Description ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch of SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7). ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch of SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7). ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch of SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7).
P82-2
P821-3
P82-4
P821-1
P8220-3 P822-1
TRAY2 NO PAPER Paper detection signal for fuser issued by SENSED(L)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) (PL17.3.4) Cassette paper quantity sensing signal TRAY2 LOW PAPER sent by SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) SENSED(L)+3.3VDC (PL17.4.7) TRAY2 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC TRAY2 TURN CL ON(L)+24VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID FEED (TRAY 2) (PL17.3.17) ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH ASSY TURN (TRAY 2) (PL17.3.18)
P82-10
P823-1
P82-12 P82-14
P824-1 P825-1
Appendix
8-638
Revision D
Connection Diagram - 3 CASSETTE3 COMPONENTS
Appendix
8-639
Revision D
P/J No. P83-1 P83-2 P83-4 P831-4 P831-3 P831-1
Signal line
Description
TRAY3 SIZE0 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch of SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7). ON(L)+3.3VDC TRAY3 SIZE1 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch of ON(L)+3.3VDC SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7). TRAY3 SIZE2 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch of ON(L)+3.3VDC SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7). TRAY3 NO PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TRAY3 LOW PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TRAY3 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC TRAY3 TURN CL ON(L)+24VDC Paper detection signal for fuser issued by SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) (PL17.3.4) Cassette paper quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3) (PL17.4.7) ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID FEED (TRAY 3) (PL17.3.17) ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH ASSY TURN (TRAY 3) (PL17.3.18)
P8220-4 P832-1
P83-10 P833-1
P83-12 P834-1 P83-14 P835-1
Appendix
8-640
Revision D
8.7 Component Layout
Figure 8-10. C470MAIN Component Layout - Component Side
Appendix
Component Layout
8-641
Revision D
Figure 8-11. C470MAIN Component Layout - Soldered Side
Appendix
Component Layout
8-642
Revision D
8.8 Circuit Diagrams

The following pages show the circuit diagrams of the C470MAIN Circuit Board.
Appendix
Circuit Diagrams
8-643

Service Manual C4000 - C4100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual C4000 - C4100 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual C4000 - C4100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be followed when working on the printer?

What safety precautions should be followed when working on the printer?

What components does the document describe wiring diagrams and signal information for?

What components does the document describe wiring diagrams and signal information for?

SERVICE MANUAL Rosco

Color Laser Page Printer

AcuLaser C4000 AcuLaser C4100

About This Manual

Symbols Used in this Manual

Auto Density Control Alarm Assembly Auxiliary

Guide Gauge Ground

Electric Electro Photography Electric Sub System

Interface Interlock Image Density

[L] L L L/H L/P LD LEF LVPS

Overhead Projector Organic Photo Conductor Option

Tooth (number of Gear) Temperature Transfer Trangistor-Transistor Logic

Yellow Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/ Black Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/ Black

Figure 0-1. Power Supply

High Temperature Assembly

Warning and Caution Labels

Figure 0-3. Warning and Caution Labels

Safety System Schematic

Issued Date November 15, 2002

Chapter 2 Operating Principles

Chapter 4 Disassembly and Assembly

Chapter 7 AcuLaser C4100

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

1.2.1.2 Printer Basic Specification

1.2.1 Basic Specifications

PAPER FEED REFERENCE

PRINTING SPEED Table 1-2. First Printing Time

Table 1-3. Continuous printing speed

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

PAPER FEED Table 1-4. Paper Feed

Table 1-5. Optional Paper Source Combination

First Cassette Optional Second and Third Cassette

Standard Paper Normal Paper

*1: RX-80 (80g/m2)

TBD Sheets Standard MP Tray TBD Sheets

TBD Sheets (10mm)

Cassette Optional 500 Sheets Unit

Standard Paper Normal Paper Standard Paper Normal Paper

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

Standard cassette MP Tray (500 Sheets)

Optional 500 Sheets Unit *2

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

Optional 500 Sheets Unit *2

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

Same specification as cassette of the main unit

OUTPUT PAPER CAPACITY

Table 1-8. Stand Alone Outline Dimensions and Weights

PAPER FEED SIZES

Table 1-9. Outline Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed

EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100

NOISE Table 1-10. Noise

COMPONENTS THAT REQUIRE REGULAR REPLACEMENT

35 dB (A) Back Ground Noise